2013 - Rock City Construction Co., Inc.

Transcription

241 Wilson Pike Circle • P.O. Box 5036 • Brentwood, TN 37024-5036
BID DOCUMENT REVISION No. 2
Williamson County Public Safety Facility
June 19, 2014
1. Addendum #2 dated 6/19/14 issued by Thomas Miller & Partners is attached.
2. The Pre-bid Meeting Minutes dated 6/12/14 prepared by The Parent Company are attached hereto.
3. The Carpentry Package is to include Specification Section 323119 – Metal Fences and Gates as issued in
Thomas Miller & Partners (TMP) Addendum #1.
4. The Flooring Package is to include Specification Section 0996723 – Resinous Flooring as issued in TMP
Addendum #1.
5. For Reference only, the scope of work for each bid package is being sent to all bidders of record under
separate cover.
6. A copy of the Project Schedule dated 6/12/14 is attached.
7. All post curbs, flush curbs, and concrete wheel stops are to be included in the Asphalt Paving package.
8. The Carpentry Package is to include Specification Section 321613 – Concrete Pavement, Curbs & Gutters
(applicable to Carpentry Package Work)
9. The Concrete Package is to include Specification Section 321613 – Concrete Pavement, Curbs & Gutters
(applicable to Concrete Package Work)
10. The footing for the precast plaza wall as indicated on sheet S101 is to be included in the Concrete Package.
11. A copy of the Geotechnical Engineering Report prepared by Terracon Consultants dated 11/8/13 is being
sent to all bidders of record under separate cover.
12. The Drywall Package is to OMIT Specification Section 054000 – Cold Formed Metal Framing and
INCLUDE Specification Section 054000 – Exterior Steel Stud System as per the attached Addendum #2.
A revised proposal form will be distributed to Drywall bidders.
13. Electrical Bidders are to note the revised Specification Section 281300 – MATV Antennae/ Cable System
as noted in the attached Addendum #2.
14. Electrical Bidders are to include Specification Section 282300 – Video Surveillance as indicated in the
attached Addendum #2.
15. Electrical Bidders – Note that the owner may elect to provide and install the Access Control System as
specified in Section 281300 and Video Surveillance System as specified in Section 282300. There will be
a space identified on the revised Proposal Form to identify this cost. All rough in for the access control
system and video surveillance system will remain in the Electrical Package scope of work.
16. Carpentry Package is to include the solid surface window sills – typical.
Please write acknowledgement of this Bid Document Revision on the Proposal Form.
End of Bid Document Revision No.2
615.221.7000 • Fax: 615.221.7013
www.theparentco.com
Bid Document Revision #2
Page 2
cc: Al Ritter, WCG
Keith Feinstein, WCG
Bill Jorgensen, WCG
Mac Purdy, WCG
Leslie Mitchell, WCG
Jeff Earwood, TMP
Date
Project
Page
ADDENDUM NO. 02
June 19, 2014
Public Safety Facility – 911 & Emergency Operations Center
Franklin, Williamson County, TN
TMP No. A03212.01
2
11. Revised sheet E102 dated 6/19/14
a. Revised General Note F
a. Clarified location of UPS in room 100
a. Clarified location of UPS and PDU’s in room 212.
b. Added a tag to junction box in room 214
a. Modified description of Main Equipment to be “Switch Gear Construction”
a. Modified breaker size to 100A in panel ELC1 circuit 56, 58, 60 to match plans.
TELECOMMUNICATION DRAWINGS
16. Revised sheet T000 dated 6/19/14
a. Revised security legend
b. Revised responsibility matrix
a. Added and relocated camera devices
b. Added camera numbers
c. Added an intercom to the main building entry
a. Added camera numbers
a. Added details
b. Added camera schedule
a. Revised access control details
b. Added general notes
BIDDER QUESTIONS
Question:
Reference Spec. section 034500, Para. 1.2, Para. 1.2, A2 doesn’t match the bid form
Alternate 2. The drawings make no mention of an alternate for precast in the areas
mentioned. Please confirm if there is an alternate involving precast.
Answer: There are no alternates involving precast. See revised section 034500 Precast
Architectural Concrete.
Date
Project
Page
ADDENDUM NO. 02
June 19, 2014
TMP No. A03212.01
3
Question:
Reference Spec. section 034500, Para. 2.3, The finish of rebar and welded wire
reinforcement is not identified. Industry standard is to use uncoated rebar and
welded wire reinforcement with adequate concrete cover. PCI recommends that the
finishes of rebar and welded wire reinforcement be the same - uncoated or coated.
Please confirm uncoated rebar and welded wire reinforcement is acceptable.
Answer: PCI and APA recommendations regarding finishes of rebar and welded wire
reinforcement are acceptable
Question:
Reference Spec. section 034500, Para. 2.5, Industry standard is to use shop painted
hardware unless exposed to weather or below grade. Is it acceptable to galvanize
only items exposed to weather and below grade, or is all loose hardware to be
galvanized?
Answer: All steel items shall be finished as specified.
Question:
Underground concrete is stated to be provided by the GC on sheet E503. Do we need to
include the encasement?
Answer: This is an item to be discussed between the Construction Manager and Contractor.
Question:
One of the UPS systems in the specification section 263305 is Exide. I do not think they
make UPS’s. Is this a typo?
Answer: This should be Eaton.
Question:
General note F on E101 & E102 refers to seismic specifications and I do not find a
seismic sec in the electrical section.
Answer: The facility is designed to requirements of Seismic Category C.
Question:
Are all disconnects for HVAC equipment to be furnished by the mechanical contractor?
They are not shown on the electrical drawings and I did not find any reference in the
electrical or mechanical specifications.
Answer: Per Mechanical design, disconnecting means to be integral part of mechanical
equipment.
Question:
The symbol for a floor receptacle on the legend on E001 does not match the one shown
on the drawings. The drawings would imply that each floor receptacle is a quad outlet.
Answer: Each floor receptacle is a quad outlet.
Question:
How many times do we need to ground the halo system in radio room 211 and what
should we connect the grounds to? Note 8 on E202.
Answer: Once and to structural steel.
Date
Project
Page
ADDENDUM NO. 02
June 19, 2014
TMP No. A03212.01
4
Question:
Note 2 on E202 indicates plug strips are to be installed on UPS racks. Are we to furnish
and install the plug strips? I found no information shown on E502 as per the note.
Answer: See sheet E400 for one line of power to rack equipment.
Question:
There is no exit light identified on the fixture schedule. I assume this will be in the
addendum.
Answer: See revised E001 dated 6/19/14 and provide fixture indicated or approved equal.
Question:
Note 1 at the bottom of the fixture schedule on sheet E001 indicates that all fixtures on
the life safety circuits must have battery backup. Is this redundancy required? The
emergency egress lights are on a dedicated breaker in the MSB and life safety system
from the generator.
Answer: This redundancy is required, provide inverters where required to power LED fixtures
which do not have capability of internal battery.
Question:
Addendum Tank Called out for 120 hour fuel tank, is this correct.
Answer: Per specifications, each generator to have a sub-base tank sized for 2-hours, all other
fuel to be by mechanical specified fuel tank with interconnections per Mechanical sheets.
Question:
Is Notifier and acceptable fire Alarm system?
Answer: Yes, it is a Honeywell product.
Question:
Switchgear rating on panel schedule and one line diagram are different, which is
correct?
Answer: One-line diagram rating is the correct 3000A bus, 2400A MCB.
Question:
How is the generator and switchgear supposed to operate?
Answer: All switchgear breakers to be electrically operated, with the following scenario:
If utility power is lost:
a. Generators are to start.
b. Utility breaker to open, all feeder breakers except life safety to open,
c. tie breaker(normally open) to close.
d. Generator to first be able to connect shall have breaker closed. Critical breaker to
close.
e. Second generator able to connect due to (synchronization between gensets by
generator control software) shall have breaker closed, equipment branch breakers to
close.
Once power is restored:
a. After 1 minute, Tie breaker to open.
b. Utility breaker to close
c. Generators to power down.
Date
Project
Page
ADDENDUM NO. 02
June 19, 2014
TMP No. A03212.01
5
Question:
May the “St” Thermal Motor Switches be Horsepower Rated “snap” switches.
Answer: These are to be Thermal Motor switches. Snap switches will not be accepted.
Question:
REF E201 CENTER TOP; ELC1 56,58,60 20/3 PER PANEL SCHEDULE…; WHAT IS
NOTE 2 ON E201 RE 100A/3NF/1 ON E201?
Answer: The panel schedule is wrong, this circuit should be a 100A/3p breaker and it’s to feed the
video display wall control unit. The Note 2 is correct for that disconnect switch.
Question:
Section 077100 – Are shop fabricated Stainless Steel Reglet & Counter Flashing with
profiles shown on the plans acceptable?
Answer: Yes.
Question:
Section 077100 – Are shop fabricated Roof-Edge Drainage Components (Scuppers,
Collector Heads & Downspouts) acceptable?
Answer: Yes. Color to be as indicated in drawings.
Question:
Will the scupper openings be precut in the Precast and ACM Panels?
Answer: Yes.
Question:
On the drawings for the emergency domestic water booster pump it shows a tank. What
kind of tank is this? I could not find specs for the tank and don’t know if it is owner
provided or a specialty tank that will need some digging to find.
Answer: The tank model was clipped off in the original drawings. We did move the note so it
would appear and it shows on sheet P102 in the Addendum #1 set.
Question:
Drawings do not show an elevator equipment room. Elevator spec calls for a hole-less
hydraulic elevator and does not mention items that are typical of a machine room-less
hydraulic elevator. Please confirm that we are to provide a machine room-less hole-less
hydraulic elevator.
Answer: There is a machine room named ELEV MECH 135 north of Stair 1.
Question:
Structural drawings appear to show the building has seismic requirements. Does the
elevator need to meet same seismic requirements assuming this is considered a critical
facility?
Answer: Yes – the facility is designed to requirements of Seismic Category C.
Question:
Elevator spec calls standby power switches. Will the elevator be on an emergency
power?
Answer: The elevator is on the equipment branch of the emergency power system.
Date
Project
Page
ADDENDUM NO. 02
June 19, 2014
TMP No. A03212.01
6
Question:
Elevator spec calls for a fire command center annunciator panel. Typically this is
provided on high rise buildings. Is a fire command center annunciator panel required?
Answer: A fire command center annunciator panel is not required.
Question:
I have talked to a switchgear and a generator manufacturer this morning and they both
tell me they are not including synchronization / paralleling in their pricing because it is not
called for on their drawings or in the specifications.
Answer: The specification section 263213 paragraph 2.8.B states what the generators are to be
capable of paralleling capabilities with interconnection to the switchgear.
SUBSTITUTIONS
The following substitutions have been approved:
1. Sure-Weld TPO roofing system by Carlisle Construction Materials Incorporated is an approved
equal.
2. Levitron is approved as a manufacturer for structured cabling.
3. Galaxy Control Systems and American Dynamics are approved manufacturers for access control.
Issued By
Jeff Earwood, AIA, LEED AP
THOMAS, MILLER & PARTNERS, PLLC
copy:
Owner
Consultants
LH/JE/A03212.01 bid
p:\2012\a03212\phase\5-bid\addendum #2\2014-06-19 wceoc - addendum #2.docx
SECTION 034500 - PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
1.5
Architectural precast concrete cladding units.
Architectural precast concrete load-bearing units at Mechanical Yard, Generator, and
Dumpster enclosures (Alternate No. 2, only).
Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing connection anchors in concrete.
Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for furnishing and installing connections attached
to structural-steel framing.
Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for kickers and other miscellaneous steel shapes.
Section 085113 "Aluminum Windows" for windows set into architectural precast concrete
units.
DEFINITIONS
Design Reference Sample: Sample of approved architectural precast concrete color, finish and
texture, preapproved by Architect.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture. Include compressive strength and
water-absorption tests.
C.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Detail fabrication and installation of architectural precast concrete units.
Indicate locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, and cross sections of each unit.
Indicate joints, reveals, drips, chamfers, and extent and location of each surface finish.
Indicate details at building corners.
Indicate separate face and backup mixture locations and thicknesses.
PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
034500 - 1
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
D.
Samples: Design reference samples for initial verification of design intent, for each type of finish
indicated on exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units, in sets of three,
representative of finish, color, and texture variations expected; approximately 12 by 12 by 2
inches.
1.
E.
When other faces of precast concrete unit are exposed, include Samples illustrating
workmanship, color, and texture of backup concrete as well as facing concrete.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For architectural precast concrete indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer licensed in the state of Tennessee responsible for their preparation.
1.
1.6
Indicate type, size, and length of welded connections by AWS standard symbols. Detail
loose and cast-in hardware and connections.
Indicate locations, tolerances, and details of anchorage devices to be embedded in or
attached to structure or other construction.
Indicate locations, extent, and treatment of dry joints if two-stage casting is proposed.
Include plans and elevations showing unit location and sequence of erection for special
conditions.
Indicate location of each architectural precast concrete unit by same identification mark
placed on panel.
Indicate relationship of architectural precast concrete units to adjacent materials.
Indicate locations, dimensions, and details of anchors, and joint widths.
If design modifications are proposed to meet performance requirements and field conditions,
submit design calculations and Shop Drawings. Do not adversely affect the appearance,
durability, or strength of units when modifying details or materials and maintain the general
design concept.
Show governing panel types, connections, types of reinforcement, including special
reinforcement, and concrete cover on reinforcement. Indicate location, type, magnitude, and
direction of loads imposed on the building structural frame from architectural precast
concrete.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.
B.
Welding certificates.
C.
Material Certificates: For the following items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Cementitious materials.
Reinforcing materials and prestressing tendons.
Admixtures.
Bearing pads.
Structural-steel shapes and hollow structural sections.
D.
Material Test Reports: For aggregates.
E.
Preconstruction test reports.
F.
Source quality-control test reports.
G.
Field quality-control and special inspection reports.
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
034500 - 2
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Erector Qualifications: A precast concrete erector qualified and designated by PCI's Certificate of
Compliance to erect Category A (Architectural Systems) for non-load (Base Bid) and Category S2
(Complex Structural Systems) for load-bearing members (Alternate No. 2).
B.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering architectural precast
concrete units to comply with performance requirements. This responsibility includes preparation
of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.
1.
2.
Designated as a PCI-certified plant for Group A, Category A1 - Architectural Cladding and
Load Bearing Units at time of bidding.
Has sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work.
C.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
D.
Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality-control
recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply with PCI MNL
117, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete
Products."
E.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D.1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel"; and AWS D1.4/D1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing
Steel."
F.
Sample Panels: After sample approval and before fabricating architectural precast concrete units,
produce a minimum of two sample panels approximately 16 sq. ft. in area for review by Architect.
Incorporate full-scale details of architectural features, finishes, textures, and transitions in sample
panels.
1.
2.
3.
4.
G.
1.8
A.
1.9
A.
Locate panels where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
Damage part of an exposed-face surface for each finish, color, and texture, and demonstrate
adequacy of repair techniques proposed for repair of surface blemishes.
After acceptance of repair technique, maintain one sample panel at manufacturer's plant and
one at Project site in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.
Demolish and remove sample panels when directed.
Range Samples: After sample panel approval and before fabricating architectural precast concrete
units, produce a minimum of five sets of samples, approximately 16 sq. ft. in area, representing
anticipated range of each color and texture on Project's units. Maintain one set of range samples
at Project site and remaining range sample sets at manufacturer's plant as color and texture
approval reference.
COORDINATION
Furnish loose connection hardware and anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other
construction without delaying the Work. Provide locations, setting diagrams, templates,
instructions, and directions, as required, for installation.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver architectural precast concrete units in such quantities and at such times to limit unloading
units temporarily on the ground or other rehandling.
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
034500 - 3
B.
Support units during shipment on nonstaining shock-absorbing material.
C.
Store units with adequate dunnage and bracing and protect units to prevent contact with soil, to
prevent staining, and to prevent cracking, distortion, warping or other physical damage.
D.
Place stored units so identification marks are clearly visible, and units can be inspected.
E.
Handle and transport units in a manner that avoids excessive stresses that cause cracking or
damage.
F.
Lift and support units only at designated points indicated on Shop Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements," to design architectural precast concrete units.
B.
Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 and design recommendations of PCI MNL 120, "PCI
Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable to types of architectural precast
concrete units indicated.
C.
Structural Performance: Provide architectural precast concrete units and connections capable of
withstanding the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated:
1.
2.
Loads: As indicated on Structural drawings.
Design precast concrete units and connections to maintain clearances at openings, to allow
for fabrication and construction tolerances, to accommodate live-load deflection, shrinkage
and creep of primary building structure, and other building movements as follows:
a.
3.
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
Thermal Movements: Provide for in-plane thermal movements resulting from annual ambient
temperature changes of 120 deg F.
MOLD MATERIALS
Molds: Rigid, dimensionally stable, non-absorptive material, warp and buckle free, that provides
continuous and true precast concrete surfaces within fabrication tolerances indicated; nonreactive
with concrete and suitable for producing required finishes.
1.
B.
Upward and downward movement of 1/2 inch.
Mold-Release Agent: Commercially produced form-release agent that does not bond with,
stain or adversely affect precast concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent surface
or joint treatments of precast concrete.
Surface Retarder: Chemical set retarder, capable of temporarily delaying final hardening of newly
placed concrete mixture to depth of reveal specified.
REINFORCING MATERIALS
Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer
recycled content not less than 25 percent.
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
034500 - 4
B.
2.4
A.
Supports: Suspend reinforcement from back of mold or use bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other
devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in
place according to PCI MNL 117.
CONCRETE MATERIALS
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type III.
1.
B.
For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, use white cement, of same type, brand,
and mill source.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117, ASTM C 33/C 33M, with coarse
aggregates complying with Class 5S. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for each type of
exposed finish from a single source (pit or quarry) for Project.
1.
Face-Mixture-Coarse Aggregates: Selected, hard, and durable; free of material that reacts
with cement or causes staining; to match selected finish sample.
a.
2.
Gradation: To match design reference sample.
Face-Mixture-Fine Aggregates: Selected, natural or manufactured sand compatible with
coarse aggregate; to match approved finish sample.
C.
Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or strength of
concrete and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 117.
D.
Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to not
contain calcium chloride, or more than 0.15 percent chloride ions or other salts by weight of
admixture.
2.5
STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS
A.
Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B.
Carbon-Steel-Headed Studs: ASTM A 108, AISI 1018 through AISI 1020, cold finished, AWS
D1.1/D1.1M, Type A or Type B, with arc shields and with minimum mechanical properties of PCI
MNL 117, Table 3.2.3.
C.
Carbon-Steel Plate: ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C.
D.
Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510 or Grade 35028.
E.
Carbon-Steel Castings: ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade 60-30.
F.
High-Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Steel: ASTM A 572/A 572M.
G.
Carbon-Steel Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B or Grade C.
H.
Wrought Carbon-Steel Bars: ASTM A 675/A 675M, Grade 65.
I.
Deformed-Steel Wire or Bar Anchors: ASTM A 496/A 496M or ASTM A 706/A 706M.
J.
Carbon-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A or ASTM F 1554, Grade 36; carbon-steel,
hex-head bolts and studs; carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A 563; and flat, unhardened steel washers,
ASTM F 844.
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
034500 - 5
K.
High-Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; heavy hex
carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A 563; and hardened carbon-steel washers, ASTM F 436.
L.
Zinc-Coated Finish: For exterior steel items, steel in exterior walls, and items indicated for
galvanizing, apply zinc coating by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A
153/A 153M.
1.
M.
2.6
A.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
BEARING PADS
Provide one of the following bearing pads for architectural precast concrete units as recommended
by precast fabricator for application
1.
2.
2.7
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint with dry film containing not less than
94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035B or SSPC-Paint 20.
Elastomeric Pads: AASHTO M 251, plain, vulcanized, 100 percent polychloroprene
(neoprene) elastomer, molded to size or cut from a molded sheet, Type A durometer
hardness of 50 to 70, ASTM D 2240, minimum tensile strength 2250 psi, ASTM D 412.
Random-Oriented-Fiber-Reinforced Elastomeric Pads: Preformed, randomly oriented
synthetic fibers set in elastomer. Type A durometer hardness of 70 to 90, ASTM D 2240;
capable of supporting a compressive stress of 3000 psi with no cracking, splitting, or
delaminating in the internal portions of pad. Test one specimen for every 200 pads used in
Project.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Reglets: Specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
B.
Precast Accessories: Provide clips, hangers, high-density plastic or steel shims, and other
accessories required to install architectural precast concrete units.
2.8
A.
CONCRETE MIXTURES
Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required.
1.
2.
Use a single design mixture for units with more than one major face or edge exposed.
Where only one face of unit is exposed use either a single design mixture or separate
mixtures for face and backup.
B.
Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified
precast plant personnel at architectural precast concrete fabricator's option.
C.
Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by ACI
318 or PCI MNL 117 when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.
D.
Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion face and backup mixtures or full-depth mixtures, at
fabricator's option by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211.1,
with materials to be used on Project, to provide normal-weight concrete with the following
properties:
1.
2.
Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi minimum.
Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
034500 - 6
E.
Water Absorption: 6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume, tested according to ASTM C 642,
except for boiling requirement.
F.
When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
2.9
MOLD FABRICATION
A.
Molds: Accurately construct molds, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand pressures due to
concrete-placement operations and temperature changes and for prestressing and detensioning
operations. Coat contact surfaces of molds with release agent before reinforcement is placed.
Avoid contamination of reinforcement and prestressing tendons by release agent.
B.
Maintain molds to provide completed architectural precast concrete units of shapes, lines, and
dimensions indicated, within fabrication tolerances specified.
1.
2.
2.10
A.
Form joints are not permitted on faces exposed to view in the finished work.
Edge and Corner Treatment: Uniformly chamfered.
FABRICATION
Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage
hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements.
Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware, and secure in place during precasting
operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect position of main reinforcement or
concrete placement.
1.
Weld-headed studs and deformed bar anchors used for anchorage according to AWS
D1.1/D1.1M and AWS C5.4, "Recommended Practices for Stud Welding."
B.
Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels,
cramps, hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing architectural precast concrete units to
supporting and adjacent construction.
C.
Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in architectural precast concrete units as
indicated on the Contract Drawings.
D.
Cast-in openings larger than 10 inches in any dimension. Do not drill or cut openings or
prestressing strand without Architect's approval.
E.
Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 117 for fabricating, placing, and
supporting reinforcement.
1.
2.
F.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or
destroy the bond with concrete. When damage to epoxy-coated reinforcing exceeds limits
specified in ASTM A 775/A 775M, repair with patching material compatible with coating
material and epoxy coat bar ends after cutting.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during
concrete-placement and consolidation operations. Completely conceal support devices to
prevent exposure on finished surfaces.
Reinforce architectural precast concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection
stresses and specified in-place loads.
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
034500 - 7
G.
Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 117 and requirements in this Section for measuring, mixing,
transporting, and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added.
H.
Place face mixture to a minimum thickness after consolidation of the greater of 1 inch or 1.5 times
the maximum aggregate size, but not less than the minimum reinforcing cover specified.
I.
Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent cold joints or planes of weakness from forming
in precast concrete units.
1.
J.
Place backup concrete mixture to ensure bond with face-mixture concrete.
Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or
damaging reinforcement and built-in items, and minimize pour lines, honeycombing, or entrapped
air voids on surfaces. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 117.
1.
Place self-consolidating concrete without vibration according to PCI TR-6, "Interim
Guidelines for the Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete in Precast/Prestressed Concrete
Institute Member Plants." Ensure adequate bond between face and backup concrete, if
used.
K.
Comply with PCI MNL 117 for hot- and cold-weather concrete placement.
L.
Identify pickup points of architectural precast concrete units and orientation in structure with
permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or
permanently mark casting date on each architectural precast concrete unit on a surface that does
not show in finished structure.
M.
Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 117, by moisture retention without heat or
by accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure units
until compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an effect on
performance or appearance of final product.
N.
Discard and replace architectural precast concrete units that do not comply with requirements,
including structural, manufacturing tolerance, and appearance, unless repairs meet requirements
in PCI MNL 117 and Architect's approval.
2.11
FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A.
Fabricate architectural precast concrete units to shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated so each
finished unit complies with PCI MNL 117 product tolerances as well as position tolerances for
cast-in items.
B.
Position Tolerances: For cast-in items measured from datum line location, as indicated on Shop
Drawings.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Weld Plates: Plus or minus 1 inch.
Inserts: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
Handling Devices: Plus or minus 3 inches.
Reinforcing Steel and Welded Wire Reinforcement: Plus or minus 1/4 inch where position
has structural implications or affects concrete cover; otherwise, plus or minus 1/2 inch.
Location of Rustication Joints: Plus or minus 1/8 inch.
Location of Opening within Panel: Plus or minus 1/4 inch.
Location of Flashing Reglets: Plus or minus 1/4 inch.
Location of Flashing Reglets at Edge of Panel: Plus or minus 1/8 inch.
Reglets for Glazing Gaskets: Plus or minus 1/8 inch.
Electrical Outlets, Hose Bibs: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
034500 - 8
11.
12.
13.
14.
2.12
A.
Location of Bearing Surface from End of Member: Plus or minus 1/4 inch.
Allowable Rotation of Plate, Channel Inserts, and Electrical Boxes: 2-degree rotation or 1/4
inch maximum over the full dimension of unit.
Position of Sleeve: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
Location of Window Washer Track or Buttons: Plus or minus 1/8 inch.
FINISHES
Exposed faces shall be free of joint marks, grain, and other obvious defects. Corners, including
false joints shall be uniform, straight, and sharp. Finish exposed-face surfaces of architectural
precast concrete units to match approved design reference sample, sample panels and as follows:
1.
PCI's "Architectural Precast Concrete - Color and Texture Selection Guide," of plate
numbers indicated.
a.
2.
Plate No. 127; Acid Etched - Light
Acid-Etched Finish: Use acid and hot-water solution, equipment, application techniques, and
cleaning procedures to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces. Protect
hardware, connections, and insulation from acid attach.
B.
Finish exposed top and back surfaces of architectural precast concrete units with smooth,
steel-trowel finish.
C.
Finish unexposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units with smooth, float finish.
2.13
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Quality-Control Testing: Test and inspect precast concrete according to PCI MNL 117
requirements. If using self-consolidating concrete, also test and inspect according to PCI TR-6,
ASTM C 1610/C 1610M, ASTM C 1611/C 1611M, ASTM C 1621/C 1621M, and ASTM C 1712.
B.
Strength of precast concrete units is considered deficient if units fail to comply with ACI 318
requirements for concrete strength.
C.
Testing: If there is evidence that strength of precast concrete units may be deficient or may not
comply with ACI 318 requirements, precaster will employ an independent testing agency to obtain,
prepare, and test cores drilled from hardened concrete to determine compressive strength
according to ASTM C 42/C 42M and ACI 318.
1.
2.
3.
4.
A minimum of three representative cores shall be taken from units of suspect strength, from
locations directed by Architect.
Test cores in an air-dry condition.
Strength of concrete for each series of three cores is considered satisfactory if average
compressive strength is equal to at least 85 percent of 28-day design compressive strength
and no single core is less than 75 percent of 28-day design compressive strength.
Report test results in writing on same day that tests are performed, with copies to Architect,
Contractor, and precast concrete fabricator. Test reports include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Project identification name and number.
Date when tests were performed.
Name of precast concrete fabricator.
Name of concrete testing agency.
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
034500 - 9
e.
Identification letter, name, and type of precast concrete unit(s) represented by core
tests; design compressive strength; type of break; compressive strength at breaks,
corrected for length-diameter ratio; and direction of applied load to core in relation to
horizontal plane of concrete as placed.
D.
Patching: If core test results are satisfactory and precast concrete units comply with requirements,
clean and dampen core holes and solidly fill with precast concrete mixture that has no coarse
aggregate, and finish to match adjacent precast concrete surfaces.
E.
Defective Units: Discard and replace recast architectural concrete units that do not comply with
acceptability requirements in PCI MNL 117, including concrete strength, manufacturing tolerances,
and color and texture range. Chipped, spalled, or cracked units may be repaired, subject to
Architect's approval. Architect reserves the right to reject precast units that do not match approved
samples, sample panels, and mockups. Replace unacceptable units with precast concrete units
that comply with requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine supporting structural frame or foundation and conditions for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, bearing surface tolerances, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B.
Do not install precast concrete units until supporting cast-in-place concrete has attained minimum
allowable design compressive strength and supporting steel or other structure is structurally ready
to receive loads from precast concrete units.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install clips, hangers, bearing pads, and other accessories required for connecting architectural
precast concrete units to supporting members and backup materials.
B.
Erect architectural precast concrete level, plumb, and square within specified allowable tolerances.
Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment
of units until permanent connections are completed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Install temporary steel or plastic spacing shims as precast concrete units are being erected.
Tack weld steel shims to each other to prevent shims from separating.
Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection
progresses.
Remove projecting lifting devices and grout fill voids within recessed lifting devices flush with
surface of adjacent precast surfaces when recess is exposed.
Unless otherwise indicated, maintain uniform joint widths of 3/4 inch.
Connect architectural precast concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as
otherwise indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon
as practical after connecting and grouting are completed.
1.
Do not permit connections to disrupt continuity of roof flashing.
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
034500 - 10
D.
Welding: Comply with applicable requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.4/D1.4M for
welding, welding electrodes, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding
work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding, or other approved means to prevent
loosening of nuts after final adjustment.
1.
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
Protect architectural precast concrete units and bearing pads from damage by field welding
or cutting operations, and provide noncombustible shields as required.
Welds not specified shall be continuous fillet welds, using no less than the minimum fillet as
specified by AWS.
Clean weld-affected metal surfaces with chipping hammer followed by brushing, and apply a
minimum 4.0-mil- thick coat of galvanized repair paint to galvanized surfaces according to
ASTM A 780/A 780M.
Visually inspect welds and remove, reweld, or repair incomplete and defective welds.
Where slotted connections are used, verify bolt position and tightness. For sliding
connections, properly secure bolt but allow bolt to move within connection slot.
ERECTION TOLERANCES
Erect architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, and in alignment without exceeding
the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 117, Appendix I.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special
inspections and prepare reports:
1.
Erection of loadbearing precast concrete members.
B.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare
test reports.
C.
Visually inspect field welds and test according to ASTM E 165 or to ASTM E 709 and ASTM E
1444. High-strength bolted connections are subject to inspections.
D.
Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
E.
Repair or remove and replace work where tests and inspections indicate that it does not comply
with specified requirements.
F.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, shall be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.5
REPAIRS
A.
Repair architectural precast concrete units if permitted by Architect. Architect reserves the right to
reject repaired units that do not comply with requirements.
B.
Mix patching materials and repair units so cured patches blend with color, texture, and uniformity
of adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation between original and
repaired work, when viewed in typical daylight illumination from a distance of 20 feet.
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
034500 - 11
C.
Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM
A 780/A 780M.
D.
Remove and replace damaged architectural precast concrete units when repairs do not comply
with requirements.
3.6
CLEANING
A.
Clean surfaces of precast concrete units exposed to view.
B.
Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofing, weld slag, and other deleterious material from concrete
surfaces and adjacent materials immediately.
C.
Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint treatment
to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains.
1.
2.
Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete fabricator's
recommendations. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations.
Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed
concrete finishes or damage adjacent materials.
END OF SECTION 034500
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
034500 - 12
SECTION 054000 - EXTERIOR STEEL STUD SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
Section includes requirements for the materials and services for design and installation of the steel
stud exterior non-load-bearing wall framing including anchorage and bracing. Design and provide
exterior wall stud framing system capable of resisting the wind forces as indicated on the drawings.
Framing system design should include all accessories required for anchorage and bracing.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 013100 - Structural Submittals.
B.
Section 055000 – Metal Fabrications
C.
Section 092216 – Non-Structural Metal Framing
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM A653/A653M-02a - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or ZincIron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
B.
AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code: Sheet Steel.
C.
AISI - Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit manufacturer's product information clearly describing quality, performance and finish for steel
studs.
B.
Submit design criteria prepared by the manufacturer/supplier for approval by the Architect/Structural
Engineer. Design criteria shall include, but not be limited to the following:
1.
1.
2.
C.
Design of steel studs shall be based on wind pressures and speeds as noted on the
drawings and shall comply with FEMA P-361 Design and Construction Guidance for
Community Safe Rooms.
Deflection of steel studs shall not exceed L/360, for code required wind speed with a
10-year return period. Deflection criteria for FEMA P-361 shall be L/120.
Wind speed as indicated in Structural Notes for FEMA P-361.
Submit stamped shop drawings and calculations prepared by a registered engineer for approval by
the Architect/Structural Engineer. These drawings should include the following:
1.
Plans, cross-sections, or elevations as necessary to adequately depict component
locations.
EXTERIOR STEEL STUD SYSTEM
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
054000 - 1
2.
3.
1.5
Stud gage, size and spacing.
Connection details showing screw types and locations, weld lengths or other fastener
requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer shall have a minimum of three years documented experience in the manufacturing of
products required by the Contract Documents.
B.
Installer shall have a minimum of three years documented experience.
C.
Design framing system under the direct supervision of a professional structural engineer licensed in
the state where the Project is located.
D.
Coordinate the placement of components within the stud framing system.
E.
Structural Testing/Inspection Agency shall perform the following quality related items:
1.
2.
3.
To become familiar with and to keep the Architect/Engineer informed about the quality
of work.
To guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the work.
To verify general compliance with the Contract Documents for the following items:
a. size and spacing of studs and fasteners.
b. size and location of header beams and supporting studs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Studs and accessories which are 12, 14, or 16 gage shall meet the requirements of ASTM A653, with
a minimum yield of 50,000 psi. Studs and accessories which are 18 or 20 gage shall meet the
requirements of ASTM A653, with a minimum yield of 33,000 psi.
B.
Studs and accessories shall have a G60 galvanized coating meeting the requirements of ASTM A653.
C.
Stud gage and spacing shall be determined by engineering analysis and shown in approved shop
drawings. Any stud size or gage shown on the contract documents shall be considered a minimum.
Any stud spacing shown on the contract documents shall be considered a maximum. Adjust size,
gage and spacing as necessary from those maximums and minimums based on the engineered
calculations.
D.
Where double studs are shown on the drawings they must be used unless single studs are approved
by the engineer and architect.
E.
Substitution of products of other manufacturers may be acceptable. Submit manufacturer literature for
approval.
F.
Expansion anchors shall be stud type, and shall be zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B633, Type
III Fe/Zn 5. Expansion anchors shall be a minimum of 3/8-inch diameter with 2-1/2-inch embedment
into concrete unless noted otherwise in the Drawings.
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
054000 - 2
G.
Welding: AWS D1.3-8 Structural Welding Code-Sheet Metal (field welding of material shall not be
permitted for 20 gage material or thinner).
H.
Acoustical Sealant: USG, or approved equal. Refer to Architectural.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
ERECTION
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Framing components shall be cut squarely for attachment to perpendicular members or, as
required, for angular fit against abutting members.
Erect framing plumb, level, and square.
Studs shall be plumbed, aligned, and securely attached to the flanges or web of both the upper
and lower tracks.
Fastening of components shall be with self-drilling screws or welds. Wire tying of components
shall not be permitted. Touch-up field welds and scratched or damaged finish to studs with zinc
rich paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufactures written instructions.
Splices in framing components shall not be permitted other than in runner tracks.
Runner tracks shall be securely anchored to the supporting structure.
B.
Studs Spacings: As indicated in the approved shop drawings.
C.
Stud Tracks: Before installing stud tracks for exterior walls, apply two 1/2- inch round beads of
acoustical sealant longitudinally under stud tracks to seal runner to floor.
1.
2.
D.
Door Openings: Install double studs each side of door openings unless noted otherwise on approved
shop drawings.
1.
2.
E.
Anchor stud tracks to floor with power-driven fasteners staggered at 16 inches on-center
maximum spacing.
Attach flange of stud to track with #8 screw through each flange minimum.
Install double studs horizontally between door jambs at door headers.
On top of headers, install runners to receive bottom ends of studs over door openings.
Window Openings: Install double studs each side of window openings unless noted otherwise on
approved shop drawings.
1.
2.
Install a minimum of two attached studs horizontally between window jambs to form sills and
headers.
On top of headers and bottom of sills, install runners to receive short studs.
F.
Corners: Construct using a minimum of three studs.
G.
Between Studs: Install framing for attachment of electrical boxes, mechanical and for other items to
be anchored to walls.
H.
At Butting Walls: Place studs not more than 2 inches from walls.
I.
Isolate non-load-bearing walls from steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
054000 - 3
loads while providing lateral support.
1.
Connect vertical deflection clips to infill studs and anchor to the building structure.
J.
Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, place vertically in rows as indicated on Shop Drawings, but not
more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.
K.
Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles,
anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.
L.
Insulation: In all doubled jamb studs and doubled headers not accessible to insulation contractors,
insulation equal to that specified elsewhere shall be provided.
M.
Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb and true in line to a maximum
allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:
1.
Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location.
Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other
finishing materials.
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
054000 - 4
SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
1.3
A.
1.
Section 054000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" “Exterior Steel Stud System” for galvanized
steel panel sheathing.
2.
Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.4
A.
Wall sheathing.
Sheathing joint and penetration treatment.
Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate type
of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Include
physical properties of treated materials.
For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated plywood both before and
after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing
agency according to ASTM D 5516.
For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of
treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
Evaluation Reports: For following products, from ICC-ES:
1.
2.
Preservative-treated plywood.
Fire-retardant-treated plywood.
SHEATHING
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
061600 - 1
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for
fire-retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking
is representative of the material tested.
Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect
sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air
circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials
and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.2
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory."
WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS
A.
Plywood: DOC PS 1.
B.
Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated.
C.
Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.
2.3
A.
PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in
contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
1.
Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
B.
Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Application: Treat all plywood unless otherwise indicated and plywood in contact with masonry or
concrete or used with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
SHEATHING
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
061600 - 2
2.4
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD
A.
General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with
requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with
fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test
method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or
less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive
combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not
extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.
1.
2.
Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for
fire-retardant-treated plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated
weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.
C.
Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. Do not use material
that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
D.
Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing
agency.
2.5
A.
WALL SHEATHING
Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing, CD grade.
1.
B.
Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.
1.
2.
2.6
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc.
b.
G-P Gypsum Corporation; Dens-Glass Gold.
c.
Temple-Inland Inc.; GreenGlass
Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch thick.
FASTENERS
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in
this article for material and manufacture.
1.
B.
Nominal Thickness: Not less than 3/4 inch.
For plywood wall sheathing, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel attach to framing
members using an exterior-grade construction adhesive and code-approved #8 Type 304
stainless steel screws (not drywall screws) penetrating at least 1 1/2” into the framing
members and spaced not more than 6” apart.
Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in
length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached, with
organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than
800 hours according to ASTM B 117.
SHEATHING
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
061600 - 3
2.7
A.
SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS
Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834,
compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape and sheathing
manufacturers for use with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners.
1.
Sheathing Tape: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, minimum 2 inches wide, 10 by 10 or 10 by
20 threads/inch, of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with
silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass-mat gypsum sheathing and with a history
of successful in-service use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to
use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do
not span between fewer than three support members.
B.
Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting
construction unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1.
Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."
D.
Coordinate wall sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials
are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through
completed assembly.
E.
Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of
structural support elements.
F.
Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so
sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is
forecast.
3.2
A.
WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1.
Wall Sheathing:
a.
b.
3.3
A.
GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION
Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
B.
Screw to cold-formed metal framing.
Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends.
Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws.
Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing.
SHEATHING
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
061600 - 4
C.
Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of each
board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each
stud.
1.
D.
Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges
and ends of boards.
Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and trowel
silicone emulsion sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed
fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and
openings.
SHEATHING
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
061600 - 5
SECTION 142400 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes hydraulic passenger elevators.
B.
1.
2.
Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices
in concrete.
Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for the following:
a.
b.
4.
5.
1.3
A.
1.4
Attachment plates, angle brackets, and other preparation of structural steel for
fastening guide-rail brackets.
Divider beams.
Hoist beams.
Structural-steel shapes for subsills that are part of steel frame.
Pit ladders.
Cants in hoistways made from steel sheet.
Section 221429 "Sump Pumps" for sump pumps, sumps, and sump covers in elevator pits.
Section 28311001 "Fire-Alarm System" for smoke detectors in elevator lobbies to initiate
emergency recall operation and heat detectors in shafts and machine rooms to disconnect
power from elevator equipment before sprinkler activation and for connection to elevator
controllers.
DEFINITIONS
Definitions in ASME A17.1/CSA B44 apply to work of this Section.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and
similar information. Include product data for car enclosures, hoistway entrances, and operation,
control, and signal systems.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each landing,
machine room layout, coordination with building structure, relationships with other
construction, and locations of equipment.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
142400 - 1
2.
Indicate maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of
support, and maximum and average power demands.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For finishes involving color selection.
D.
Samples for Verification: For exposed car, hoistway door and frame, and signal equipment
finishes; 3-inch- square Samples of sheet materials; and 4-inch lengths of running trim members.
1.5
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
B.
Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.6
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For elevators to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
1.
B.
1.7
A.
1.8
A.
1.9
In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include
diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance
personnel.
Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Submit a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to
Owner, in the form of a standard one-year maintenance agreement, starting on date initial
maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for
agreement period and for future renewal options.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or an authorized representative who is trained and
approved by manufacturer.
Deliver, store, and handle materials, components and equipment in manufacturer's protective
packaging. Store materials, components, and equipment off of ground, under cover, and in a dry
location.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and other
items that are embedded in concrete for elevator equipment. Furnish templates, sleeves, elevator
equipment with integral anchors, and installation instructions and deliver to Project site in time for
installation.
B.
Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work relating to hydraulic elevators including pit
ladders; sumps and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; electrical service; and electrical outlets,
lights, and switches in hoistways, pits, and machine rooms.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
142400 - 2
1.10
A.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace elevator work
that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
2.
Failures include, but are not limited to, operation or control system failure, including
excessive malfunctions; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual
deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; need for excessive
maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and
unsatisfactory conditions.
Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ThyssenKrupp;
Twinpost Above-Ground 3500# Hydraulic or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain elevators from single manufacturer.
1.
2.2
KONE Inc.
Otis Elevator Co.
Schindler Elevator Corp.
Major elevator components, including pump-and-tank units, plunger-cylinder assemblies,
controllers, signal fixtures, door operators, car frames, cars, and entrances, shall be
manufactured by single manufacturer.
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
B.
Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section 407 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation
Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC A117.1.
C.
Seismic Performance: Elevator system shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 and shall comply with elevator safety requirements in
ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
The term "withstand" means "the system will remain in place without separation of any parts
when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the system will be fully operational after
the seismic event."
Affected peak velocity acceleration (Av) for Project's location as indicated on Structural
Drawings .
Provide earthquake equipment required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
Provide seismic switch required by ASCE/SEI 7.
Design earthquake spectral response acceleration short period (Sds) for Project is 0.200g.
Project's Seismic Design Category: C.
Elevator Component Importance Factor: 1.5.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
142400 - 3
2.3
ELEVATORS
A.
Elevator System, General: Manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Unless otherwise
indicated, manufacturers' standard components shall be used, as included in standard elevator
systems and as required for complete system.
B.
Elevator Description:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Elevator Number(s): #1.
Type: Holeless, beside-the-car, telescoping, dual cylinder.
Rated Load: 3500 lb.
Rated Speed: 150 fpm.
Operation System: Single automatic.
Auxiliary Operations:
a.
7.
Car Enclosures:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
8.
b.
A.
Width: 42 inches.
Height: 84 inches.
Type: Two-speed side sliding.
Frames : Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
Doors: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
Sills : Aluminum, mill finish.
Hall Fixtures : Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
Additional Requirements:
a.
2.4
Front Walls (Return Panels): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish with integral car door
frames.
Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
Side and Rear Wall Panels: Plastic laminate.
Reveals: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
Door Faces (Interior): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
Door Sills: Aluminum, mill finish.
Ceiling: Luminous ceiling.
Handrails: 1-1/2 inches round satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish, at sides and rear of
car.
Floor prepared to receive resilient flooring (specified in Section 096500 "Resilient
Flooring").
Hoistway Entrances:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
9.
10.
Standby power operation.
Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with frame
made from satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
Provide hooks for protective pads and one complete set(s) of full-height protective
pads.
SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS
Pump Units: Positive-displacement type with a maximum of 10 percent variation between no load
and full load and with minimum pulsations.
1.
Pump shall be submersible type with submersible squirrel-cage induction motor, and shall be
suspended inside oil tank from vibration isolation mounts or shall be tank-top-mounted type
with fan-cooled, squirrel-cage induction motor, and shall be mounted on oil tank with
vibration isolation mounts and enclosed in prime-painted steel enclosure lined with 1-inchthick, glass-fiber insulation board.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
142400 - 4
2.
Motor shall have variable-voltage, variable-frequency control.
B.
Hydraulic Silencers: System shall have hydraulic silencer containing pulsation-absorbing material
in blowout-proof housing at pump unit.
C.
Piping: Size, type, and weight of piping as recommended by elevator manufacturer, with flexible
connectors to minimize sound and vibration transmissions from power unit.
D.
Hydraulic Fluid: Elevator manufacturer's standard fire-resistant fluid with additives as needed to
prevent oxidation of fluid, corrosion of cylinder and other components, and other adverse effects.
E.
Inserts: Furnish required concrete inserts and similar anchorage devices for installing guide rails,
machinery, and other components of elevator work. Device installation is specified in another
Section.
F.
Corrosion-Protective Filler: A nontoxic, petroleum-based gel formulated for filling the space
between hydraulic cylinder and protective casing. Filler shall be electrically nonconductive,
displace or absorb water, and gel or solidify at temperatures below 60 deg F.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
Hydro Safe Oil Division, Inc.; No-Ox-Id Liquid Elevator Casing Filler E-800.
Union-Gard, a division of Dome Services L.L.C.; Union-Gard 160.
G.
Car Frame and Platform: Welded or bolted steel units.
H.
Guides: Roller guides; polymer-coated, nonlubricated sliding guides; or sliding guides with
guide-rail lubricators. Provide guides at top and bottom of car and counterweight frames.
2.5
OPERATION SYSTEMS
A.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system as required to
provide type of operation indicated.
B.
Auxiliary Operations: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the following
operational features for elevators where indicated:
1.
C.
Single-Car Standby Power Operation: On activation of standby power, car is returned to a
designated floor and parked with doors open. Car can be manually put in service on
standby power, either for return operation or for regular operation, by switches in control
panel located at main lobby/reception. Manual operation causes automatic operation to
cease.
Security Features: Provide the following security features, where indicated. Security features
shall not affect emergency firefighters' service.
1.
Car-to-Lobby Feature: Feature, activated by keyswitch at main lobby, that causes car to
return immediately to lobby and open doors for inspection. On deactivation by keyswitch,
calls registered before keyswitch activation are completed and normal operation is resumed.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
142400 - 5
2.6
DOOR REOPENING DEVICES
A.
Infrared Array: Provide door reopening device with uniform array of 36 or more
microprocessor-controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of
one or more light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen.
B.
Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for predetermined adjustable time,
through activating door reopening device, a loud buzzer shall sound and doors shall begin to close
at reduced kinetic energy.
2.7
A.
CAR ENCLOSURES
General: Provide enameled-steel car enclosures to receive removable wall panels, with
removable car roof, access doors, power door operators, and ventilation.
1.
B.
Materials and Finishes: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
2.8
A.
Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame
hoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Frame size
and profile shall accommodate hoistway wall construction.
Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, frames shall be self-supporting with
reinforced head sections.
Fire-Rated Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Door and frame assemblies shall comply with NFPA
80 and be listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction based on testing at as close-to-neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252 .
1.
C.
Subfloor: Exterior, underlayment grade plywood, not less than 5/8-inch nominal thickness.
Floor Finish: See drawing sheet F110 "First Floor Finish Plan". .
Stainless-Steel Wall Panels: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from
stainless-steel sheet.
Plastic-Laminate Wall Panels: Plastic laminate adhesively applied to manufacturer's
standard honeycomb core with plastic-laminate panel backing and manufacturer's standard
protective edge trim. Panels have a flame-spread index of 25 or less, when tested
according to ASTM E 84. Plastic-laminate color, texture, and pattern as selected by
Architect from plastic-laminate manufacturer's full range.
Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment.
Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of car.
Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel
sheet.
Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on car doors.
Sills: Extruded metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick.
Metal Ceiling: Flush panels, with LED downlights in the center of each panel. Align
ceiling panel joints with joints between wall panels.
Handrails: Manufacturer's standard handrails, of shape, metal, and finish indicated.
HOISTWAY ENTRANCES
1.
B.
Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1/CSA B44 on car tops where required
by ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
Fire-Protection Rating: 1 hour.
Materials and Fabrication: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
142400 - 6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.9
Steel Subframes: Formed from cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet, with factory-applied enamel
finish or rust-resistant primer. Fabricate to receive applied finish as indicated.
Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed from stainless-steel sheet.
Star of Life Symbol: Identify emergency elevators with star of life symbol, not less than 3
inches high, on both inside surfaces of hoistway door frames.
Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel
sheet.
Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on doors matching door edges.
Sills: Extruded metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous
grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M.
SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
A.
General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call
has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with LEDs.
B.
Car-Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard recessed car-control stations. Mount in
return panel adjacent to car door unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
Mark buttons and switches for required use or function. Use both tactile symbols and
Braille.
Provide "No Smoking" sign matching car-control station, either integral with car-control
station or mounted adjacent to it, with text and graphics as required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
C.
Emergency Communication System: Two-way voice communication system, with visible signal,
which dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and does not require handset use.
System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and battery
backup power supply.
D.
Firefighters' Two-Way Telephone Communication Service: Provide flush-mounted cabinet in each
car and required conductors in traveling cable for firefighters' two-way telephone communication
service specified in Section 28310011 "Fire-Alarm System"
E.
Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated, digital-type car position indicator, located above car
door or above car-control station. Also, provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car
is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served. Include travel direction arrows if not
provided in car-control station.
F.
Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide one hall push-button station at each landing.
1.
2.
3.
G.
Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows; but provide single arrow at terminal landings.
Provide the following:
1.
H.
Provide units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall.
Equip units with buttons for calling elevator and for indicating applicable direction of travel.
Provide telephone jack in each unit for firefighters' two-way telephone communication
service specified in Section 28311001 "Fire-Alarm System" Possibly insert a provision for
either an "In Use" signal or a digital display of car position for single elevators.
Manufacturer's standard wall-mounted units, for mounting above entrance frames.
Hall Annunciator: With each hall lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and
direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down.
1.
At manufacturer's option, audible signals may be placed on cars.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
142400 - 7
I.
Standby Power Elevator Selector Switches: Provide switches, as required by ASME A17.1/CSA
B44, where indicated. Adjacent to switches, provide illuminated signal that indicates when normal
power supply has failed.
J.
Fire-Command-Center Annunciator Panel: Provide panel containing illuminated position
indicators for each elevator, clearly labeled with elevator designation; include illuminated signal
that indicates when elevator is operational and when it is at the designated emergency return level
with doors open. Provide standby power elevator selector switch(es), as required by ASME
A17.1/CSA B44, adjacent to position indicators. Provide illuminated signal that indicates when
normal power supply has failed.
K.
Emergency Pictorial Signs: Fabricate from materials matching hall push-button stations, with text
and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction, indicating that in case of fire elevators
are out of service and exits should be used instead. Provide one sign at each hall push-button
station unless otherwise indicated.
2.10
FINISH MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide the following materials for exposed parts of elevator car enclosures, car doors,
hoistway entrance doors and frames, and signal equipment as indicated.
B.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed, matte
finish.
C.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel, Type B, pickled.
D.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.
E.
Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
F.
Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.
G.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063.
H.
Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA LD 3, Type HGS for flat applications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Verify critical dimensions and
examine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed.
B.
Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the
Work.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
142400 - 8
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Excavation for Cylinder: Drill well hole in each elevator pit to accommodate installation of
cylinder; comply with applicable requirements in Section 31203200 "Unclassified Excavation for
Utilities."
B.
Install cylinder plumb and accurately centered for elevator car position and travel. Anchor
securely in place, supported at pit floor and braced at intervals as needed to maintain alignment.
Anchor cylinder guides at spacing needed to maintain alignment and avoid overstressing guides.
C.
Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted
connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment,
inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS workmanship and
welding operator qualification standards.
D.
Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts to
minimize vibration transmission to structure and structure-borne noise due to elevator system.
E.
Install piping above the floor, where possible. Install underground piping in casing.
F.
Lubricate operating parts of systems as recommended by manufacturers.
G.
Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for
accurate alignment of entrances with car. Where possible, delay installation of sills and frames
until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each
landing.
H.
Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch, up or down, regardless of load and travel direction.
I.
Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout.
J.
Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.3
Place hall lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance.
Mount hall lanterns at a minimum of 72 inches above finished floor.
A.
Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting elevator use
(either temporary or permanent), perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by
ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and by governing regulations and agencies.
B.
Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction through Construction Manager in
advance of dates and times that tests are to be performed on elevators.
3.4
A.
PROTECTION
Temporary Use: Limit temporary use for construction purposes. Comply with the following
requirements for elevator used for construction purposes:
1.
2.
3.
Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of finished car, to
protect finishes from damage.
Provide strippable protective film on entrance and car doors and frames.
Provide padded wood bumpers on entrance door frames covering jambs and frame faces.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
142400 - 9
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.5
Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as needed to
protect elevator and elevator equipment.
Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity.
Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service. Include preventive
maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleanup,
and adjustment as necessary for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity.
Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of
original equipment.
Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence remains of
correction. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required
repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative through Construction Manager to train Owner's
maintenance personnel to operate, adjust, and maintain elevator(s).
B.
Check operation of elevator through Construction Manager with Owner's personnel present before
date of Substantial Completion and again not more than one month before end of warranty period.
Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly.
3.6
A.
MAINTENANCE
Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall
include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of elevator Installer. Include monthly
preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication,
cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation. Parts and supplies shall be
manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.
1.
2.
Perform maintenance during normal working hours.
Perform emergency callback service during normal working hours with response time of two
hours or less.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
(2014-06-19 Addendum #2)
142400 - 10
SECTION 271008 - MATV ANTENNA / CABLE SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
All work specified in this section shall comply with the provisions of Section 260100.
B.
The specifications for the MATV System are shown on the drawings. This system to be provided
and installed by the Communications Contractor under contract with the Owner. Refer to the
Responsibility Matrix on sheet T000.
C.
The TV cable system equipment is to be provided by the cable system Contractor under contract
with the Owner.
D.
This Electrical Contractor to provide and install rough-in conduit, and boxes as specified and
shown on the drawings and Communication Contractor's wiring schematics.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT
A.
Contractor to verify manufacturer of equipment with the Owner. Refer to the Responsibility Matrix
on sheet T000.
B.
Conduits from outlets to dropped ceiling area to conform to requirements of "RACEWAYS"
Section of these specifications.
C.
Power wiring to be provided to conform with wiring as shown on drawings and specifications
section titled "CONDUCTOR" of these specifications and sized as shown on drawings.
D.
Outlet boxes to conform to "OUTLET BOX" section of these specifications and sized as shown on
drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Refer to the Responsibility Matrix on sheet T000.
B.
Wiring to be run from outlets through conduits to dropped ceiling area thence through dropped
ceiling area (not in conduit) to termination points as shown on drawings and vendor wiring
schematics.
C.
Where open cable is run above dropped ceiling and penetrates a smoke or fire rated wall, this
Contractor shall furnish and install a minimum 3/4" empty sleeve, extending 1 foot on each side of
wall, with bushing on both ends. Conduit to be sealed with fire resistant thermofibre provided and
installed by General Contractor. Sleeves to be coordinated with system supplier as to location,
size and quantity.
D.
Cables to be supported in accordance with Section 260529 and 271500 of these specifications.
E.
All major cable runs between terminal cabinets or closets to be installed in cable tray and/or Jhooks.
MATV ANTENNA / CABLE SYSTEM
TMP No. A03212.01
271008 - 1
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
F.
Electrical Contractor to provide a 2" conduit from the head-end equipment to the roof, where
directed by Communications Contractor the Owner’s A/V Vendor, this conduit shall be extended
to be approximately 2' above the area and terminated with service head.
G.
Communications.
H.
TV Cable Contractor to connect all equipment and leave system in satisfactory operating
condition.
I.
TV bracket to be installed by General Contractor.
J.
TV sets to be provided by the Audio Visual contractor.
MATV ANTENNA / CABLE SYSTEM
TMP No. A03212.01
271008 - 2
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
SECTION 281300 – ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
The contractor shall provide a fully engineered, turnkey access control system that interfaced to
electrified door hardware by others (as noted) and is tightly integrated to the video surveillance
system. Because the two systems are to be tightly integrated, they shall both be provided by the
same contractor.
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Head-end Hardware and Software
B.
Client Software with PC Workstation
C.
Field Panels
D.
Cards & Readers
E.
Request-to-Exit Devices
F.
Intercom Devices
G.
Wiring
H.
Programming
I.
Commissioning
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
28 23 00
Video Surveillance
B.
28 31 00
Fire Detection and Alarm
1.4
SUMMARY
A.
LABOR AND MATERIALS
B.
Unless otherwise noted in the Drawings and Specifications, the Contractor shall provide and pay
for all labor, materials, equipment, tools, utilities, construction equipment and machinery,
transportation and other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution, operation and
completion of the Work.
C.
SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE
D.
Specifications and notes are written in imperative and abbreviated form. Imperative language of
the technical specifications is directed at the Contractor, unless specifically noted otherwise.
Incomplete sentences shall be completed by inserting “shall”, “shall be”, “the Contractor shall”,
and similar mandatory phrases by inference. The words “shall be” is supplied by inference where
a colon (:) is used within product specifications.
E.
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
TMP No. A03212.01
231300 - 1
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
1.
2.
3.
F.
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
Contractor shall be provided three (3) sets of the Drawings and Specifications for his use.
Additional sets, if requested by Contractor, shall be furnished to the Contractor for the actual
cost of reproduction.
Contractor shall carefully study the Drawings and Specifications, and shall at once report
any error, unforeseen circumstances, inconsistency or omission upon discovery.
The Designer shall be the interpreter of the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications,
subject to the final approval of the Owner.
INTENT AND CORRELATION
1.
The intent of the Project Drawings and Specifications is to include all items necessary for the
proper execution and completion of the Work.
2.
The Project Drawings and Specifications are complementary, and what is required by any
one shall be as binding as if required by both.
REFERENCES
Submit the project and customer information of customers for at least three other projects of
similar size and complexity using similar technologies.
1.
Shall include a minimum of the following:
a. Customer Name
b. Customer Point of Contact
c. Customer Point of Contact Phone Number and email address
d. Address of project
e. Title of Project
f.
Type of project completed
DEFINITIONS
Industry standard words and phrases are used throughout the Drawings and Specifications,
except:
1.
Words which have well-known technical or trade meanings are used in accordance with
such recognized meanings.
2.
Whenever the following listed words and phrases are used, they shall be mutually
understood to have the following respective meanings:
B.
The words “as indicated.” means:
Specifications.
C.
The words “as required.” means: as required to provide a complete and satisfactory Work in full
conformance with the Drawings and Specifications.
D.
The word “New” means: new Work to be provided by Contractor.
E.
The word “Provide” means: furnish, install, connect, test and make ready for use.
F.
The words “Relocate existing” means: remove existing item from present location. Reinstall, reconnect, and test existing item and make ready for use at new location as shown on the
Drawings.
G.
The phrase “Remove existing” means: remove existing item and return item to the Owner.
H.
The word “Replace” means: remove existing item and return item to the Owner. Provide new
item as indicated.
I.
The word “Work”: The Work is the completed construction required by the Drawings and
Specifications, and includes all labor necessary to produce such construction, and all materials
and equipment incorporated or to be incorporated in such construction.
TMP No. A03212.01
as shown on the Drawings, and in accordance with the
231300 - 2
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
J.
1.7
The word “Furnish” means: supply item as specified. Item to be installed by others.
CONTRACTOR DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
The Project Drawings represent the level of system design to be provided by the Owner.
Contractor shall provide all additional system design work required, including:
1.
Conduit layout and sizing.
2.
Wire and cable layout and sizing.
3.
Access Control System (ACS) Local Area Network (LAN) topology
4.
Point-to-point wiring and equipment hook-up information.
5.
Equipment mounting details.
6.
Design of equipment cabinets.
7.
Other detailed design work required.
B.
Contractor’s design shall conform to all applicable codes and ordinances. All electrical design,
including the sizing and placement of conduit, raceways and conductors, shall be in accordance
with IBC 2012 and IFC 2012, unless local codes establish more stringent requirements.
C.
Contractor’s design work is subject to review and approval by the Owner’s Project Manager.
D.
1.8
A.
Contractor’s design shall also include:
1.
The addition of all wire, cable, conduit, connectors and junction boxes required for system
operation.
2.
The installation of conduit between the control components and all equipment at each door,
as necessary.
3.
Completed “as-built” documentation of all security systems, including documentation of
existing equipment, wiring, conduits, and raceways.
4.
Other Work as defined within the Project Drawings and Specifications
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
System Overview
1.
The contractor shall provide and install a new integrated Access Control System (ACS) that
shall provide a simple and easy-to-use graphical user interface. The system shall provide
local operational control of all access points and alarm sensors.
a. NOTE: DUE TO INTEGRATION WITH THE VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM, THE
VIDEO SURVIELLANCE SYSTEM AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM SHALL BE
AWARDED TO THE SAME SECURITY CONTRACTOR.
2.
Acceptable system manufacturers and systems include S2 Systems (Netbox Extreme), and
Avigilon (Access Control Manager). Nothing in this specification shall be interpreted to
exclude either of these systems. Alternate systems will be considered only at the discretion
of the designer. Systems where the manufacturer is also the installer or contractor shall be
rejected, as this leaves the Owner no flexibility once the project is complete.
3.
Configuration of the system shall meet the requirements of UL-294.
4.
The manufacturer of the proposed system shall have been producing access control
products for at least 5 years and shall be ISO 9000 and 9001 certified.
5.
If the system relies on Microsoft brand software, then the system manufacturer shall be a
Microsoft Certified Gold Partner. System shall meet Microsoft requirements for “Designed for
Microsoft Windows Server 2008” and “Designed for Windows 7”.
6.
The manufacturer of the proposed system shall require resellers to pass a formal training
program prior to being certified as authorized to sell and install the system. The system
integrator proposing the system shall be in possession of such a certification.
The
technicians performing the installation and who will perform service after acceptance must
be factory trained and certified.
7.
The Access Control System (ACS) client and server software shall be used in conjunction
with intelligent controllers to provide a distributed access control and alarms monitoring
system. In the event of a communications failure between the host server and the field
controllers, the controllers shall continue to make local access control decisions and save all
TMP No. A03212.01
231300 - 3
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
8.
B.
transactions in memory until communications are restored. At that time the controller shall
upload all stored transactions to the server.
The ACS shall seamlessly integrate the functions of access control, alarms monitoring and
response, digital video imaging, badge design/creation, and visitor management.
Required Access Control Hardware Features
1.
The ACS intelligent database controller shall support a minimum of 20,000 cardholders with
expansion capabilities of up to 50,000 cardholders.
2.
The ACS intelligent database controller shall support a minimum of 12,000 offline
transactions.
3.
The ACS hardware shall be comprised of modular components that connect over standard
interfaces to one another. Access granted or denied decisions shall be made in under 0.8
seconds.
4.
The Database Unit (DBU) shall store firmware in non-volatile flash memory to allow for
convenient updates through the head-end user interface. The DBU shall store the
cardholder and configuration database information in non-volatile memory so that loss of
primary power will not cause the loss of the database.
5.
The ACS hardware shall be capable of expansion via additional door control and
input/output modules.
6.
Network Communications
a. The first field panel in a chain of panels shall have the ability to communicate with its
monitoring client PC over the local or wide area network via TCP/IP. The network
interface shall support both “10 base T” and “100 base TX” (10/100) communications
speeds. The network interface shall support encryption and be implemented with
encryption.
7.
Elevator Control
a. The system shall have the ability to provide elevator access control by
b. Using a card reader to activate the elevator call button
c. Using a card reader in the cab to activate the correct floor selection button
d. Or a combination of both of these functions.
e. Each cardholder shall then have floor permissions assigned as part of the normal
access rights. The system shall provide outputs to the elevator controls to uniquely
verify which floors are authorized for each cardholder. The system shall be capable of
tracking which floor was enabled/selected by that person.
8.
Door lock release relays shall be minimally rated for 3 A @ 30 VDC.
9.
The DCU shall support Wiegand communications to the reader.
10. The ACS hardware shall support all of the following options for supervision of the monitored
input points:
a. 2-state supervision – in which only secured and alarm state are indicated.
b. 3-state supervision – in which the input state can be secure, alarm or open circuit.
c. 4-state supervision – supports secure, alarm, short circuit and open circuit states.
11. The network door controller shall provide full distributed processing of all access control
functions. Each controller shall provide distributed intelligence and fast response to access
requests including a minimum memory capacity of 20,000 cardholders and 10,000 offline
event transactions.
12. The network door controller shall employ encryption for all communications between the
controller and host(s) system(s).
13. The Edge Network Controller shall provide onboard connections to a client PC via the Local
or Wide Area Network.
14. The controller shall be UL listed and conform to UL standards for access control systems.
15. Enclosures and Power Supplies
a. All electronic circuits supplied, with the exception of the Single Door (PoE) Edge
Network Controller, or those which are PoE powered or within a client or server or
recorder PC, shall be mounted on standoffs inside manufacturer-supplied enclosures. All
such enclosures must include a key lock on a removable hinged door, and must include
a tamper switch to detect when the door is opened. Systems without key locking of
enclosure doors or without doors which are both hinged and removable shall not be
acceptable.
TMP No. A03212.01
231300 - 4
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
16.
b. All tamper switches will be wired to the ACS to create alarm events.
All electronic circuits supplied for the access control system, except those which are PoE
powered or within a client or server or recorder PC, shall be powered by low voltage through
supplied 120VAC to low voltage, isolating, power supplies. The power supplies shall be
mountable inside the supplied enclosure or separately.
C.
High Availability and Disaster Recovery
1.
The ACS shall be capable of migrating to a variety of High Availability (HA) and Disaster
Recovery (DR) solutions including but not limited to:
2.
Fault tolerant servers for 99.999% rated availability
3.
Microsoft clustered server support for 99.99% rated availability
4.
Remote redundancy through backup servers of general purpose nature or synchronized
through software monitoring the operation of the paired server.
5.
The ACS product shall support a disaster recovery solution using off-site database
replication.
D.
Encryption
1.
Encryption falls into two distinct areas, firstly between clients and their Server, secondly
between client and local area network panels (LAN Nodes). LAN node links shall support
AES encryption between the supervising client PC and its LAN Chains.
a. For client to server connections, the ACS shall utilize industry standard network cards
configured with IPSec and 3DES encryption or approved equivalent.
b. Web-based (thin client) ACS clients shall support 128-bit SSL encryption or approved
equivalent.
E.
Required Standard Software Features - The following software features shall be part of the
standard product offering and/or provided system without requiring additional purchase or
licensing:
1.
If the ACS relies on proprietary client and server software on PCs and standard servers,
then the following software features shall be part of the standard product offering without
requiring additional purchase or licensing.
a. The installation of the server and client software shall utilize a “wizard” interface to guide
users through the appropriate installation steps.
b. The server and client software shall utilize a software-based licensing scheme. Systems
requiring hardware based keys or dongles shall not be acceptable.
c. The ACS shall start up as part of the Operating System. The ACS server shall
communicate to all clients (operator workstations and field hardware) through Windows
services. The ACS shall run as a service in the OS, and there shall be no requirement
to run an application after the operating system is ready.
d. The ACS shall support a Graphical User Interface that minimizes training needs for even
inexperienced users. The software shall include on line help displays to eliminate
operator reference manuals.
e. The ACS software shall be run using standard x86-based hardware, and the operating
system shall be Microsoft Windows as follows:
f.
ACS server shall run on Windows Server Windows Server 2008 32 or 64 bit.
g. ACS server shall support operation in a VMware ESX or ESXi environment.
h. ACS clients shall run on 32 or 64 bit Windows 7 Professional or Ultimate editions.
i.
System shall meet Microsoft requirements for “Designed for Microsoft Windows Server”.
j.
The server shall use Microsoft SQL Server Express, or Microsoft SQL Server 2008®
Standard or Enterprise database server. The system shall allow other authorized
applications to gain access to the system’s database should wider integration of the
system at the site become a requirement.
2.
The ACS shall support at least 512 each of “hours” definitions. An hour definition is a
description of the times during a 24-hour period during which a function will be active. The
system shall support a minimum of 10 intervals per hour definition.
3.
The system shall support at least 512 time codes. A time code is defined as a set of hour
definitions – one assigned to each day of the week (including Saturday and Sunday) as
TMP No. A03212.01
231300 - 5
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
appropriate, and assigned to the various types of holidays (exceptions) defined in the
system.
The system shall support a minimum of 9 holiday types. A holiday type shall be assignable
to an unrestricted number of dates on the calendar.
Operator Permissions
a. System operators shall be associated with a log in Name and Password. A system
option will determine whether strong operator passwords will be used.
b. The operator’s account shall be assigned to a role in the system. The role is a
permission profile. This will determine the functions that shall be available to that
operator when logged-on to the system. The system shall support an option to hide
Personal Identification Numbers of cardholders when an operator is viewing a record.
c. Card record data entry shall be divided into operator permission areas, allowing
separate permission categories to be assigned for the viewing of personal data, ID
badge printing and access right management.
d. The ACS shall support an unrestricted number of operator accounts and operator roles.
e. For all operators, a means of re-arranging their Icon tool bar shall be provided to allow
the most frequently used Icons to be repositioned by the operator.
f.
The system shall store operator preferences based on logon information. This feature
shall allow an operator to work with their preferred configuration independent of which
workstation they occupy.
The system shall support an option to reset all window layouts to a pre-defined “Home
Screen”.
Video Badging
a. The system shall incorporate video imaging as a fully integrated function to customize
access control cards by printing an identity badge directly onto the card. The badge
design and image capture capabilities shall combine with the latest technology card
printers to allow the production of an ID badge pass for each card holder at the time of
registration.
b. For each cardholder both a facial image and a signature shall be able to be captured, or
imported, and stored as part of the card record.
c. System shall provide the ability to crop the image (live capture or imported from JPG,
BMP, or WMF) to the desired area maintaining the proper aspect ratio.
d. Additionally, a signature may be imported from a signature capture terminal.
Badge Design and Printing
a. A comprehensive integrated badge design facility shall also be provided. The badge
designer must allow an unrestricted number of custom badge layouts to be defined then
saved with a suitable description as a reference. This shall make full use of the card
record details such as name, card number, inactive date as well as allowing personal
data to be included in the badge design. Company logos shall be imported as bitmaps
(BMP) or JPEG images to provide a personalized corporate appearance to the card.
b. All elements incorporated into the design shall be able to be rotated.
c. Each badge design shall contain either a single sided design or a double-sided design.
Each side of the card shall also be designated as being blank, or magnetic stripe side, or
smart chip side, to ensure the designer is aware of the available space where printing
may be incorporated for each card combination. The badge designer function shall be
capable of supporting portrait, landscape, standard and custom-sized card designs.
d. When creating a new card record a badge preview screen shall also be included that
displays the specific card’s details on the selected badge design to allow confirmation
prior to requesting the badge to be printed.
e. Each new cardholder record shall have the option to be flagged for future printing. Cards
flagged in this manner shall be easily recalled at a later stage and processed for output
to the printer in a single action. Selecting multiple cards for bulk printing shall also allow
each card to be printed either with its specific badge design, as defined within each
card’s record, or alternatively printed with a selected common badge design. Encoding
of magnetic stripe cards shall also be included as part of the bulk printing process.
f.
The ACS shall support any manufacturer’s ID badge printer with a Microsoft Windows
(depending on the workstation configuration) compatible printer driver.
TMP No. A03212.01
231300 - 6
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
g.
The ACS shall provide the option to encode a magstripe card during the print cycle shall
also be incorporated. Applications that require on-site encoding can combine both
actions in a single process. Encoding may only be supported on a limited set of printer
models defined by the ACS manufacturer.
h. Each badge design shall include a default printer, validity period, and access rights.
9.
Video Verification
a. The Video Imaging option shall also provide a monitoring screen that will automatically
display the stored image for a card when used at a reader. This screen shall operate in
conjunction with a live video input from a CCTV camera viewing the selected access
point, allowing the operator to verify that each card offered is in fact being used by the
person to whom it was issued.
b. This screen shall also be frozen and printed to provide a hard copy evidence of any
abuse observed by the operator. For high security access points, the system shall be
configured to not grant access until the operator has verified the stored and live images
are the same person, with the door release being controlled by the system operator.
c. Video verification shall include the ability to monitor at least 4 portals on the same
screen (for application with turnstiles, for example). This feature shall also provide the
operator with a means of granting access to the individual with a single mouse click.
10. Report Generation
a. Extensive history reporting shall be a standard integrated feature; and shall include the
ability to review all system alarms, access control activity, and operator actions. These
reports shall be made available for review via the operator’s display screen, or to a
printer, or to another disk media. Extensive sort parameters shall include by any of the
“Personal Details” fields or Titles, for example by “Department”, and only Names
commencing with “SM*”.
b. The system shall support generation of reports detailing the system operation. The
following reports shall be available in the software:
1) Cards on site
2) Hours on site
3) Cardholders with access to each door
4) Access rights of each cardholder
5) System Configuration
6) Scheduled and Conditional Commands defined
7) System operator transaction history
c. The system shall demonstrate the ability to export data, for example reports, to other
standard office word processing and spreadsheet packages. This shall mimimally mean
native export ability to comma delimited files, and PDF files.
d. The system shall provide system management reporting, including detailed listings for all
the operator actions and the current cardholder database for output to the display
screen, printer or disk media.
e. The system shall have the ability to save frequently used report configurations and
associate them with a “Title”. Such predefined reports shall be available from a list to
simplify the report selection. It shall be possible to request these reports to run
immediately or schedule them to occur at a specified date and time.
f.
Scheduled reports shall additionally have the option to be automatically repeated by
specifying the number of days and reporting period to be included, for example a weekly
report of Alarms to run at 10:30 am each Monday and including the previous 7 days of
Alarms.
11. Clients
a. The system shall support an unrestricted number of clients to suit growing enterprise
requirements. The system shall provide the means for multiple operators to
simultaneously administer the system from convenient locations connected via a local
area network (LAN) or across a wide area network (WAN). .
b. Clients shall not use mapped drives for server connections.
c. Clients shall not use UDP messaging.
12. System shall support a minimum of two pc monitors per client. The system shall additionally
store the last position and size of all open dialog boxes and screens upon exiting the
application on a per operator basis. The next time the operator logs into the application, the
TMP No. A03212.01
231300 - 7
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
screen positions shall be restored. Such operation shall be independent of which
workstation the operator uses.
13. Addition of Cardholders to the System Database
a. The system shall provide a means of assigning access control rights to each cardholder.
Access control rights determine which access points are accessible to the cardholder
based on date and time of day. The system shall support an unrestricted number of
access rights.
b. The software shall also provide an ALTERNATE set of Access rights to a cardholder on
a temporary basis. The change may be initiated at any time by an authorized operator,
or automatically between specified dates. This shall provide the facility of automatically
changing a card’s rights between a specified date range, after which the card will revert
to its normal Doors and Times. Alternate access rights shall be able to be configured for
multiple date ranges.
c. Cardholders who have not used a reader for some time shall be readily listed to allow
their card’s status to be reviewed. An additional feature shall allow cardholders to be
automatically set inactive and therefore access denied should the card have not been
presented at any reader on the system for a defined number of days.
d. Cardholders shall be assigned an expiration date, and more specifically an expiry time,
after which a card shall automatically become inactive and therefore be rejected at all
readers on the system. To further simplify card administration, the system shall have the
ability to be configured to automatically purge expired cardholder records after a
configurable number of days from the date of expiration.
e. The system shall allow for the definition of Access control rights to be associated with a
badge design. Each user that selects that badge design shall be provided with the
associated access control rights that can further be customized for the specific
cardholder.
f.
The system shall allow access control rights to be defined for a cardholder on a reader
basis. A timecode will be associated with each reader as it is assigned to the
cardholder’s access control rights.
g. The system shall allow access control rights to be defined for a cardholder on a reader
group basis. Reader groups are groups of readers. A timecode will be associated with
each reader group as it is assigned to the cardholder’s access control rights.
h. The system shall allow access control rights to be defined for a cardholder on an access
code basis. An access code is a group of access control rights.
i.
The system shall have a note field associated with each cardholder record. The note
field shall be free form text and shall support a minimum of 256 characters. The note
field shall further support the ability to attach a file (of any type or size) to the cardholder
record.
j.
A driver’s license scanner shall be supported to simplify data entry of cardholder
information.
The scanner support shall include, at a minimum, the ability to
automatically read, through optical character recognition, the most common fields from
valid driver’s licenses issued by all 50 states; and populate these fields into the
appropriate user-defined personal data fields in the cardholder record.
k. The system shall support a field for assigning an approving official to the cardholder
record that defines the individual who authorized the assignment of a credential.
Approving officials shall have an associated validity period and image of their signature.
As an option, the assignment of an approving official shall be mandatory.
l.
The ACS shall allow the user to enroll biometric data as part of the cardholder
enrollment process. The number of verifications to determine applicability of the
enrolled biometric data shall be configurable.
14. Cardholder Details
a. Cardholder information shall include first and last name, card number, PIN code and
valid period to provide automatic expiration. Each cardholder record shall also
incorporate at least 50 user-defined personal data fields, independent of user-defined
fields for visitor management. PIN numbers shall be configurable from 4 to 8 digits in
length.
b. Personal data fields shall have the option of being configured as mandatory.
15. Locator
TMP No. A03212.01
231300 - 8
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
a.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
This feature shall provide a quick method of locating cardholders by displaying the last
25 valid history events along with the time, date and access point used. This information
shall be available for an individual or group of persons by name, card number or by
personal data.
Card Watch Feature
a. Any cardholder shall be easily tracked as they move around a large site by selecting
card watch. As the person uses their access control card, the system shall have the
ability to automatically notify the operator of the person’s presence at each location.
Key Card Mode
a. Key card mode authority shall be assigned to special cardholders, such as site key
holders, and can be enabled on a per reader basis. This shall allow a person when
vacating an area or building to change the reader’s mode of operation from normal
access control to Key Card Out operation.
b. When in this condition only persons with key card privileges shall gain access through
the door, all non-key card users are rejected regardless of their card’s current access
rights.
c. This special feature shall be activated/deactivated by the key cardholder, using a card
swipe followed by a special code entered via the reader’s keypad.
Automatic Holiday Override
a. The software shall be programmed by the operator to recognize special or holiday dates,
which in turn can be linked to operational changes in how the site is to be managed on
these specific days. This feature shall notify a system operator of individual holiday
dates up to seven days prior provides a useful check on the date’s current validity.
Multiple types of holiday dates shall also be provided so that partial days or early closing
requirements on specific dates can be accommodated.
b. The ACS shall provide a calendar function to enable scheduling of events up to five (5)
years into the future.
c. The ACS shall provide the ability to schedule one-time events for up to five (5) years into
the future.
System Partitioning
a. The access point readers, monitor points, and auxiliary outputs shall be managed on a
partition basis by simply defining which devices are to be included in a partition.
b. The ACS shall be supplied with the ability to manage up to 5 partitions, and shall have
an option to manage up to 50 partitions.
c. Multiple private or public entities shall be able to share the system with database
segregation for card records and ownership of readers, monitor point inputs and
switching outputs dependant upon the operators assigned permissions. Each company
partition shall allow for autonomous system administration, allowing partitioned card
administration, reports, and alarms.
d. Operator permissions shall be created and assigned globally or by the owning company.
When created and assigned globally an Operator’s password shall be associated with
one or more companies.
e. Alarm reporting shall be routed to a client located at the company owning the monitor
point or reader and can be automatically redirected to a different PC at pre-programmed
times and selective days of the week.
f.
Common areas, such as the main entrance, shall have the ability to be shared so that all
companies may access these doors, even when different card customer/site codes have
been configured.
Alarm Management
a. The system must provide separate permissions for alarms and activity, and allow users
to be individually granted rights to view and or process either, neither, or both. Systems
which cannot separately grant privileges for alarms and for non-alarm activity shall not
be acceptable.
b. Alarm handling shall be efficiently managed with up to 99 priority levels and user
definable instruction messages to ensure the operator monitoring the site takes
appropriate responses. The facility shall have the ability to customize audible alerts for
each type of alarm is provided using standard or custom generated multimedia wave
files. Each alarm type shall also be presented in a user-defined color.
TMP No. A03212.01
231300 - 9
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
c.
To provide additional information when reviewing alarm signals, the operator shall either
enter custom comments or simply select from a predefined pick list to provide a timestamped record of all the actions taken throughout the incident. Predefined manual
commands shall be uniquely assigned for each alarm, and readily activated by the
operator via a command button provided on the alarm acknowledgement screen.
Additionally automatic conditional commands shall be configured to automatically
operate in response to any given alarm condition.
d. The ACS shall be optionally configured to require operator comments when
acknowledging alarms.
e. The ACS shall support the ability to selectively choose alarms to acknowledge and/or
clear.
f.
Each alarm shall be configurable to have a specified color and sound.
g. Each alarm shall be capable of linking video from digital video recorders (if applicable)
for incident playback.
h. The Alarm Monitor screen shall provide an indication that cardholder information is
available for a specific alarm. A “Card” button shall be available that when pressed will
display the cardholder badge image.
i.
Alarm monitor screen shall support the display of alarm statistics, shall provide up to ten
alarm filters to be displayed in different tabs on the alarm screen, and shall provide the
ability to sort based on each different column.
j.
Each alarm shall be time-stamped in the local time zone (not the server time zone), and
the system shall support the additional display of labels associated with different
geographical time zones such as PST, EST, GMT, etc. The labels for time zones shall
be customizable.
k. The system shall permit the routing and display of real time activity at any standard
client machine. Activity shall be shown in a dedicated activity window that is updated
automatically when new transactions occur. This option shall not be limited to routing
transactions to one location and shall support the simultaneous routing and display of
real time activity at multiple locations.
l.
Alarms shall be capable of being routed to specific client machines by time of day or day
of week.
m. Unacknowledged alarms shall be capable of being routed to alternate client (or Email –
see Software Options below) based on age and priority of alarm.
n. The display of reader door alarms shall be automatically enabled or disabled by the use
of timed commands, either by reader or by a group of readers.
o. The system shall support a generic ASCII input capability that allows the system
administrator to define specific ASCII input strings as alarms to be displayed in the alarm
monitoring window as well as on the graphical map interface if so configured.
21. E-mail Alarms
a. The ACS shall support the ability to automatically e-mail alarm condition messages.
b. Each alarm definition shall allow a destination e-mail address to be defined. The e-mail
address may be an address group as defined in the e-mail MAPI application.
c. E-mail alarm messages shall be controlled by time of day and day of the week. For
example, e-mail to the Facility Security Supervisor would only be generated when
alarms occur during after-hours times.
22. Graphical Site Maps
a. To further enhance the presentation to the operator, the system shall have the ability to
import and use graphical maps. Maps shall be linked together using a tiered tree
structure. To speed the location of an incident, each map level shall contain a clearly
visible indicator as to which sub map the operator should select next to find the device
that is in alarm.
b. Maps shall also have the ability to be configured to appear automatically on presentation
of a new alarm, providing the operator with prompt visual indication that an alarm has
occurred.
c. The status of readers, doors, monitor points and auxiliary outputs shall be requested
from any map by simply selecting the icon representing the device and its current state
will be displayed.
TMP No. A03212.01
231300 - 10
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
d.
The icons on the graphic map shall dynamically indicate the status of the device they
represent. For example, a door icon shall change to show the door open when the door
position sensor indicates such, and shall change to the original icon when the door is
again secure. Additionally, monitor points shall also change to show their current state.
e. Maps shall be created using standard office tools such as Paint® or drawing packages
such as AutoCAD®. It shall be possible to import drawings in the following formats:
JPEG, Bitmap, Windows metafile or DXF.
f.
Icons representing access points, monitoring points, switching outputs, alarm inputs,
CCTV cameras or intercom call stations shall be placed on any map at the required
location in a drag and drop manner.
g. It shall be possible to define on the map the location of readers, access doors, alarm
monitored points, output switching relays, CCTV cameras, IP CCTV Cameras, Intercom
call stations and alarm panel devices. The map display shall allow the operator to
switch the video display of any defined CCTV camera to any defined CCTV monitor.
The map display shall allow the display of stored and live Digital Video Clips.
h. It shall be possible to define on the map the location of reader groups and camera
groups. Such groups shall be placed and appear as a single icon, but actions taken on
them shall affect the entire group.
i.
It shall also be possible to change the status of readers, reader groups, floor groups,
alarm monitored points or output switching relays and confirm the successful execution
of such commands from the map display. This functionality shall be capable of being
restricted per device based on operator permission.
j.
The map display shall include the option to display a group of similar devices as a single
icon. Once devices are grouped it shall be possible to change their status. For
example, it shall be possible to unlock all entrance doors by executing a single
command from the map display.
k. It shall be possible to display a device on any map, on multiple maps, or on no maps. It
shall also be possible to display the same device in multiple locations on the same map.
Systems that do not allow devices to be placed multiple times on the same or multiple
maps shall not be acceptable.
23. Manual and Automatic Commands
a. Operators shall be provided with a wide choice of manual commands embracing the
control of readers, monitor points, output switching relays and door locking devices. Also
the operator shall have the ability to check the status of single, or multiple devices. This
shall ensure the operator is always able to check the operational status of the system
and make any adjustments as requirements change. When graphical maps are utilized,
status requests shall be simply initiated by “clicking” on the device icon within the map.
This functionality shall be capable of being restricted per device based on operator
permission.
b. Automatic commands shall be included and may operate on a timed or event basis.
c. Scheduled commands shall easily be defined linking complimentary commands to occur
at the start and stop times of any chosen timecode.
d. Event triggered commands shall provide an extremely powerful means of creating
IF/THEN/WHEN associations encompassing a wide selection of IF conditions to the
automatic execution of THEN commands subject to a WHEN timecode being active. A
minimum of 10 THEN actions shall be available per trigger command.
e. Devices shall be managed on a partition basis by grouping readers, monitor points and
auxiliary outputs. This feature shall allow multiple devices to be actioned by a single
command when using manual, timed and conditional commands. This functionality shall
be capable of being restricted per device based on operator permission.
f.
The ACS shall support an unrestricted number of automatic (scheduled and trigger) and
manual commands. These commands shall be capable of spanning across multiple
field controllers.
24. Card Initiated Commands
a. The software shall allow authorized cardholders to initiate powerful trigger commands
manually from selected reader locations when certain models of readers are used in
conjunction with the field panels.
TMP No. A03212.01
231300 - 11
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
b.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
F.
G.
Up to 99 predefined commands shall be invoked by an authorized card allowing, for
example, a patrolling guard to switch on outputs, disable monitor points, lock doors,
providing remote management of the system during a patrol of the site.
c. The system shall only permit assigned users to enter command codes at keypad
readers. Such assigned users shall not be restricted as to when or where they can enter
a command code – such restrictions may be placed on the commands themselves.
User Code Mode
a. The ACS shall support the ability to put a keypad-equipped reader into User Code
Mode. This feature shall allow a cardholder to gain access by entering a valid card’s
number at a reader keypad, therefore not requiring the holder to carry a card.
b. User code mode shall be enabled on a per reader basis.
c. This mode shall support card number only, or card number and its assigned PIN code.
Device Configuration
a. The system shall support a notes field to be associated with each device configured on
the system. The notes field shall be free-form text, and shall support a minimum of 256
characters. The notes field may be used for detailed device descriptions or for
maintenance history.
b. The system shall allow a unique set of arbitrary files of any type to be associated with
each device.
c. The system shall provide a hierarchical tree view of the system configuration supporting
expansion and collapse of any and all branches.
Daylight Saving Auto Adjustment
a. The system shall support synchronizing to a time server.
History Archive and System Back up
a. The system shall be capable of retaining at least 5 years of activity in its online log file,
disk storage space permitting.
b. The system shall allow on line archiving of history logs, along with database back up of
system configuration and cardholder details. To further ease the burden of remembering
to back up your system’s database, this function shall be able to be automated to occur
without intervention at a pre-set time.
c. The system backup and history archive shall be to a local or remotely accessible UNC
path.
d. The manufacturer of the ACS shall make available documentation on Server Hardening,
which shall, at a minimum, detail the TCP/IP ports that are utilized by the system to allow
other ports to be closed.
Elevator Control
a. Each cardholder shall have floor permissions assigned as part of the normal access
rights. The system shall provide outputs to the elevator controls to uniquely verify which
floors are authorized for each cardholder. The system shall be capable of tracking
which floor was enabled/selected by that person.
Task Manager
a. Task Manager shall be a standard feature of the software, with no separate licenses or
license fees required to activate the feature.
b. Task Manager must allow any regular or ad-hoc task to be scheduled for system
operators to complete.
Video Management System (VMS) Integration
1.
The system shall be integrated with the VMS using a TCP/IP connection. It shall be possible
to recall and replay stored video clips associated with the selected alarm using the alarms
management screen.
2.
Live video from any configured camera shall be available and viewed within the ACS by
right-clicking on an appropriate map icon.
3.
The system shall limit operator access to video based on individual permissions.
4.
Event information, such as motion detection, from the VMS shall trigger events or alarms in
the ACS. These, in turn, may trigger messaging (SMS, email) or other alarms.
5.
Events and alarms shall be communicated to the VMS to create recording events.
Required Available Software Options
TMP No. A03212.01
231300 - 12
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
1.
2.
3.
1.9
Data Connect Option
a. The system shall provide an option to import and/or export both cardholder details
(including facial images and signatures) and system alarm information to/from an
external source. This option may be used to speed initial commissioning of the Access
Control System’s database, or in some cases, to allow synchronization with other
employee management systems. This option may also be used to pass common data to
other employee-related systems or databases. It shall be possible to manually start or
schedule the data import. It shall also be possible to start the data import process from
an external application, thus providing the means for real time import.
b. The interface requirements shall be fully defined and support either a comma delimited
ASCII text file or a Microsoft SQL® database import mechanism. Fully detailed
supporting documentation shall be provided to enable a third party to design and
implement this facility without needing reference to the system’s manufacturer.
Guard Tour Option
a. This feature shall allow Guard Tour patrol sequences to be created consisting of a
number of designated clocking points, which the patrolling guard has to visit.
b. A guard tour sequence shall define the order in which the clocking points are to be
visited and also how long the guard should take to move between each clocking point
location. A window of tolerance shall be included to add a +/- value to these timings.
c. The system operator shall initiate the required guard tour patrol and declares the guard
who is to undertake the tour of the premises. The system shall then automatically
monitor the guards progress around the patrol tour, reporting alarms if the clocking
points are either out of sequence, or the guard arrives too early, or becomes overdue.
The operator shall be notified as each point is clocked to allow the guard’s progress
around the site to be monitored. A patrol tour shall be able to be suspended, if required,
and will automatically resume when the next point is then clocked.
d. Guard tour patrols shall be configurable on a per company basis when multiple
companies are required on a site. Management reports shall be created from the history
log to confirm when each guard tour was carried out, including any deviations or
incidents during the tour.
Mustering Option
a. The ACS shall support an option to generate a muster report. The muster report shows
a list of people who may be in the building (or on the site), including visitors. It is
intended to be used during fire or other emergencies to support the emergency services
identifying who may be left in the building, and where they may be located.
PROFESSIONAL SERVICES (PSG)
A.
Manufacturer shall be able to provide Professional Services for direct end user support through
the awarded contractor.
1.
All contractors shall offer Professional Services as follows:
a. Bench Testing and Commissioning.
b. Custom reporting.
c. Human Resource Integrations.
d. Conversions.
e. Third party integrations.
f.
Disaster recovery commissioning testing.
B.
Maintenance proposal should identify option for manufacturer provided Professional Services for
ongoing system support.
1.
Optional elements for support should include:
a. Program Management regularly scheduled calls to include manufacturer, integrator and
end user.
b. Routine manufacturer audits and scheduled maintenance.
c. Manufacturer provided annual upgrade services.
TMP No. A03212.01
231300 - 13
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
1.10
A.
1.11
ACCESS MONITORING & CONTROL SCHEDULES
Refer to drawings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data
1.
SPECIFIC PART NUMBERS USED MUST BE INDICATED ON EACH DATA SHEET.
INDICATE PART NUMBERS WITH A RED ELLIPSE, RECTANGLE, OR ARROW.
HIGHLIGHTING IS NOT ACCEPTABLE. A TABLE OF CONTENTS REFERENCE SHEET
WITHOUT RED INDICATORS IS NOT ACCEPTABLE.
B.
Procedures
1.
Submit one electronic copy of each submittal.
C.
Shop Drawings
1.
General Shop Drawings for the project as described elsewhere.
2.
Provide other Shop Drawings only if specifically requested by the Architect.
D.
Manufacturers Installation and Programming Instructions
1.
Provide Manufacturers Installation and Programming Instructions as requested in the various
Specification Sections.
E.
Project Record Drawings
1.
Definition: Project Record Drawings are drawings that completely record and document all
aspects and features of the Work.
2.
The purpose of Project Record Drawings is to provide factual information regarding all
aspects of the Work, to enable future service, modifications, and additions to the Work.
3.
Project Record Drawings are an important element of this Work. Contractor shall accurately
maintain Project Record Drawings throughout the course of this project. Project Record
Drawings shall include documentation of all Work, including the documentation of existing
equipment, wiring, conduits, and raceways that are to be reused in the Work.
4.
Contractor shall maintain the working set of Project Record Drawings at the project site
throughout the course of the Work. The working set shall be updated on a daily basis as the
Work progresses.
5.
Project Record Drawings shall accurately show the physical placement of the following:
6.
Equipment and devices.
7.
Conduit and raceways.
8.
Junction and pull box locations.
9.
End-of-line resistor locations.
10. Interfaces to external equipment.
11. Connections to LAN, power and telephone circuits.
12. Project Record Drawings shall show the physical placement of each device and conduit or
aerial center line, to be accurate to within one foot (1') of the nearest landmark. Where the
site plan furnished by the Owner Project Manager conflicts with actual conditions, Contractor
shall amend site plan as required. Indicate exact description of conduit runs (above ground,
two foot trench, along outside wall of building, etc.).
13. Project Record Drawings shall show wire and cable runs, zone numbers, tamper circuit
configuration, panel/circuit breaker numbers from which equipment is powered, and splice
points. Such information may be shown on the site plans.
14. Project Record Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Owner Project Manager on
a daily basis. Incomplete or inaccurate Project Record Drawings may be cause for delay of
Contractor's payment.
15. Upon completion of Work, and prior to Final Acceptance, Contractor shall prepare and
submit to the Owner Project Manager a final record set of Project Record Drawings. This set
shall consist of all data transferred from the working set, supplemented by Riser Diagrams
and other information. The final record set of Project Record Drawings shall be drafted by a
TMP No. A03212.01
231300 - 14
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
skilled draftsperson, under the supervision of Contractor. All final Project Record Drawings
shall be provided to the Owner.
F.
System Documentation
1.
Definition: System Documentation is a complete collection of all installation, programming,
operation, and maintenance manuals and work sheets relating to the equipment provided as
part of the Work.
2.
Contractor shall maintain a file of System Documentation at the project site throughout the
course of the Work. Such file shall be updated with new information as equipment is
received and installed. System Documentation shall be available for inspection by the
Owner Project Manager on a daily basis.
3.
Upon completion of Work, and prior to final Acceptance, Contractor shall prepare and submit
to the Owner Project Manager three (3) sets of System Documentation.
G.
Closeout Submittals
1.
Provide a set of as-built drawings and manuals to the the Owner Project Manager
2.
As-Built Drawings
3.
Mounting Details
4.
Product Data
5.
Installation Manuals
6.
Operating Manuals
7.
Software licenses
8.
For custom software needed for system integrations, provide software, and well commented
source code.
9.
Maintenance/Service Manuals
10. Provide the Owner Project Manager- with all programming sheets, keys to the equipment
cabinets, as-built drawings, operating manuals, maintenance/repair manuals, spare fuses,
tools for tamper-resistant enclosures and tools for manual resetting devices.
1.12
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Qualifications Of Contractor
1.
Contractor shall be an installation and service contractor regularly engaged in the sale,
installation, maintenance and service of access control systems.
2.
Contractor shall have three years experience with the installation, start-up and programming
of systems of a similar size and complexity to the one proposed.
3.
Contractor shall be a factory authorized dealer of the system proposed for at least two years.
4.
4 Contractor shall provide factory certified technicians to perform the installation of all
intelligent controller components in this project. Evidence of the certification shall be in
writing from the manufacturer and shall be on the technician’s person at all times while on
site.
B.
Supervision Of Work
1.
Contractor shall employ a competent Foreman to be in responsible charge of the Work.
Foreman shall be on the project site daily during the execution of the Work.
2.
Contractor's Foreman shall be a regular employee, principle, or officer of Contractor, who is
thoroughly experienced in projects of a similar size and type. Contractor shall not use
contract employees or Subcontractors as Foremen.
C.
Qualifications Of Technicians
1.
All electronic systems Work shall be performed by electronic technicians thoroughly trained
in the installation and service of specialty low-voltage electronic systems.
2.
Journeyman Wireman electrical workers may be used to install conduit, raceways, wiring,
and the like, provided that final termination, hook-up, programming, and testing is performed
by a qualified electronic technician, and that all such Work is supervised by the Contractor's
Foreman.
3.
All incidental Work, such as cutting and patching, lock hardware installation, painting,
carpentry, and the like, shall be accomplished by skilled craftspersons regularly engaged in
TMP No. A03212.01
231300 - 15
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
such type of work. All such Work shall comply with the highest standards applicable to that
respective industry or craft.
D.
Subcontractors
1.
Definition: A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the
Contractor to perform any of the Work at the site.
2.
Use of any Subcontractor is subject to the approval of the Architect and Designer. The
Contractor shall identify all Subcontractors on the Bid Form. The Contractor shall make no
substitution for any Subcontractor previously selected without approval from the Architect
and Designer.
3.
Contractor's Foreman shall be on the project site daily during all periods when
Subcontractors are performing any of the Work. Contractor's Foreman shall be in
responsible charge of all Work, including any Work being performed by Subcontractors.
4.
By an appropriate written agreement, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the
extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by
the terms of the Drawings and Specifications, and to assume toward the Contractor all the
obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these documents, assumes toward
the Owner.
E.
Supervision And Construction Procedures
1.
The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using his best skill and attention.
Contractor is solely responsible for all construction means, methods, and techniques.
2.
The Contractor shall employ a competent foreman who shall be in attendance at the project
site during the progress of the Work. The foreman shall represent the Contractor and all
communications given to the foreman shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.
F.
Regulatory Requirements
1.
All Work is to conform to all building, fire, and electrical codes and ordinances applicable in
the locale. In case of conflict between the Drawings/Specifications and codes, the codes
shall govern. Notify the Architect of any such conflicts.
2.
Contractor shall secure and pay for all licenses, permits, plan reviews, engineering
certifications, and inspections required by regulatory agencies. Contractor shall prepare, at
Contractor's expense, any documents, including drawings, that may be required by
regulatory agencies.
G.
Permits
1.
The Contractor shall make application for and obtain any and all permits required by federal,
state, county, city, or other authority having jurisdiction over the work.
1.13
A.
1.14
Security of Contractor’s Tools and Equipment: the General Contractor is not responsible for the
care, storage or security of any of the Contractor's tools or equipment.
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A.
Clean-Up
1.
Contractor shall clean-up, on a daily basis as the Work progresses, all dirt, dust and debris
caused by Contractor’s operations. Clean-up shall be completed by the end of each
workday to the satisfaction of the General Contractor.
2.
In the event that Contractor fails to clean-up, the General Contractor may elect to have
clean-up performed by others, with the costs of such clean-up being charged to the
Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner.
B.
Construction Aids
1.
Definition: Construction Aids are facilities and equipment required by personnel to facilitate
the execution of the Work. Construction Aids include scaffolds, staging, ladders, platforms,
TMP No. A03212.01
231300 - 16
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
2.
3.
1.15
hoists, cranes, lifts, trenchers, core drillers, protective equipment, and other such facilities
and equipment.
Contractor shall provide all Construction Aids required in the execution of the Work.
Construction Aids that are the property of the others shall not be used without permission.
Storage of Construction Aids shall be coordinated with the Owner's on-site representative.
SEQUENCING
A.
Description
1.
This implementation plan describes the general approach that shall be followed in order to
minimize the time for the access control systems to be operational.
B.
Approach
1.
Contractor shall plan and schedule all work in such a sequence as to minimize the time
before the system is operational. The following is a suggested work sequence:
2.
Order all equipment needed and notify any subcontractors to schedule their participation.
3.
Perform all system layout work.
4.
Insure there are an adequate number of power receptacles available to operate all security
equipment and coordinate with the Owner as to where power is available.
5.
Provide shop drawings to verify location of all equipment, conduit runs, power connections,
etc. Submit shop drawings to the Owner Project Manager.
6.
Coordinate with the Owner to provide space in each building’s Communications Room for
mounting of processors.
7.
Provide training on how to fill out the programming sheets for access levels.
8.
Prepare and pre-test all equipment to the greatest extent possible.
9.
Install all equipment.
10. Provide training on the programming other various options.
11. Test and inspect all systems.
12. Perform all other Work as required.
13. Perform the Acceptance Test.
14. Provide training.
15. Provide as-built drawings.
1.16
A.
1.17
SCHEDULING
The Contractor, within five (5) days after being awarded the contract, shall prepare and submit for
the Owner’s information, an estimated progress schedule for the Work. The progress schedule
shall be related to the entire project, and shall indicate start and completion dates.
WARRANTY
A.
Contractor warrants that all Work furnished (material and labor) under this Contract will be of
good quality, free from faults and defects, and in conformance with the Project Drawings and
Specifications.
B.
Contractor shall provide a parts and labor guarantee on all Work. Unless otherwise specified
herein, Contractor’s guarantee shall be for a period of one (1) year from Date of Acceptance,
except where any specific guarantees from a supplier or equipment manufacturer extends for a
longer time.
C.
Contractor's guarantee shall cover all costs associated with troubleshooting, repair, and
replacement of defective Work, including costs of labor, transportation, lodging, materials, and
equipment.
D.
Guarantee shall not cover any damage to material or equipment caused by accident, misuse,
unauthorized modification or repair by the Owner, or acts of god.
TMP No. A03212.01
231300 - 17
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
E.
1.18
A.
1.19
Contractor shall promptly respond to the Owner’s requests for service during the guarantee
period. Contractor shall provide repair service as soon as reasonably possible upon request from
the Owner, but in no case shall service response exceed 8 business hours from time of request.
SYSTEM STARTUP
Power shall only be applied to the system after re-checking for proper grounding of the system
and measuring all loops for lack of shorts, grounds, and open circuits.
COORDINATION INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Contractor shall closely schedule and coordinate his activities with the Owner, other Trades, and
the General Contractor.
B.
The Contractor shall coordination his work closely with other trades; particularly the door
hardware contractor, the electrical contractor, and the structured cabling contractor.
C.
The Contractor shall accompany the designer/engineer on construction administration inspections
as required, and provide technical labor to assist with testing during these visits as needed.
1.20
COMMISSIONING
A.
Contractor shall submit a request for the Acceptance test in writing to the Architect, no less than
fourteen days prior to the requested test date. The request for Acceptance test shall be
accompanied by a certification from Contractor that all Work is complete and has been pretested, and that all corrections have been made.
B.
During Acceptance test, Contractor shall demonstrate all equipment and system features to the
Owner and Designer. Contractor shall remove covers, open wiring connections, operate
equipment, and perform other reasonable work as requested by the Owner and Designer.
C.
Any portions of the Work found to be deficient or not in compliance with the Project Drawing and
Specifications will be rejected. Designer will prepare a list of any such deficiencies observed
during the Acceptance test. Contractor shall promptly correct all deficiencies. Upon correction of
deficiencies, Contractor shall submit a request in writing to the Owner Project Manager for
another Acceptance Test.
D.
If, at the conclusion of the Acceptance Test, all Work is found to be acceptable and in compliance
with the Project Drawings and Specifications, the Owner will issue a letter of Acceptance to
Contractor and the Architect.
1.21
MAINTENANCE
A.
Provide full procedures for all database back-ups.
B.
Provide full procedures for server/workstation hard drive maintenance, such as defrag, etc.
C.
Provide full procedures for maintaining physical and software firewalls.
D.
Provide full procedures for upgrading software.
E.
Provide full procedures for testing battery condition on all field panels for adequate back-up time.
F.
Provide full procedures for any other tasks that must be performed to ensure the warranty
remains intact.
TMP No. A03212.01
231300 - 18
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
All products not provided by the Owner shall be new and unused, and shall be of manufacturer's
current and standard production.
B.
Where two or more equipment items of the same kind are provided, all shall be identical and
provided by the same manufacturer.
C.
Drawings and Specifications indicate major system components, and may not show every
component, connector, module, or accessory that may be required to support the operation
specified. Contractor shall provide all components needed for complete and satisfactory
operation.
D.
Product Availability
1.
Contractor, prior to submitting a proposal, shall determine product availability and delivery
time, and shall include such considerations into his proposed Contract Time.
2.
Certain products specified may only be available through factory authorized dealers and
distributors. Contractor shall verify his ability to procure the products specified prior to
submitting a proposal.
E.
Wire And Cable
1.
General: Provide all wire and cable required to install systems as indicated. Wire and cable
shall be sized to provide minimum voltage drop and minimum resistance to the devices
being supplied.
2.
All cables shall be specifically designed for their intended use (direct burial, aerial, etc.).
3.
Comply with equipment manufacturers recommendations for wire and cable size and type.
4.
Comply with all applicable codes and ordinances.
F.
Conduit And Raceway Systems
1.
General: The placing of surface mounted conduit on the exterior of any building is
FORBIDDEN. Exceptions shall be approved by the Owner prior to its installation.
G.
Lightning Protection
1.
The Contractor shall provide suitable lightning protection for all processors/controllers, and
exterior devices.
2.
All lightning protection equipment shall be UL listed.
2.2
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM - SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
A.
Security Local Area Network (LAN)
1.
The Security LAN shall be a physically separate network, used by both the video
surveillance system, and the access control system.
a. Passive copper and fiber connectivity for this shall be provided by the structured cabling
contractor.
b. Active network components and UPS backup shall be provided by the Security
contractor.
c. See section 282300 Video Surveillance for specifications of active network components.
Exception: Unless there is a specific need, ACS switches do not need to be POE.
2.
The ACS LAN shall connect to the Owner’s LAN via a second network interface card (NIC)
in the ACS server.
3.
The Owner’s implementation of Active Directory shall be used on this network. Coordinate
with the Owner to accomplish this.
B.
Head-end Hardware and Software
1.
Client PC Workstations:
TMP No. A03212.01
231300 - 19
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
a.
2.
3.
4.
The contractor shall provide two access control client PC workstations that meet or
exceed the following criteria, or meet or exceed the system manufacturer’s
requirements, whichever is more stringent:
1) Mini-Tower - Dell Optiplex 780, Intel Core2 Duo 2.80GHz, 4GB RAM, 250GB HDD,
256MB Video, CDRW/DVD, Gigabit NIC, keyboard/mouse, 19" LCD, Win7Pro, 3-year
Next Business Day Warranty.
Server PC (if required by system)
a. If the accepted system requires a server, the contractor shall provide a rack mounted
server machine that meets or exceeds the following criteria, or meets or exceeds the
system manufacturer’s requirements, whichever is more stringent:
b. Tower - Dell PowerEdge T410, Intel QuadCore Xeon 2.26GHz, 4GB RAM, 750GB HDD,
DVD-RW, Gigabit NIC, keyboard/mouse, 19" LCD, Windows Server 2008 (Standard
Ed.), SQL Server 2008 (Standard Ed.) w/ 5 CAL, 3-year Dell 5 x 10 Next Business Day
warranty.
1U high Rack Mount Enterprise appliance (S2 Enterprise only).
In all cases, current minimum manufacturer recommendations take precedence. However,
minimum manufacturer recommendations shall be exceeded.
C.
Cards & Readers
1.
HID RP40 multiCLASS™ Reader model 6125C (Wiegand) shall be used as the typical
reader.
2.
HID RP15 multiCLASS™ Reader model 6145C (Wiegand) may be used for narrow mounting
applications.
3.
RPK40 multiCLASS 6136C (Wiegand) may be used in locations requiring PIN pad function
along with the other proximity functions.
a. The function of this reader shall be to allow access upon presentation of a valid
proximity card, OR the entry of a valid PIN.
4.
The Contractor shall provide 550 iClass proximity cards by HID to the Owner with the system
close out documents. The cards shall be combination 125khz proximity, and 13.56 MHz
contactless smart cards. During construction, the Contractor shall make 35 additional
“temporary” cards available to the Owner’s Project Manager, for use by the Owner and for
distribution to the General Contractor. Access granted by these cards will be configured as
directed by the Owner’s Project Manager and will be configured to expire automatically on
the projected completion date.
5.
The contractor shall provide 200 PVC, non-access-control cards, for the purpose of
inexpensively test printing badge designs.
D.
Badge/Card Printer
1.
Contractor to provide and configure a card/badge printer for dual-sided, edge-to-edge card
printing having full-color, continuous-tone printing at 300 dpi (11.8 dots/mm). It shall also
encode smart cards. Use FARGO brand DTC4250e Printer/Encoder (or approved equal)
with the appropriate modules for this purpose.
E.
Badging ID Camera
1.
Contractor to provide a VGA resolution, USB camera, with desktop tripod, for use for an
enrollment camera.
F.
Electric Locks - Electric locking door hardware should be provided by the door hardware
contractor per the door hardware schedule and specification. Contractor to verify against the
Door Hardware Specification, section 087100. In the event the Security Contractor is to provide
locking hardware, use the following as a basis:
1.
HES model 1006 electric strikes, provided with Smart Pac III or better in door frame.
2.
Securitron model M62 electromagnetic locks
3.
Locknetics (IR) model 101-2+DSMMBSATS double egress delayed egress magnetic lock
4.
Locknetics (IR) model m490dep-2 double delayed egress magnetic lock
5.
Locknetics (IR) model M490DEP single delayed egress magnetic lock
G.
Request-to-Exit Devices
TMP No. A03212.01
231300 - 20
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
H.
Passive Infrared Request-to-Exit (PIR)
1.
Bosch model DS150i Passive Infrared (PIR) motion request to exit device
2.
Push-to-Exit buttons, as required for use with magnetic locks:
a. Securitron model EEB2 illuminated button with 30-second hold unsecure.
b. NOTE: Push-to-Exit buttons should be provided by the door hardware contractor per the
door hardware schedule and the door hardware specification.
I.
Door Release Buttons (DRB)
1.
Use United Security Products HUB2SA or approved equal.
2.
Releasing a door or gate via the door release button shall also generate a request-to-exit
signal to the access control system to avoid a false “forced door” event.
J.
Door position switches (DPS)
1.
General:
a. All door position switches (DPS) shall be single pole, double throw (SPDT).
b. All DPS shall be wired at the DPS for 4-state supervision.
c. Consideration for the color and type of door and door frame shall be given when
purchasing DPS’s. Maintaining aesthetics shall be paramount.
2.
Provide George Risk Industries model 195-12WG or approved equal for a standard door
position switch.
3.
George Risk Industries model 4532DL-36 or approved equal overhead door position switch.
K.
Lock power supplies
1.
Shall be provided for any ACS device or with no power supply provided by the door
hardware specification.
2.
Shall have integrated fire alarm interfaces, be voltage configurable, and have protected on
each channel by auto-resetting PTCs. Size as appropriate. Manufacturer shall be Altronix or
AlarmSaf.
3.
Provide sufficient battery backup to operate the powered locks and access control panels for
6 hours under normal usage, and assuming fail-secure strikes or door hardware.
L.
Intercom for manual door entry
1.
Shall be based on the Aiphone AX family.
2.
Door/gate entry units shall be flush mounted video intercom models, able to unlock the door
and provide a request-to-exit to the ACS when directed by a desk mounted intercom. Use
model AX-DV. Provide back box specifications, and custom back boxes to the electrical
contractor for rough in.
3.
The exchange shall be at least model AX-084C.
4.
The desktop video intercoms shall be model AX-8MV-W.
5.
Releasing a door or gate via the intercom shall also generate a request-to-exit signal to the
access control system to avoid a false “forced door” event.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS
A.
The system shall only be provided by Contractors who are factory authorized to install, service
and maintain the system by the access control manufacturer.
B.
The Contractor must have been a factory authorized dealer with the proposed manufacturer for a
period of at least two (2) years before the Bid Opening Date.
C.
The Contractor’s installers and technicians must also be factory trained and certified to perform
such tasks.
3.2
A.
EXAMINATION
The Contractor shall be required to visit the installation site prior to bidding the job.
TMP No. A03212.01
231300 - 21
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
B.
3.3
The Contractor shall report any discrepancies between the Specifications, Drawings, and Site
Examination prior to the Bid Opening Date.
PREPARATION
A.
The Contractor shall order all required parts and equipment upon notification of award of the
Work.
B.
The Contractor shall bench test all equipment prior to delivery to the job site.
C.
The Contractor shall verify the availability of power where required. The access control system is
to be powered by emergency power outlets backed up by the facility’s generator. If a new source
of power is required, a licensed electrician shall be used to install it.
D.
The Contractor shall arrange for obtaining all programming information including access times,
free access times, door groups, operator levels, etc.
3.4
INSTALLATION
A.
The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner’s IT Department when connecting to their
network.
B.
The Contractor, in coordination with the General Contractor, Architect, and Designer, shall
educate the Owner and coordinate with the Owner to clarify how the system features shall be
programmed to suit the Owner’s needs. After these parameters are established, the Contractor
shall issue a summary document for the Owner to approve prior to programming. IT IS
INCUMBENT UPON THE CONTRACTOR TO BEGIN THIS PROCESS EARLY IN
CONSTRUCTION. These parameters include, but are not limited to the following:
1.
Door/Gate/Reader naming conventions
2.
Alarm/event designations.
3.
Alarm event acknowledgement.
4.
Camera call-ups.
5.
Time code, reader group, cardholder group assignments.
6.
Assistance with initial entry of cardholders and operators, along with their permissions.
7.
Operator permissions.
8.
Maps.
9.
Email alerts.
10. Automatic reports.
C.
The Contractor shall carefully follow the instructions in the manufacturers’ Installation Manual to
insure all steps have been taken to provide a reliable, easy to operate system.
D.
The Administrator Terminal shall be connected to the remote terminals before connecting to any
card reader processors.
E.
Perform all Work as indicated in the Drawings and Specifications.
F.
The Contractor shall install the appropriate cable from the CPU to readers, door contacts,
request-to-exit devices, and electric locks at each door and/or gate.
G.
All communications cables shall be kept away from power circuits.
H.
The Contractor shall install the power supply(s) for electric locks (if needed) in locations where
they won’t interfere with other operations.
I.
The Contractor shall also execute adequate testing of the system to insure proper operation.
TMP No. A03212.01
231300 - 22
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
J.
3.5
The Contractor shall provide adequate training. See training requirements below.
WORKMANSHIP
A.
Comply with highest industry standards, except when specified requirements indicate more rigid
standards or more precise workmanship.
B.
Perform Work with persons experienced and qualified to produce workmanship specified.
C.
Maintain quality control over suppliers and Subcontractors.
D.
Quality of workmanship is considered important. Designer will have the authority to reject Work
which does not conform to the Drawings and Specifications.
3.6
A.
3.7
EQUIPMENT PRE-TEST
All equipment shall be bench tested prior to delivery to job site and prior to installation. Bench
test per manufacturer’s installation instructions.
WIRE AND CABLE
A.
Design, layout, size, and plan new wire and cable runs as required.
B.
All wire and cable from the processors to all devices at each door shall be “home-run” unless
otherwise specified.
C.
Do not splice conductors. Wire nuts shall not be used on any low-voltage wiring. Use terminal
blocks.
D.
Identify all wire and cable at terminations and at every junction box. Identification shall be made
with an approved permanent label, Brady or equal.
3.8
WIRE AND CABLE TERMINATIONS
A.
Identify all inputs and outputs on terminal strips with permanent marking labels.
B.
Neatly dress and tie (hook and loop only) all wiring. The length of conductors within enclosures
shall be sufficient to neatly train the conductor to the terminal point with no excess. Run all wire
and cable parallel or normal to walls, floors and ground.
C.
Install connectors as required by equipment manufacturers.
D.
Terminations shall be made so that there is no bare conductor at the terminal. The conductor
insulation shall bear against the terminal or connector shoulder.
E.
Do not obstruct equipment controls or indicators with wire or cable. Route wire and cable away
from heat producing components such as resistors, regulators, and the like.
3.9
A.
B.
CONDUIT AND RACEWAY INSTALLATION
Design, lay-out, size and plan new conduit and raceway systems as required.
Indoor Requirements:
1.
Raceways between wall mounted panels, and elevating up the walls of the
Telecommunications Rooms shall be appropriately large conduits, keeping the TR wall
aesthetically pleasing.
TMP No. A03212.01
231300 - 23
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
2.
C.
3.10
Power should be coordinated to be in the cabinets of panels that need it. If not, the power
outlet used by the ACS shall be put into a steel enclosure, and connected to the other
enclosures by conduit.
Outdoor Requirements:
1.
Where conduit penetrates exterior walls, seal opening around conduit in an approved
manner to make watertight.
2.
Use galvanized straps and fasteners on all exterior conduit.
3.
ll exterior boxes will only be used to aid in pulling the cable between points.
PENETRATIONS
A.
Do not penetrate any roof, flashing, exterior wall, or parapet without prior approval from the
Owner’s designated Construction Project representative.
B.
When penetrating a fire wall for passage of cables and/or conduit, always provide a fire-stop
system that complies with code and the local authority having jurisdiction.
3.11
A.
3.12
A.
3.13
FIRE RATED DOORS AND FRAMES
Do nothing to modify a UL rated door or frame that would void the UL label or fire rating.
GROUNDING
Provide earth-grounding of equipment as required by equipment manufacturer. Earth ground
shall be connected to ground rod or approved cold water pipe. Electrical or telephone ground
connections shall not be used as earth grounds. Connections to mounting posts or building
structural steel shall not be used as earth grounds.
POWER TO SECURITY EQUIPMENT
A.
Power all equipment from 120 VAC, generator backed-up, circuit dedicated for security use,
except as noted. Mark all panel circuit breakers with labels worded “Security Equipment - Do Not
Operate”, or equivalent.
B.
All plug-in transformers shall be located at the security control panels. Secure all low-voltage
plug-in transformers to outlet with screw or strap. Clearly label all transformers to identify
purpose and use.
3.14
A.
3.15
CUTTING AND PATCHING
The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting or patching that may be required to
complete the Work.
A.
Upon reaching Substantial Completion, perform a complete test and inspection of the system. If
found to be installed and operating properly, notify the Owner of your readiness to perform the
formal Test & Inspection of the complete system.
B.
Submit the Record Drawings (as-builts) to the Owner for review prior to inspection.
C.
During the formal Test & Inspection (Commissioning) of the system, have personnel available
with tools and equipment to remove devices from their mounts to inspect wiring connections.
Provide wiring diagrams and labeling charts to properly identify all wiring.
D.
The ACS contractor shall accompany the designer/engineer on site visits as required.
TMP No. A03212.01
231300 - 24
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
E.
If corrections are needed, the Contractor will be provided with a Punch-List of all discrepancies.
Perform the needed corrections in a timely fashion.
F.
Notify the Owner when ready to perform a re-inspection of the installation.
3.16
INITIAL PROGRAMMING AND CONFIGURATION
A.
Contractor shall provide initial programming and configuration of the Access Control System.
Programming shall include defining hardware, doors, monitor points, clearance codes, time
codes, door groups, alarm groups, operating sequences, camera call-ups, and the like. Input of
all program data shall be by Contractor. Contractor shall consult with Security Consultant and
Owner to determine operating parameters.
B.
Contractor shall develop and input system graphics, such as maps and standby screens. Owner
shall provide floor plan drawings as the basis for the creation of maps. Development of maps
shall include the creation of icons for all doors, monitor points, and tamper circuits. Owner shall
provide floor plan drawings, in the form of AutoCAD .DWG or .DXF files, as the basis for the
creation of maps.
C.
Owner, with the cooperation and assistance of Contractor, will input the cardholder data for each
access card.
D.
Contractor shall maintain hard copy worksheets which fully document the system program and
configuration. Worksheets shall be kept up to date on a daily basis by Contractor until final
Acceptance by Owner. Worksheets shall be subject to inspection and approval by Owner.
Provide final copies to Owner prior to Project Close-out.
E.
Contractor shall maintain a complete, up-to-date magnetic tape backup of the system
configuration and cardholder database. Backup shall be maintained throughout programming
period until final Acceptance by Owner. Submit back-up tapes to Owner upon Final Acceptance.
F.
Approximately sixty (60) days after start-up of system, Contractor shall return to project to provide
follow-up assistance with system configuration as requested by Owner. Contractor shall include
an allowance of eight (8) hours of labor for follow-up assistance in his Base Bid price.
3.17
A.
B.
C.
TRAINING
Contractor shall provide complete operator training on the Access Control System. Training shall
consist of two each 4 hour blocks of instruction, each for five people selected by Owner for
system administrator training, plus two each two (2) hour blocks of individual hands-on training for
each of ten people selected by Owner for guard-level operator training. Hands-on training shall
include the opportunity for each person to operate the system, and to practice each operation that
an operator would be expected to perform.
Training shall cover all operating features of the system, including the following:
1.
System set-up and cardholder database configuration.
2.
Access control features.
3.
Alarm monitoring features.
4.
Report generation and searches.
5.
Card management and Badge Design/Printing
6.
Disk backup procedures
7.
Routine maintenance and adjustment procedures.
Training sessions are to be held at Owner’s facility, and are to be scheduled at the convenience
of Owner. Contractor shall provide written training outline and agenda for each training session
prior to scheduling.
TMP No. A03212.01
231300 - 25
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
D.
Contractor shall provide written training materials for each student.
TMP No. A03212.01
231300 - 26
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
SECTION 282300 – VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
SUMMARY OF WORK
The Security Contractor shall provide a fully engineered, turnkey video surveillance system as
specified in these specifications and drawings. Because the video surveillance system shall be
tightly integrated to the access control system, the same contractor shall be used for both
systems.
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
IP cameras
B.
Head-end hardware and software
C.
Client hardware and software
D.
Active networking gear for the Security Local Area Network (LAN)
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 260534 – Electrical – Raceways and Conduit Systems.
B.
Section 271005 – Communications – Structured Voice and Data Cabling Infrastructure.
C.
Section 281300 – Access Control System
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) – NFPA 101: Life Safety Code.
B.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) – NFPA 70: National Electrical Code.
C.
Applicable local codes and ordinances.
1.5
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
The software shall be of the video management system provider’s official product line and
designed for commercial/industrial use 24/7/365.
B.
The software shall be based upon standard components and proven technology using open and
published protocols.
C.
The video management system provider shall be defined as the manufacturer of the video
management software, and the party responsible for rigorous self-testing of the software prior to
the release of the software.
1.6
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The video management system provider shall offer thorough training to contractors in the service
and installation of the provided software.
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
TMP No. A03212.01
282300 - 1
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
B.
1.7
All installation, configuration and setup of software as well as related work hereto shall by carried
out by qualified technicians thoroughly trained by the video management system provider in the
installation and service of the provided software.
GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
The system shall be a turnkey, fully distributed solution, designed for multi-site and multiple
server installations requiring 24/7 surveillance with support for devices from different vendors.
B.
It shall be possible to connect up to 64 cameras or other devices for each recording server and
for up to 5 recording servers to be connected to a single master recording server across multiple
sites. The system shall support any combination of master and slave servers to provide flexibility
and scalability in the overall system configuration.
C.
The video management system shall support Microsoft Vista Business/Enterprise/Ultimate,
Windows 2003 Server, Windows XP Professional, Windows 7 Professional/Enterprise/Ultimate
and Windows Server 2008. All as 32-bit or 64-bit (running as 32-bit) applications and with the
latest patches and service packs installed. The system shall use DirectX and .NET.
D.
The following eight major components shall be included in the system:
1.
Surveillance system server, which shall consist of the following add-on applications/solutions
or services:
a. Recording server (a service).
b. Management application.
c. Image server (a service).
d. Event server (a service).
e. Download manager.
f.
Mobile viewing client server.
2.
Viewing client.
3.
Web viewing client.
4.
Standalone viewing client (for exported video recordings).
5.
Video-sharing application.
6.
Transactional data application.
7.
Graphical alarm management solution.
8.
Mobile viewing client.
E.
The system shall be able to incorporate a fully integrated video-sharing functionality that shall
enable distributed viewing of any camera in the system, from any computer with the viewing client
or video-sharing application installed.
F.
The system shall include support for a graphical alarm management solution. This solution shall
support continuous monitoring of the operational status and event-triggered alarms from system
servers, cameras and other external devices. The solution shall visualize the status of cameras
and other inputs with graphical and interactive icons.
G.
The system shall include a software development kit (SDK) which shall allow for the capability of
integrating the system with third-party software. The SDK shall enable the user to:
1.
Retrieve live and recorded video in different ways:
a. In raw data format, either encoded or decoded, or
b. As a window to be resized and shown embedded in another application.
2.
Create plug-in components for the viewing client.
3.
Control the operation of video-sharing functionality.
4.
Retrieve alarm/event information.
5.
Integrate data sources for the transactional data application.
6.
For further information concerning SDK, see the 2.09 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT KIT
(SDK) section.
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
TMP No. A03212.01
282300 - 2
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
H.
The system shall provide connectivity with third-party systems and devices using the OPC
(Object-Linking and Embedding Process Control) Data Access set of communication standards.
The system shall support the following commands and interfaces:
1.
Get configuration.
2.
Get server CPU load.
3.
Get camera status and frame rate.
4.
Get camera and global events.
5.
Set events.
6.
Set the video-sharing application’s live view and playback.
I.
The system shall include a standalone viewing client that shall be able to show video exported
from the viewing client. The standalone viewing client shall enable recipients of the video to
browse and play back exported video without installing separate software on their computers.
J.
The system shall be designed to support each component on the same computer for efficiency in
smaller systems or in a distributed architecture for large system deployments. Video management
system core components must be installed on the same server.
K.
It shall be possible to install and run the system on virtualized Windows® servers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
VIDEO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (VMS)
A.
The basis of design and preferred VMS is the Milestone XProtect Professional system, with Axis
and Arecont cameras as specified later in this document. For ease of integrations this is the
preferred product if S2 Systems NetBox Extreme is to be the access control system.
B.
An acceptable alternate VMS is the Avigilon ACC VMS with Avigilon, Arecont, and Mobotix
cameras as specified later in this document. For ease of integration, this is the preferred product
if Avigilon ACM is to be the access control system.
C.
Nothing in this specification shall be interpreted to exclude either of these systems.
D.
Licensing
1.
The system provided shall be turnkey, and include all licenses required for complete
functionality as specified. The contractor shall also provide two years of software support as
a part of the base scope of work.
E.
Video device drivers and supported devices
1.
The system shall support installation of video device drivers (program components used for
communication with the camera/devices connected to a recording server).
2.
Video device drivers for supported devices shall be automatically loaded during the initial
installation of the system.
3.
It shall be possible to download newly released device drivers from the website of the video
management system provider if the administrator is connecting a device to which the driver
is not already loaded.
4.
The supported camera and encoder model numbers shall be listed for each manufacturer on
an up-to-date web site.
5.
The video management system shall support future camera and encoders models as
support becomes available without having to reconfigure the system.
6.
Camera device drivers shall be decoupled from the video management software which shall
not require to be updated or re-configured in order to work with the new camera device
drivers.
7.
The video management system shall support devices from at least the following
manufacturers:
a. ACTi
b. Avigilon
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
TMP No. A03212.01
282300 - 3
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
c. Axis Communications
d. Bosch
e. IQinvision/IQeye
f.
Mobotix
g. Panasonic
h. Pelco
i.
Samsung
j.
Sanyo
k. Sony
l.
VideoIQ
The system shall support interoperability with IP camera standards including, at a minimum,
the Physical Security Interoperability Alliance (PSIA) and the Open Network Video Interface
Forum (ONVIF).
The recording servers shall support cameras with universal serial bus (USB)
communications.
The system shall include a universal driver that shall support any generic network camera
responding to the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol). The driver must be able to handle
standard video streaming formats including MJPEG, MPEG4 and H.264.
The system shall support specific hardware devices, and the specific supported model
numbers shall be listed for each manufacturer on an up-to-date online website.
The video management system shall support the use of 360° panomorph video technology.
a. It shall be possible to enable the use of 360° lens technology in the management
application.
b. It shall be possible to enable panomorph support in the management application.
For export purposes, the system shall support 56-bit encryption of video.
The system shall support the use of computers, servers, storage hardware and switches
from any manufacturer.
The video management system shall be able to run on the following operating system setup:
a. Microsoft Windows 7 Professional/Enterprise/Ultimate and Windows Server 2008. All 32bit or 64-bit (running as a 32-bit application).
F.
Surveillance system server
1.
The surveillance system server shall support the use of separate networks, VLANs or
switches for connecting the cameras to the recording servers. The system shall provide
physical network separation from the clients and facilitate the use of static IP addresses for
the devices.
2.
The surveillance system server shall support H.264, MPEG-4 (both ASP and SP), and
MJPEG compression formats for the video stream from all devices including analog cameras
connected to encoders, DVRs, and IP cameras connected to the system. In addition, the
system shall support the MxPEG video compression algorithm, which is unique to Mobotix.
MxPEG encoding shall have the capability to maintain high image quality for megapixel
cameras while dramatically decreasing bandwidth consumption.
3.
The surveillance system server shall be able to record the native camera frame rate and
resolution (NTSC, PAL, HD or Megapixel), or as configured in the management application.
G.
Recording server
1.
Recording servers shall be able to record video feeds and communicate with cameras and
other devices.
2.
The system shall support an unlimited number of recording servers. One or more recording
servers shall be used in a system, depending on the number of cameras or the configuration
of the physical system.
3.
The recording server shall support the use of pre- and post-recording on motion/event
recording. Number of seconds for pre- and post-recording time periods shall be
independently configurable.
4.
Each recording server shall have a default storage area – one or several folders - where the
database content, primarily recordings from the connected cameras, shall be stored.
Recordings from each connected cameras shall be stored in individual camera databases.
The system shall allocate an unlimited amount of storage for each connected device.
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
TMP No. A03212.01
282300 - 4
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
H.
An administrator shall be able to enable archiving on a per camera basis and define the
archiving drive for each camera.
The recording server shall be able to use high performance iSCSI, SCSI, SAS, or SSD disk
drives for recent recordings and use lower cost SATA drives for the RAID arrays for archived
recordings. Use of online archiving shall ensure that data always is readily available. Viewing
video from either the recent storage or the archive storage shall be transparent to the
operator.
The archiving shall happen transparently and shall enable operators of viewing client to
access archive recordings without the need to restore the archived video to a local hard
drive.
System administrators shall be able to define storage areas for the specific camera
databases and define new storage areas on the recording server, or on a connected network
drive. The system shall support repair or archive of recordings in the event a connected
network drive will become unavailable, so that no recordings will be lost.
The surveillance system server shall save local databases a defined number of days or
hours. The database retention settings must regulate how long recordings shall remain in a
camera’s database before the recordings are archived.
The surveillance system server shall support archiving (an automatic transfer) of recordings
from a camera’s default database to another location on a time-schedule, without the need
for user action, or initiation of the archiving process. Archiving shall support that the duration
of the camera’s recordings can exceed the camera’s default database capacity. Archives
shall be located on either the recording server computer or on a connected network drive. If
the storage area on a network drive becomes unavailable for recording, the system shall be
able to trigger actions such as automatic e-mails to defined personnel.
The system shall support efficient creation and management of the recording server’s
archives.
The recording server(s) shall have the ability to support multiple Network Interface Cards
(NICs) and be able to support connection to the cameras, DVRs and encoder devices on a
network separate from the viewing client.
Bandwidth management
The recording server shall offer the following options for managing bandwidth utilization
(camera device dependent):
a. CODEC selection; MJPEG, MPEG-4, MxPEG, or H.264.
b. Resolution.
c. Frame rate.
d. Compression.
e. Bandwidth setting.
f.
Fixed or variable bit rate setting.
From the viewing client, operators shall have the possibility to have video images continually
streamed or only updated on motion to conserve bandwidth between the viewing client and
the recording server.
Management application
1.
The management application shall provide a feature rich and intuitive interface for initial
configuration and day to day administration of the system.
2.
The management application shall incorporate adaptable application behavior features
whereby novice users shall be guided while expert operators shall be able to optimize the
application for efficient use.
3.
The management application shall provide configuration of the system through both predefined wizards as well as directly through a tree-style advanced configuration method.
4.
The management application shall support addition of cameras, video encoders, digital video
recorders, microphones, speakers, and other hardware devices to the system, through an
automated wizard.
5.
Privacy mask
a. The management application shall allow an administrator to define privacy masks,
where areas of a camera image can be blocked from a view in the viewing client and/or
web viewing client as well as in any exported video material.
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
TMP No. A03212.01
282300 - 5
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
The privacy mask shall be indicated through a black blurring hiding the selected area(s)
in the view in live, playback and setup mode in the viewing client and the web viewing
client.
It shall not be possible to switch off the privacy masking from the viewing client and/or
the web viewing client.
In certain cases where original images are needed, without any privacy mask attached,
it shall be possible for the administrator to switch off the privacy mask. This shall only be
done from the management application, and only by personnel with rights to perform this
action. When the privacy mask is disabled, the hidden areas of the image shall then be
visible in the viewing client and/or the web viewing client.
The management application shall allow the setting of a different privacy mask for each
activated stream from the camera.
The privacy masking function shall be capable of covering the same percentage of an
image when changing resolution. If, for example, the privacy masking covers a 640×480
pixels image and the resolution is later changed to, for example, 1024×768, the privacy
masking shall cover the same area of the image with the new resolution.
I.
Drive selection
1.
The wizard shall enable system administrators to specify on which system drives recordings
from cameras shall be stored. The system shall support separate drives or paths for
recorded and archived video.
2.
The system shall support both local and network drives/paths.
3.
The wizard shall enable system administrators to select the purpose of each of the drives
configured within the system. These purposes shall be as follows:
4.
Not in use: the selected drive shall not be used.
5.
Recording: the drive shall be used for recording of video directly from cameras to the system
database. This option shall only be available for local drives on the system server.
6.
Archiving: the drive shall be used for transfer of recorded video to archive. This drive shall
either be on the system server or on a network.
7.
Recording and archiving: the drive shall be used for storage of both video recorded to the
system server database as well as for archived video. This option shall only be available for
local drives on the system server.
8.
The wizard shall enable system administrators to specify the path on the drive in which
recorded or archived video shall be stored.
9.
The configure video and recording wizard shall display the total size of the selected drive
and the amount of free space on the drive.
10. The system shall provide dynamic path selection for archived video. This feature shall
enable system administrators to configure multiple recording drives, and the system software
to automatically select the most appropriate recording location based in part on the amount
of free space available. This functionality must be transparent to the user of the system. The
operation shall appear to users as if all archived video is stored in a single location.
11. The wizard shall enable system administrators to specify a network drive path in UNC format
for archive video.
12. The configure video and recording wizard shall enable system administrators to specify
when the system shall move recordings from the recorded video database to the archive
locations. The system shall support up to twenty-four (24) archiving times per day, with a
minimum of one hour between each one.
J.
Recording and archiving settings
1.
The configure video and recording wizard shall enable system administrators to select the
recording and archiving paths for each individual camera.
2.
The configure video and recording wizard shall enable system administrators to specify the
total amount of time for which recordings from each camera shall be retained in the recorded
database and the archive as a total.
3.
The configure video and recording wizard shall provide a template whereby changes shall be
made to all cameras in the system at the same time with a maximum of two mouse clicks.
K.
Adjust motion detection wizard
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
TMP No. A03212.01
282300 - 6
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
L.
The adjust motion detection wizard shall enable system administrators to quickly configure
motion detection and excluded regions properties for all cameras within the system.
Exclude regions
The system shall provide a utility whereby motion detection in specific regions, within the
view of each camera, shall be disabled to avoid detection of irrelevant motion, for example
trees swaying in the wind, or cars regularly passing by in the background.
The system shall provide a grid pattern over the view of each camera. Exclude regions shall
be configured by the system administrator by selecting the appropriate grid boxes to exclude
from motion detection. Left clicking on grid boxes shall select exclude motion detection, and
right-clicking on grid boxes shall clear exclude motion detection.
Motion detection
The wizard shall support for configuration of motion detection settings individually for each
camera, or for multiple cameras at once.
It shall be possible decide whether motion detection shall take place on all video or if it shall
only apply to keyframes.
It shall be possible to carry out motion detection on downscaled video in different percentage
of scaling.
The wizard shall provide a sensitivity utility in the form of a slider control. The slider control
shall be able to adjust the sensitivity of the motion detection so that irrelevant background
noise can be filtered out. The video management system software must indicate inside a
video preview whether or not motion shall be detected and shall change as the sensitivity is
adjusted. As an alternative to the slider control, it shall be possible to enter a number
between 0 and 256 to adjust the sensitivity of the motion detection.
The wizard shall incorporate a motion adjustment utility in the form of a slider control. The
slider control shall be able to adjust the threshold level concerning the amount of motion
necessary to indicate to the system that motion has occurred in the scene of the camera.
The system shall provide a motion level bar above the slider control to indicate the threshold
level, at which the motion slider is set. The motion level bar shall change color from green to
red when motion is detected. As an alternative to using the slider, the system software shall
enable system administrators to enter a value between 0 and 10,000 in an associated field.
In order to conserve server processing resources, the system shall support adjustment of the
interval at which the system software shall evaluate motion detection. The interval shall be
applied regardless of the camera frame rate.
It shall be possible to disable motion detection if no motion detection is required.
Configure user access wizard
1.
The configure user access wizard shall provide quick configuration of viewing client software
access to the system server, as well as which operators are able to access the viewing
clients.
2.
The wizard shall provide the following server access settings:
3.
Name of the system server, as it shall appear in clients.
4.
Port number that shall be used for communications between viewing clients and the system
server.
5.
Language/character set that shall be used on the system server.
6.
Allow or deny access to the server from the internet through a firewall or router.
7.
Public IP address or host name that shall be used when the server is available from the
internet.
8.
Port number that shall be used for connection to the server from the internet.
9.
The wizard shall enable system administrators to add users as basic system users, as
Windows users, or as a combination of both:
10. Basic user: the wizard shall incorporate the ability to create user access accounts with basic
user name and password authentication for each individual user, managed and
authenticated solely through the system server.
11. Windows user: system software shall support users imported from a list defined locally on
the server.
12. After completing configuration using the wizard, the system shall indicate which cameras the
operators shall have access to.
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
TMP No. A03212.01
282300 - 7
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
M.
Advanced configuration of the management application
1.
The following items shall be selectable for advanced configuration:
a. Hardware devices
b. Cameras and storage information
c. Events and output
d. Scheduling and archiving
e. Video-sharing functionality
f.
Logs
g. E-mail
h. SMS
i.
Graphical alarm management
j.
Server access
k. Master/slave
l.
Users
m. Services
n. Alarms Management
2.
Advanced configuration for all components within the system shall be accessible through an
easily navigable tree structure. Upon expanding any item within the tree, information related
to that item or category of items shall be displayed in the management application window.
3.
The tree shall provide simple navigation features such as menus of actions that must be
taken by right-clicking on headings within the tree and by double-clicking on items within the
tree.
4.
Hardware devices
a. All information related to hardware devices connected to the system shall be displayed
within the hardware devices heading within the system tree. Upon expanding the
hardware devices heading, all hardware devices connected to the system shall be
displayed. Clicking on any of the hardware devices shall display information relative to
that specific device for viewing or editing.
b. The advanced configuration shall support editing of device-specific properties outside of
the wizards. The following properties shall as a minimum be editable:
1) IP address
2) Video channel enabling/disabling.
3) Hardware device name.
4) HTTP or FTP port.
5) Device user name/password.
6) Hardware type.
7) Serial number (MAC address).
8) Camera pan/tilt/zoom enabling.
9) COM ports or port address for control of camera pan, tilt and zoom function.
10) Enabling of 360° degree lens camera.
c. The advanced configuration tree shall incorporate a replace hardware device wizard to
simplify the procedure for replacing any existing hardware device.
1) The wizard shall automate editing of the following fields:
a)
Hardware device address.
b)
Hardware device port.
c)
User name/password.
d)
Device driver.
2) Camera and database action:
a)
The replace hardware device wizard shall automate the
process of updating the database and inheriting camera
properties for each channel on the device.
b)
System administrators shall have the option of the
device inheriting the existing database for the device,
deleting the existing database or leaving the existing
database.
5.
The advanced configuration tree shall support configuration of dedicated input/output (I/O)
devices within the system. Inputs on these devices shall be able to initiate events within the
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
TMP No. A03212.01
282300 - 8
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
6.
7.
system, and system events shall be able to activate outputs for control of external systems
or components.
Cameras and storage information
a. Video, recording and shared settings for all cameras shall be editable within the
advanced configuration tree. The advanced configuration tree shall provide both general
and camera-specific methods to configure cameras and storage properties.
b. General
1) General recording and storage properties shall enable system administrators to edit
certain properties for many cameras at one time using templates. In addition to those
elements specified within the configure video and recording wizard, the system shall
support configuration of the following properties:
a)
Configuration of keyboard shortcuts, which shall enable
operators to toggle between viewing video from different
cameras.
b)
Configuration of event-based recording, where the
system administrator shall have the capability to specify
both start and stop events.
c)
Enable manual recording that shall include configuration
of default duration and maximum duration of manual
recording initiated by authorized operators.
d)
Audio selection associated with specific cameras, shall
include selection of default microphone and default
speaker.
e)
Enable or disable audio recording for all cameras if
supported.
2) Storage information for the system and all drives/paths shall be displayed within the
general recording and storage properties feature.
c. Camera-specific
1) In addition to those properties described within the configure video and recording
wizard, the adjust motion detection wizard, and the general properties above, the
following shall be configurable within the camera-specific properties:
a)
Speedup control so that a camera’s live and/or recording
frame rate speeds up on motion or upon the activation of
specified system events.
(1)
Configuration of device-specific properties
supported by the device’s manufacturer.
b)
Configuration of events associated with the camera and
device in question so that events can be associated with
notifications in the viewing clients.
c)
Configuration of outputs associated with the specific
camera in question.
d. Setup of pan, tilt and zoom preset positions. The system shall support setup of preset
positions on the server, imported from the camera, or stored on the camera.
e. Configuration of pan, tilt and zoom patrolling. Patrolling features that shall be configured
includes the following:
1) Patrolling profiles that determine the sequence of the patrol.
2) Preset positions to use in a patrolling profile.
3) Wait and transition times for a patrolling profile.
4) Pan, tilt and zoom scanning (continuous panning.)
5) Pausing pan, tilt and zoom patrolling.
6) Configuration of pan, tilt and zoom presets on event.
Events and output
a. The advanced configuration tree shall support configuration of events so that they can
automatically trigger actions in the system, including activation of outputs.
b. The system shall provide for configuration of the following:
1) Ports and polling properties shall include:
a)
Alert and generic event port.
b)
SMTP event port.
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
TMP No. A03212.01
282300 - 9
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
8.
c)
FTP event port.
d)
Polling interval.
2) Hardware input events.
3) Manual events, triggered by authorized users.
4) Generic events, shall support integration with third party systems such as access
control and alarm monitoring systems. These events shall have the following
configurable properties:
a)
Event name.
b)
Event port.
c)
Content elements, defining the specific text that
activates the event.
d)
Assembly of content elements, defining the collection of
content elements initiating an event.
e)
Event priority.
f)
Event protocol, which shall support selection of which
type of event protocol, TCP or UDP is monitored.
g)
Event rule type, which shall make it possible to specify
whether the event message expression is an exact
match or match only part of a larger message.
h)
Send e-mail if event occurs.
i)
Attach image from camera.
j)
Send SMS if event occurs.
5) Timer events, which shall occur a specified number of seconds or minutes after the
event under which they are defined has occurred.
6) Hardware output configuration, including the following properties:
a)
Output name.
b)
Port to which output is connected.
c)
Amount of time for which output should be applied.
7) Configuration of hardware output on events so that outputs are activated upon initiation
of specific events.
Scheduling and archiving
a. The advanced configuration tree shall provide configuration of general and cameraspecific properties.
b. General configuration:
1) Advanced configuration of scheduling and archiving shall enable system administrators
to configure schedules to control the following camera properties:
a)
Online/offline.
b)
Speedup.
c)
E-mail notification.
d)
SMS notification.
e)
PTZ patrolling.
2) The following scheduling options must be available for configuration:
a)
Start cameras on client requests: shall enable operators
of viewing clients to force a camera to be online even if it
is outside the camera’s normal online schedule without
triggering recording.
(1)
A start manual recording feature shall be
available for operators given the rights to turn on
recording.
b)
Default schedule profile for new cameras.
c)
Maximum delay between reconnect attempts.
3) The following archiving properties shall be configurable:
a)
Archiving time.
b)
Send e-mail on archive failure.
c)
Send SMS on archive failure.
c. Camera-specific configuration:
1) The system shall provide a calendar function in which periods of minimum 5 minutes
can be defined.
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
TMP No. A03212.01
282300 - 10
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
2)
3)
Clicking and dragging on any day within the week, shall select the time period and
enable it for the appropriate schedule.
Schedules for the following must be available:
a)
Online period.
b)
Speedup.
c)
E-mail notification.
d)
SMS notification.
e)
PTZ patrolling.
N.
The system shall support configuration and use of video-sharing functionality. The video-sharing
functionality shall be available for configuration in the management application which shall include
a configuration tab and event tab:
1.
Configuration tab shall provide status and shall support configuration of individual computer
displays to be used as video-sharing recipients. The tab shall provide the following options:
a. A status window that shall list all video-sharing recipients in the system. The status
window shall show the following properties for each video-sharing recipient in the
system:
1) User-defined name.
2) IP address.
3) IP port number.
4) Password.
5) Enable/disable status for shared video to be displayed in viewing clients defined as
video-sharing recipients.
b. A user interface to add, clear, and update video-sharing functionality settings.
2.
An event tab shall support configuration of live video to be presented by video-sharing
recipients upon selected predefined events.
a. The event tab shall make it easy to select events that trigger sharing of live video
viewing on the video-sharing recipients.
b. The event tab configuration menu shall provide an easy to use interface to select which
video feed/device that shall be displayed on the video-sharing recipient when a specific
event happens.
O.
Logs
1.
The system shall generate the following log files:
a. Management application.
b. Recording server service.
c. Image server service.
d. Image import service.
e. Event.
f.
Audit
g. Standalone viewing client export.
2.
An advanced configuration tree shall enable system administrators to specify where the log
files are saved.
3.
The system shall provide possibility for log integrity check, minimum once each 24 hours.
P.
The system shall support e-mail messaging with the following options:
1.
Possibility to enable/disable e-mail while the recording server is running.
2.
Possibility to enable/disable e-mail from within the viewing client. This feature shall allow or
restrict operators’ access to send evidence files as an e-mail attachment.
3.
Setup e-mail account information:
a. Recipients.
b. Sender e-mail address.
c. Outgoing SMTP (Simple Mail Transport Protocol) server name.
d. Enable/disable e-mail server login.
1) Username.
2) Password.
e. Subject text.
f.
Message text.
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
TMP No. A03212.01
282300 - 11
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
g.
h.
i.
Enable/disable the attachment of an image in the e-mail.
Minimum time between e-mail transmissions.
Send a test e-mail using the current settings.
Q.
The system shall support SMS messaging with the following options:
1.
Possibility to enable/disable SMS messaging.
2.
Set the GSM modem communication port.
3.
Set the SIM card PIN code.
4.
Set the SIM card PUK code.
5.
Set the SMS central phone number.
6.
Set the recipient phone number.
7.
Set a default message.
8.
Set the minimum time between SMS message transmissions.
9.
Send a test SMS message using the current settings.
R.
Graphical alarm management
1.
For further information concerning graphical alarm management, see the 2.18 GRAPHICAL
ALARM MANAGEMENT SOLUTION section.
S.
Server access
1.
An advanced configuration tree shall provide configuration of the following properties:
a. Server name.
b. Local port.
c. Enable/disable internet access.
d. Maximum number of clients.
2.
The system shall enable system administrators to specify IP address ranges that the system
shall be able to recognize as coming from the local network.
3.
The system server shall be able to support multiple language/character sets.
T.
Master/slave
1.
The system shall support any server to function as a master server. Each master server
shall be able to be assigned a series of slave servers in the management application. When
selecting a master server from the viewing clients, it shall be possible to view and manage
all cameras/devices connected to each master, plus all cameras/devices assigned to each
slave.
U.
Users
1.
The advanced configuration tree shall support configuration of the following properties in
addition to those specified in the configure user access wizard:
a. General access settings where system administrators shall have the ability to grant or
restrict access to the following system functions:
1) Live view.
2) Playback.
3) Setup.
4) Create/edit shared views.
5) Create/edit private views.
6) Camera access settings
7) System administrators shall be able to grant or deny access to each camera in the
system.
8) The system administrator shall be able to grant or restrict the following access rights
parameters:
a)
PTZ control.
b)
PTZ preset positions.
c)
Output.
d)
Events.
e)
Incoming audio.
f)
Outgoing audio.
g)
Manual recording.
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
TMP No. A03212.01
282300 - 12
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
2.
h)
AVI/MJPEG export.
i)
Database export.
j)
Sequences.
k)
Fast search feature.
l)
Recorded audio.
The system shall support configuration of user groups to simplify management of multiple
user accounts with similar properties.
V.
An advanced configuration tree shall provide the ability to monitor, start, stop and restart system
services.
W.
Alarms
1.
The alarms feature shall use functionality handled by the event server. It shall provide
central overview, control and scalability of alarms in any number of installations of the video
management system software in an organization.
2.
It shall be possible to define the following general settings for alarms:
a. The number of days for which to keep closed alarms (alarms closed, ignored or
rejected). There shall be a default value that shall indicate the number of days to keep
the alarms, which by default shall be 1. It shall be possible to define from 1 to 99,999
days. The value 0 shall indicate that alarms are to be kept indefinitely.
b. The number of days to keep all other alarms (alarms not closed, ignored or rejected).
There shall be a default value that shall indicate the number of days to keep the alarms,
which by default shall be 30 days. It shall be possible to define from 1 to 99,999 days.
The value 0 shall indicate that alarms are to be kept indefinitely.
c. The number of days to keep alarm logs for. There shall be a default value that shall
indicate the days to keep the alarms, which by default shall be 30 days. It shall be
possible to define from 1 to 99,999 days. The value 0 shall indicate that alarms are to be
kept indefinitely.
d. To save a separate log of server communication in addition to the regular log.
3.
The alarms feature shall include an alarms configuration that shall allow for:
a. Enabling of the individual alarms.
b. Naming the alarm. The name shall appear whenever the alarm is listed.
c. Typing in an optional description text, for example a description of the procedure to
undertake in the event of an alarm being triggered.
d. Specifying a triggering event. This shall let operators select the event which should be in
use when the alarm is triggered. The list shall include both system-related events and
plug-ins.
e. Selecting the camera or other device, including plug-in defined sources, from which the
event should originate in order to trigger the alarm.
f.
Choosing which type of triggering function should be active. An alarm activation option
shall allow the operator to choose between two different ways of alarm activation:
1) Time profile-based: the operator shall be able to define periods of time when the alarm
should be enabled for triggering.
2) Event-based: the operator shall be able to select which events should start and stop the
alarm. It shall be possible to select the following type of events:
a)
Hardware-events defined on cameras.
b)
Video servers and in- and output.
c)
Global/manual event definitions.
g. Selecting cameras to be included in the alarm definition even if they are not themselves
triggering the alarm, for example if you have selected an external event message (for
example a door being opened) as the source of the alarm.
h. Selecting a priority for the alarm. It shall be possible to choose between high, medium or
low.
i.
Defining an event to be triggered by the alarm in the viewing client.
j.
Selecting if the alarm should be closed automatically upon a particular event.
X.
Software development kit (SDK)
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
TMP No. A03212.01
282300 - 13
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
1.
Y.
The video management system shall support a software development kit (SDK) that shall
allow for integrating the video management system with third-party applications, for example
access control, video analytics, etc.
Viewing Client
1.
The viewing client shall enable operators to connect to the image server for initial
authorization. Upon authorization the viewing client shall be able to connect to the recording
server(s), for access to video recordings.
2.
The viewing client shall provide operators (remote users) with a comprehensive suite of
features, including:
a. It shall be possible to view live video from cameras on the surveillance system.
b. It shall be possible to playback recordings from cameras on the surveillance system,
with a selection of advanced navigation controls, including an intuitive timeline browser.
c. It shall be possible to create and switch between an unlimited number of views, each
able to display video from up to 100 cameras from multiple servers at a time. The
system shall make it possible to create views that are only accessible to the operator or
to groups of operators.
d. It shall be possible to create special views for widescreen monitors.
e. It shall be possible to use multiple screens as well as floating windows for displaying
multiple views simultaneously.
f.
It shall be possible to quickly replace one or more of a view’s cameras with other
cameras.
g. It shall be possible to view images from several cameras in sequence in a single camera
position in a designated carousel position.
h. It shall be possible to view video from selected cameras in greater magnification and/or
higher quality in a special view position.
i.
It shall be possible to receive and send video through a video-sharing functionality or
application including live video upon event.
j.
It shall be possible to include HTML pages and static images (for example, maps, or
photos) in views.
k. It shall be possible to control PTZ cameras.
l.
It shall be possible to use digital zoom on live as well as recorded video.
m. It shall be possible to activate manually triggered events.
n. It shall be possible to activate external outputs (e. g. lights and sirens).
o. It shall be possible to use sound notifications for attracting operators’ attention to
detected motion.
p. It shall be possible to get quick overview of sequences with detected motion.
q. A sequence explorer function shall list thumbnail images representing recorded
sequences from an individual camera, all cameras or a subset of cameras in a view.
r.
It shall be possible to get quick overview of alarms or events.
s. It shall be possible to quickly search for motion in selected areas of a video recording.
t.
It shall be possible to skip gaps (periods with no recordings) during playback of
recordings.
u. It shall be possible to configure and use several different joysticks.
v. It shall be possible to print images, with optional comments.
w. It shall be possible to copy images for subsequent pasting into word processors, e-mail,
etc.
x. It shall be possible to export recording (for example, for use as evidence) in AVI, JPEG
and database formats.
y. It shall be possible to use pre-configured as well as customizable keyboard shortcuts to
speed up common actions.
z. It shall be possible to select between language versions of the client, independent of
language used on main surveillance system.
aa. It shall be possible to communicate with remote audio devices, including microphones
and speakers via a local microphone and speaker.
bb. It shall be possible to use assigned keyboard shortcuts or joystick buttons to wash and
wipe cameras with wash and wipe functionality.
cc. It shall be possible to navigate images from 360-degree panoramic fisheye cameras.
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
TMP No. A03212.01
282300 - 14
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
From the viewing client it shall be possible to adjust the display parameters for the video
images (meaning down speed the frames per second, or down sample the resolution) from
the recording server to optimize bandwidth utilization.
The viewing client shall support the use of standard PTZ controllers, or three-axis USB
joysticks for the control of pan, tilt, zoom and auxiliary camera functions.
For efficient review of recorded video the viewing client shall support the use of multimedia
control devices that are capable of emulating keystrokes.
The viewing client shall support the use of keyboard shortcuts for control of standard
features.
The operator shall be able to use digital zoom where the zooming is performed in the image
only. This functionality shall be default for fixed cameras.
The viewing client shall include a context-sensitive help system that shall cover the full
viewing client functionality so that operators can instantly get help on a certain topic.
The viewing client graphical user interface (GUI) shall provide live, playback and setup tabs
for the convenient access of live and recorded video as well as camera properties and
display quality.
The viewing client shall enable the operator to trigger manual events, control outputs, select
audio inputs, and control PTZ cameras. The viewing client shall support the following
multiple viewing options:
It shall be possible to duplicate a selected view as a new floating window and that the
window can be moved to other connected monitors by dragging the window.
It shall be possible to send views to a primary monitor (a full-screen view on a PC’s main
monitor), or secondary monitor (a full-screen view on another monitor).
It shall be possible to create views consisting of up to 100 cameras each.
A carousel feature shall support sequencing display of video from several cameras in a view
position. Multiple carousels must be defined to allow all view windows to display sequences
of cameras. An operator shall have the ability to select the default display time, or to enter a
custom display time for each camera in the carousel. Operators shall have the option to
manually switch to the next or previous camera in the carousel camera list, as well as
pausing at the current camera. When switching from one camera to the next the transition
shall happen completely smooth and without any delay.
A feature for viewing enlarged and/or high quality camera video in a view position shall be
supported. This special view position feature shall display the camera in the special view
position to be viewed in a higher image quality or frame rate than that of the other positions
in the view. This feature shall minimize bandwidth utilization by only pulling selected higher
quality/higher frame rate of selected images from the recording server. The special view
position in the view shall be identified by an orange border.
It shall be possible to include cameras on demand or by external events in a view based on
the settings regarding video-sharing.
Operators shall be able to assign outputs, PTZ presets, events, and change of views as
actions connected to joystick buttons and/or keyboard shortcuts. The actions shall be
arranged in categories to optimize overview and ease of use.
An HTML page feature shall support several navigation functions within the viewing client
including:
a. It shall be possible to open and use webpages in viewing client views.
b. It shall be possible to switch between views by clicking on a text description of the view
in the HTML page. For example; “Go to Shared Group 1 View 1”.
c. It shall be possible to switch between different views by clicking on an interactive map
area. For example; a site or building floor plan with interactive colored zones inserted as
a HTML page shall enable the operator to switch views to a camera displaying images of
the selected part of the site or building.
d. It shall be possible to use HTML scripting to create buttons for view navigation.
The viewing client shall enable operators to select events and manually trigger the selected
event. The event window shall list all events grouped by server and camera/device that the
event is associated with.
The viewing client shall support different actions to be taken with a specific camera by rightclicking on the camera’s live video. Actions for a specific camera:
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
TMP No. A03212.01
282300 - 15
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
a.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
It shall be possible to start/stop recording for a predefined number of minutes. This
action shall force the system to record, or to stop recording live video, regardless of the
settings. The predefined period to start/stop recording shall be configurable by
administrators.
b. It shall be possible to copy a current live image from the camera to the PC clipboard.
c. It shall be possible to present a menu of available cameras and from this menu shall the
operator be able to select a different camera for the given live view position.
d. It shall be possible to toggle sound notifications between mute and restore upon an
event or detected motion.
e. It shall be possible to select a PTZ preset from a list of presets assigned to the specific
camera.
f.
It shall be possible to manually trigger video-sharing of the live video feed to a videosharing recipient.
g. It shall be possible to send the camera’s live video to a specific position.
An output control in the viewing client that shall enable the operator to manually activate an
external output port on a device. All selectable outputs shall be listed by the server and the
camera/device that the output is attached to.
The viewing client shall enable operators to control PTZ cameras within each displayed
view, provided that the operators have been granted the proper access rights by the system
administrator. Depending on camera capabilities/camera model the typical method for
controlling the PTZ functions shall be, as follows: when the mouse cursor is placed inside
the view position with video, the cursor pointer shall automatically change to a crosshair
indicating that the camera has PTZ capabilities. Centering the camera’s field-of-view shall be
accomplished by left-clicking the area of interest within the image. Controlling the zoom
function shall be accomplished by holding down the left mouse button and selecting a
percent zoom from a scale of 0% to 100% or by use of the mouse wheel.
The viewing client shall feature PTZ controls that shall provide directional move buttons and
one home position button.
a. The PTZ control shall provide a digital zoom feature for the operator to digitally zoom in
on the displayed image, without affecting the recording, or the display of the camera’s
video on other viewing client applications.
b. An overview image in the view shall display the normal field-of-view and the digital zoom
area in a highlighted box to provide the operator with spatial awareness.
c. The PTZ control window shall enable the operator to select pre-defined presets for PTZ
cameras and in this way move the selected camera to the preset.
The current camera state shall be displayed on the title bar of each view position, when live
video is being viewed. A camera shall indicate that it is in live mode by a green ‘Live’, in
recording mode by a red ‘REC’ and in stopped mode by a yellow ‘Stopped’.
A live tab shall via the sequence explorer feature list thumbnail images representing
recorded sequences from an individual camera, all cameras or a subset of cameras in a
view. The sequence explorer shall be launched in a floating window.
a. The floating window shall make it possible to change between motion, time and event
thumbnails.
b. The floating window shall have controls for moving the video forward and backwards in
time.
c. When clicking one of the various thumbnails, a preview video of the recorded video shall
be displayed.
A setup tab shall contain a overview window that shall support viewing set-up layouts with
cameras, carrousels, special view positions, HTML pages, static images and the videosharing feature. The setup tab shall also contain a window that enables camera properties to
be set including image quality and frame rate.
A setup tab shall enable creation of camera groups and views to be utilized by the live and
playback tabs. Camera groups and views must be named according to user requirements.
Any combination of the connected cameras shall be displayed in one of the following views.
a. 4 x 3 aspect ratio:
1) 1 x 1.
2) 1 + 1.
3) 1 + 1*.
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
TMP No. A03212.01
282300 - 16
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
4) 1 + 2.
5) 1 + 2*.
6) 1 + 1 + 2.
7) 2 x 2.
8) 1 + 1 + 4.
9) 1 + 5.
10) 2 x 3.
11) 1 + 7.
12) 3 x 3.
13) 2 + 8.
14) 1 + 11.
15) 4 x 4.
16) 4 x 6.
17) 5 x 5.
18) 6 x 6.
19) 7 x 7.
20) 8 x 8.
21) 10 x 10.
b. 16 x 9 aspect ratio:
1) 1 x 2.
2) 1 x 3.
3) 1 + 3.
4) 2 + 1 + 2.
5) 2 + 4.
6) 3 x 2.
7) 1 + 1 + 6.
8) 1 + 8.
9) 4 x 3.
10) 6 x 3.
11) 12 x 6.
28. A playback tab shall enable operators to select the views for playback of recorded video.
Views shall be defined in the setup tab.
a. The system shall enable live or playback video for a selected camera to switch to full
image quality when the camera’s view is maximized, unless a ‘keep when maximized’
function is selected and the stored camera settings are not set to full image quality. If the
‘keep when maximized’ function is selected, the defined quality settings for the selected
camera shall be used.
b. The playback tab shall display sequences with motion for the selected camera in a drop
down menu. Each sequence shall be represented by a line with the date, start time and
duration. A drop down preview screen shall enable operators to view the recorded
sequence.
c. The playback tab shall contain a time navigation pane, which shall enable video
sequences for the displayed cameras to be reviewed simultaneously.
1) The window shall provide controls for:
a)
First/last image.
b)
Next/previous sequence.
c)
Next/previous image for selected camera.
d)
Playback forward/reverse.
e)
Playback speed.
f)
Skip gaps during playback.
g)
Search by time/date.
d. The playback tab shall contain an intelligent search feature, which shall allow an area of
interest in an image to be searched for motion in a defined time interval. Search
parameters shall include sensitivity and interval. A grid feature shall enable that only
specific regions of interest are searched.
e. The playback tab shall contain a print feature, which shall enable a surveillance report to
be printed with the image from the selected camera including specific information such
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
TMP No. A03212.01
282300 - 17
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
as camera name, capture time, report print time, operator name and notes (if any). The
surveillance report must be printed to any network connected printer.
f.
The playback tab shall contain an export feature, which shall enable selection of start
and stop times for exporting video from a camera/device source. Possible file formats for
the export shall be AVI, MJPEG, or a native database format.
1) The operator shall be able to select the format for the export. Any codec installed on the
system shall be selectable. In addition to export format, time stamp, frame rate, and
digital zoom export shall be selectable. Video clip must be exported to desktop, or to a
specific file path. The audio input from a microphone connected to a camera/device
associated with the video being exported shall automatically be included in the AVI
export.
2) A native database export function shall support export of up to 16 cameras and shall
provide options for including audio associated with the video, security options including
compressing and/or encrypting exported database and destination options including
desktop, or a specific file path. It shall also include option for a standalone viewing client
to be attached to the exported file.
g. A playback tab shall contain PTZ control features, which shall enable digital zoom in
recorded video. Using the PTZ control pane’s navigation buttons, it shall be possible to
use PTZ in the view from a selected fisheye camera.
The playback tab shall via a sequence explorer feature pane be able to list thumbnail images
representing recorded sequences from an individual camera, all cameras or a subset of
cameras in a view. The sequence explorer shall be launched in a floating window.
a. The floating window shall make it possible to change between motion, time and event
thumbnails.
b. The floating window shall have controls for moving forward and backwards in time.
c. When clicking one of the various thumbnails, a preview video of the recorded video shall
be displayed.
The playback tab shall contain a timeline browser displaying a time line for each camera to
represent recorded video sequences. The sequences shall be color coded to indicate motion
detection sequences. For example, a red band shall indicate that the video is recorded
because of detected motion, or a green band shall indicate that the recorded video is without
motion, or is pre- and post-alarm video. The time line band for the camera selected in the
view shall be highlighted in the display.
The system shall enable operators to program numerical keyboard shortcuts for camera
views. The shortcut number shall be displayed with the view description in the live and
playback tabs. The shortcut shall enable operators to change views with 2 to 3 keyboard
entries.
A setup tab shall contain a pane that shall enable the operator to configure the following
properties:
a. An image quality setting that shall make it possible to select between: full, super high
(for Megapixel cameras), high, medium and low resolution.
b. A keep image quality when maximized setting that, upon maximizing a specific camera
image in a full view window pane, shall allow a user to:
1) Use the selected image quality settings for the specified camera,
2) Use the maximum image quality available from the camera device regardless of the
image quality settings for the device in the system.
c. A frame rate setting that shall make it possible to select between: unlimited, medium and
low frame rate.
d. A maintain image aspect ratio setting that shall enable original image aspect ratio to be
maintained in the display or enable the image to be scaled to fit the display.
e. An update image on motion setting that shall enable bandwidth from the recording
server to be conserved by only updating the image display on motion.
f.
A sound on motion detection setting that shall enable an audible alert to be generated
when motion is detected in the camera image to alert operators.
g. A sound on event setting that shall enable an audible alert to be generated upon an
event to alert operators.
The viewing client application shall be able to run on the following operating system setup:
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
TMP No. A03212.01
282300 - 18
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
a.
Z.
Microsoft Windows 7 Professional/Enterprise/Ultimate and Windows Server 2008. All as
32-bit or 64-bit applications.
Mobile Viewing Client
1.
It shall be possible to access and view cameras and views on a smartphone or a tablet (a
mobile device).
2.
Access to cameras and views on a mobile device shall be established through three
components:
a. A mobile server that shall be able to run as a dedicated server or on a server running a
video management system.
b. A mobile plug-in that shall integrate with the video management system to provide the
necessary configuration for the mobile server to integrate with the relevant video
management system.
c. A mobile client application that shall connect to the cameras and views in the video
management system.
3.
The mobile device shall connect to the same network as the machine running the mobile
server.
4.
Mobile server functionality:
a. The installer for the mobile server shall be available on the website of the video
management system provider.
b. It shall be possible to configure the following elements for the mobile server in the
management application/client:
1) Add a mobile server
2) Edit a mobile server
3) Rename a mobile server
4) Delete a mobile server
5) View server status, which shall include server status field that shall show:
a)
How long the server has been running since the last time
it was stopped
b)
Current CPU usage on the mobile server
c)
Current internal bandwidth in use between the mobile
server and the relevant recording server
d)
Current external bandwidth in use between the mobile
device and the mobile server
e)
User names of mobile client application users connected
to the mobile server
f)
Current relation between the mobile server and the
mobile client application user
g)
Bandwidth usage for a particular mobile client
application user
h)
Number of currently open live video streams for the
relevant mobile client application user
i)
Number of currently open playback video streams for the
relevant mobile client application user
c. It shall be possible to fill in the following properties for the mobile server in the
management application/client:
1) The name of the mobile server
2) Description of the mobile server
3) IP address, which shall be unique for the mobile server
4) Port number (default port 8081)
5) The default time frame for how often the mobile client must indicate to the mobile server
that it is up and running.
6) Login method
a)
Automatic
b)
Windows only
c)
Basic only
7) Enable or disable viewing of an all cameras view.
8) Location of log file
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
TMP No. A03212.01
282300 - 19
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
d.
1)
e.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
f.
g.
1)
h.
i.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
Number of days log files are saved (default value shall be three days)
Default level of CPU usage
Default internal bandwidth usage
Default external bandwidth usage
Default time frame (30 seconds) for checking warning levels
Mobile plug-in functionality:
The installer for the mobile plug-in shall be available on the website of the video
management system provider.
Mobile client application functionality:
It shall be possible to download and install the mobile client application to a mobile
device.
The mobile client application shall be available for free download on Google Play
(former Android Market) or App Store.
The mobile client application shall work with smartphones or tablets with Android 2.2+,
or iOS5+ or newer installed.
The mobile client application shall be able to log into the video management system
through the mobile server functionality.
a)
A correct login to the mobile server functionality shall
enable the distribution of video streams from relevant
recording servers to the mobile client.
b)
It shall not be required to access the internet in order to
establish the setup between the mobile client and the
mobile server functionality.
c)
It shall be possible to add as many mobile servers as
required as long as the user has log-in credentials for
these servers.
d)
The mobile client shall use cameras and views already
set up in the video management system.
(1)
An all-cameras view shall be available for mobile
client users that do not have any views set up in
the management client/application.
The mobile client application shall include the following tabs:
A server tab, displaying the available server and letting users select which server to
connect to.
A views tab, displaying displays and previews of available views.
It shall be possible to choose between live and recorded video streams.
A setting tab, displaying user settings and allowing the user to edit to edit relevant
settings.
Pressing the mobile device’s menu button shall display a context sensitive menu that
shall include the following items, depending on where in the mobile client application the
user is:
Cancel, which shall cancel filter settings on views.
Edit, which shall edit the server settings of the selected server.
Exit, which shall exit full screen
Filter, which shall enable filtering on views.
a)
All views shall be selected by default.
b)
It shall be possible to clear views that are not needed.
Go to time, which shall open a menu that shall let the user select to view at a specific
time in the past.
Help, which shall give access to the mobile client application’s online help.
Home, which shall send the user to the list of views in the views tab.
Live, which shall exit playback mode on a selected camera and enter live mode.
New, which shall add and configure a new server.
Hide/show live picture-in-picture, which shall turn on/off a small picture-in-picture in live
mode.
Playback, which shall switch from live to playback mode on a selected camera in
playback mode.
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
TMP No. A03212.01
282300 - 20
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
12) Playback speed, which shall open a menu with a selection of playback speeds on a
selected camera in playback mode.
13) Presets, which shall open a menu with selection of presets for PTZ-cameras on a
selected cameras.
14) PTZ, which shall enable a number of PTZ icons on the screen which shall allow you to
pan, tilt and zoom in on the current image.
15) Save, which shall save your filtered view(s).
16) Snapshot, which shall take a snapshot of the current frame and save it automatically to
an SD card.
j.
The servers tab shall allow a user to tap a server to connect to this server and to access
the server’s context menu.
k. The context menu for the servers tab shall contain the following settings:
1) Disconnect a server
2) Connect to a server
3) Edit server settings for the server
4) Delete the server from the mobile client application
l.
It shall be possible to fill in the following details in the server context menu:
1) Name, where it shall be possible to enter or edit the name of the server.
2) Address, where it shall be possible to enter or edit the IP address of the computer
where the server is running.
3) Port number, where it shall be possible to edit the port number the mobile client
application uses to communicate with the server. The default port number shall be
8081.
4) Description, where it shall be possible to enter or edit a description for the server.
5) User name, where it shall be possible to enter a user name.
6) Password, where it shall be possible to enter a password.
7) Save credentials, where it shall be possible to save user name and passwords for
future usage.
8) Automatic login, where it shall be possible to select that you want to log in
automatically.
m. The views tab shall list the available views in a surveillance setup, as well as the type of
view (private, shared, cameras), name and number of cameras.
n. The view tab menu shall contain the following settings:
1) Filter
2) Help
3) Filter views, which shall make it possible to remove any views not needed.
4) Open a view in grid view
5) A filter menu, where it shall be possible to select save or cancel
6) The context menu for the views tab shall contain the following settings:
a)
Save
b)
Cancel
o. The settings tab shall allow a user to view and/or edit the following settings:
1) Client version, which shall show the version number of the mobile client application
installed on a smartphone/tablet.
2) Stay awake, which shall show whether sleep mode is disabled during video streaming
or not (both in live and recording mode).
3) Frames per second, which shall set a frames per second value (between 1 and 30) for
transfer of video from the mobile server to the mobile device.
4) Optimize bandwidth, which shall allow a user to reduce the quality of the images sent to
the mobile client to preserve bandwidth.
5) Auto-hide playback controls, which shall hide icons in the playback navigation bar
automatically after a while. Tapping the screen shall make the playback controls
reappear.
6) Auto-hide PTZ controls, which shall hide icons in the playback navigation bar
automatically after a while. Tapping the screen shall make the PTZ controls reappear.
p. Opening a view in grid view shall display all relevant cameras in a grid.
1) All cameras shall contain a red icon that shall indicate motion on the relevant camera
when motion is detected.
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
TMP No. A03212.01
282300 - 21
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
2)
q.
1)
2)
3)
4)
r.
1)
2)
3)
s.
All cameras shall contain a green icon that shall indicate that video is being recorded
every time a new image is received from the camera.
It shall be able to view a camera in full screen mode and adjust the image in the
following ways:
Use PTZ on PTZ cameras
Zoom in and out (digital zoom) by pinching the screen
Switch between image fitting to screen and image cropped by tapping
View a camera in playback mode
Playback mode shall include a navigation bar that shall help users navigate recorded
video. The navigator bar shall include:
Buttons always available:
a)
A time-specification button
b)
A set playback speed button
Buttons available when playback is stopped:
a)
A view previous image button
b)
A forward playback button
c)
A backwards playback button
Buttons available when playback is running:
a)
A pause playback button
b)
A move to the first image in the next sequence-button
c)
A move to the first image in the previous sequencebutton
A default demo server shall be available in the mobile client application for users to test
the mobile client application without having a video management system setup.
AA.
Web Viewing Client
1.
The web viewing client shall offer live viewing of up to 16 cameras and include PTZ control
with joystick and event/output activation. Its playback function shall give operators
concurrent playback of up to 9 recorded videos with date, sequence or time searching.
2.
Support for shared and private server-based views with a layout of up to 4x4 shall be
available. Any of these views shall have the ability to contain a combination of cameras,
images, and HTML page view items.
3.
The web viewing client shall support Basic User Authentication logon using the image server
account database which requires user name and password credentials.
BB.
Standalone Viewing Client
1.
The standalone viewing client shall make it possible to view exported recorded video
database files as well as other exported sources:
a. Audio
b. HTML content
c. Images
d. Analytics sources
2.
The standalone viewing client shall run from an .exe file, and no installation of software shall
be required in order to view exported sources.
3.
The standalone viewing client shall share the interface and functionalities of the viewing
client and shall be able to run new features developed for the viewing client.
4.
The standalone viewing client shall facilitate instant playback of exported material when the
program is executed.
5.
A project functionality for investigation projects shall exist and allow for:
a. Import of multiple exported sources that can be added to an existing project.
b. Offline creation of new projects.
c. Common tampering and password protection for the exported sources.
6.
It shall be possible to export 360° panomorph video recordings for cameras that support this
technology for viewing in the standalone viewing client.
7.
It shall be possible to export video containing privacy masks, and the privacy mask shall
cover the same area as defined in the management application in the standalone viewing
client.
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
TMP No. A03212.01
282300 - 22
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
8.
CC.
2.2
A.
It shall be possible to define a default export path handled by the surveillance system server.
It shall be possible to allow operators to define their own export path in the viewing client by
changing settings in the management application.
Graphical alarm management solution
1.
The graphical alarm management solution shall enable continuous monitoring of the
operational status and event-triggered alarms from servers, cameras and other devices. The
graphical alarm management solution shall provide a real-time overview of alarm status, or
technical problems, while it must enable immediate visual verification and troubleshooting.
2.
The graphical alarm management solution shall provide interface and navigational controls
through the client including:
a. Graphical overview of the operational status and alarms from servers, network cameras
and external devices including motion detectors and access control systems.
3.
The solution shall provide intuitive alarm management through the use of controls including:
a. Detailed listing of all active or incoming alarms with available filters for time period, alarm
source, operator and alarm state.
1) Alarm states must include: new, open, assigned, in progress, processed, resolved,
reject, wait, on-hold, ignore, closed, and auto-closed.
b. Ability to reassign alarms to other operators based on: change of state for one, multiple
or all alarms, change of alarm priority, entering incident-specific log information and the
suppression (snooze function) of alarms.
c. Ability to preview, view live or playback recorded images.
d. Automatically close an alarm based on a corresponding event.
e. Generate audit trail reports by incident.
4.
The solution shall provide operations management controls including the ability to:
a. Enable and disable the monitoring of specific servers.
b. Acknowledge or suppress operational status messages for a period of time (for example
during scheduled maintenance).
5.
The solution shall support system configuration through controls including:
a. Ability to establish connection to servers by DNS name or IP address, and use built-in
accounts in legacy systems for server authentication.
b. Trigger alarms by events from servers, cameras or external devices and pre-assign
them with priority, operator, optional display of live video on remote monitor and link to
related cameras.
c. Supported events like archive failure, camera deleted, external event, motion detected,
camera or server responding or not responding, and running out of disk space.
d. Define role-based groups and assign operators to achieve different access rights by type
or camera.
6.
The solution shall provide interface and navigational controls at the server level including:
a. Client/server based architecture using HTTP and XML for data communication.
b. Support for multiple legacy master/slave servers at multiple remote locations.
c. Central logging of incoming alarms and system information in a SQL database.
7.
The solution architecture shall be .NET based with the server component accessed through
a client application running on Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003 servers.
8.
The solution shall include flexible access rights and shall enable each operator to be
assigned to several roles, where each operator has uniquely defined access rights to
cameras.
9.
The graphical alarm management solution application shall be able to run on the following
operating system setup.
a. Windows 7 Professional or Windows Server 2008.
10. On the client side the graphical alarm management solution application shall be able to run
on the following operating system setup.
a. Windows 7 Professional.
CAMERAS
All cameras shall be recorded at 4 frames per second (FPS), based on 50% motion unless
otherwise noted. Video shall be archived for 30 days. Contractor to provide server/storage
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
TMP No. A03212.01
282300 - 23
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
hardware to support this. The following cameras are acceptable for use in the applications
defined below and referenced in the camera schedule on sheet T9.03:
1.
DOME, OUTDOOR, 180 DEG FOV, DAY/NIGHT, VANDAL RESISTANT, WALL MOUNTED
a. The basis of design for this camera is the Arecont Vision model AV8185DN-HB. VMS
compatible approved equals are acceptable.
b. Required features include:
1) ONVIF compliant
2) 8 megapixel, IP, POE camera
3) Integrated heater and blower.
4) Rated for exterior use.
5) Vandal resistant.
6) 180 degree field of view
7) Day/Night capable with IR cut filter.
8) Motion recording must be compatible with the VMS selected.
c. Note: If Avigilon is the VMS, the Avigilon 180 degree camera may NOT be used for this
application, as it is not a Day/night camera.
2.
DOME, OUTDOOR, FIXED, DAY/NIGHT, VANDAL RESISTANT, WALL MOUNTED
a. The basis of design for this camera is the Axis Communications P3363-VE. VMS
compatible approved equals such as the Avigilon 1.0-H3-DP1 shall be acceptable.
1) SVGA, IP, POE camera
2) Low light sensitivity, equal to the Axis “Lightfinder” feature and specification of basis of
design model.
3) 2.5 – 6mm varifocal lens
4) Day/night capable with IR cut filter
3.
PANORAMIC, INDOOR, 360 DEG FOV, CEILING MOUNTED
a. The basis of design for this camera is the Axis Communications M3007-PV. VMS
compatible approved equals, such as the Mobotix Q25-SEC are acceptable.
1) Minimum 5 megapixel, IP, POE camera.
2) Vandal and dust resistant
3) 360 degree panoramic field of view.
4.
DOME, INDOOR, FIXED, CEILING MOUNTED
a. The basis of design for this camera is the Axis Communications P3363-V. VMS
compatible approved equals, such as the Avigilon 1.3L-H3-D1 shall be acceptable.
1) SVGA, IP, POE camera
2) Low light sensitivity, equal to the Axis “Lightfinder” feature and specification of the basis
of design model.
3)
2.5 – 6mm varifocal lens
5.
DOME, INDOOR, 360 DEG FOV, DAY/NIGHT, CEILING MOUNTED
a. The basis of design for this camera is the Arecont Vision AV8365DN. VMS compatible
approved equals, such as the Avigilon 8.0-HD-DOME-360 shall be acceptable.
1) 8 megapixel, IP, POE camera
2) 360 degree field of view.
2.3
A.
NETWORK EQUIPMENT
Contractor shall install all network components necessary to provide a physically separate (from
the Owner’s primary LAN), turn-key solution for the entire Security System. The components
include but are not be limited to patch cords, patch panels, switches (with SFP’s or GBIC’s),
servers, direct attached storage, encoders and converters. Any network component necessary,
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
TMP No. A03212.01
282300 - 24
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
directly specified, implied or reasonably inferred, to provide a complete functional solution shall
be supplied.
1.
The security system LAN shall connect to the Owner’s LAN at one of the NICs on at least
one access control and one video surveillance security server.
B.
Network switches, both fiber and copper, shall have a minimum of 20% spare capacity, both
physically, and in terms of bandwidth headroom. The contractors engineered solution shall
carefully consider bandwidth limitations of the cable plant, network gear, servers, and client
workstations, and provide sufficient capability for a smoothly functioning system.
1.
The network switches shall be managed, layer 3, class 3 POE switches, rack mounted, and
optimized for video.
2.
They shall feature fiber optic transceiver modules as needed for accommodating the
bandwidth required between switches.
3.
The basis of design is the Dell PowerConnect 3524P.
C.
The network backbone shall be fiber optic based, using fiber provided by the structured cabling
contractor. The switches shall minimally be of equivalent quality of Dell 3524P, with sufficient
fiber optic GB interface cards to support the connections to the fiber backbone.
D.
Provide a 2200VA UPS for each Comm Room (IDF) where CCTV equipment will reside.
E.
The servers will be located in the Server Room. There is sufficient UPS capacity for the servers in
this location therefore a local UPS in not required for this location.
F.
The video surveillance network gear shall all be on generator power circuits.
2.4
CLIENT WORKSTATIONS
A.
Workstations shall be new machines that exceed the manufacturer’s specifications to run the
client software. They shall have powerful video cards to drive 2 monitors. The video cards shall
be chosen in accordance with the VMS manufacturer specifications. The Dell Optiplex family is
the minimally acceptable machine for this application.
B.
Two (2) new 36” LED monitors shall be provided with each workstation. Coordinate with the
Owner and Architect early in the project cycle to confirm mounting or stand requirements.
C.
The contractor shall provide two complete video surveillance workstations for this project.
2.5
SERVERS AND NETWORK STORAGE
A.
The servers and network storage shall be data-center grade, COTS hardware. However the
servers and network storage will be provided to exceed manufacturer requirements for the
specified video recording and archiving.
1.
Acceptable server and storage manufacturer/resellers include:
a. Avigilon
b. Seneca Data
c. Iomnis
2.
Storage and servers shall be configured for RAID 6, have redundant power supplies, and
dual GB NICs.
B.
30% additional storage and recording bandwidth headroom shall be provided in addition to the
base requirements.
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
TMP No. A03212.01
282300 - 25
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
2.6
A.
2.7
A.
CABLING
Cabling shall be provided by the security contractor, but shall be in compliance with the structured
cabling specification, 271500. Camera cable shall be roughed in a similar manner as a wireless
access point:
1.
Horizontal CAT6 cable shall terminate on a jack into a surface mount box, which shall be
mounted to the deck or wall above ceiling nearest the camera. Leave 25’ of secured, coiled
slack for future ease of relocating the camera.
2.
A factory terminated patch cord shall be provided from the jack to the camera.
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE PROTECTION
Exterior mounted cameras, not mounted on the building, shall be provided with a transient
voltage suppression device located between the patch cable and the surface mount box.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
COORDINATION
A.
Intent:
1.
These sections of specifications and drawings form a complete set of documents for the
electrical work of this project. Neither is complete without the other. Any item mentioned in
one shall be as binding as though mentioned in both.
2.
The intent of these specifications and drawings is to form a guide for a complete electrical
installation. Where an item is reasonably necessary for a complete system but not
specifically mentioned, such as pull boxes, fittings, expansion fittings, support hangers, etc.,
provide same without additional cost to Owner.
3.
Electrical layouts indicated on drawings are diagrammatical only. Exact location of outlets to
be governed by project conditions. The Designer reserves the right to make any reasonable
changes (approximately 6 feet) in location of junction boxes, or equipment prior to roughingin of such without additional cost to Owner.
B.
Deviations:
1.
No deviations from specifications and drawings to be made without full knowledge and
consent of Designer.
2.
Should Contractor find during progress of work that conditions make desirable a modification
of the requirements of any particular item, report such item promptly to Designer for his
decision and instructions.
3.
Insofar as it is possible to determine in advance, leave proper chases and openings. Place
all outlets, anchors, sleeves, and supports prior to pouring concrete or installation of
masonry work. Should contractor neglect doing this, any cutting and/or patching required to
be done is at this contractor's expense.
4.
Visit site and be informed of conditions under which work must be performed. No
subsequent allowance will be made because of error or failure to obtain necessary
information to completely estimate and perform work involved.
5.
Designer to be mediating authority in all design related deviations and disputes arising on
the project.
C.
INSTALLATION
1.
Install system per the supplier's guidelines.
2.
Excellent wire/cable management practices shall be used. Wire-ties and adhesive tape are
forbidden. Hook and loop tape, J-hooks (every 5 feet minimum), D-rings, and rack horizontal
and vertical wire management are minimally required.
3.
Early in the project cycle, coordinate with the Owner to understand their specific needs.
Configure the system in accordance with those needs.
D.
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
TMP No. A03212.01
282300 - 26
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
1.
The CCTV supplier shall be responsible for final system hardware hook-up and checkout
prior to commissioning the system to the end-user. The CCTV supplier shall furnish
documentation of commissioning to the Contractor and the Designer.
E.
TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION
1.
The CCTV system provider shall customize a training program to be implemented at the
customer site. Training period shall be 2 working days.
F.
CLOSE OUT DOCUMENTS
1.
The contractor shall provide the following:
2.
Record drawings of the actual installation.
3.
Product data sheets, user manuals, and installation manuals.
4.
Warranty Letter.
5.
Owner acceptance letter.
G.
WARRANTY
1.
The product shall be warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship under
normal use for a period one year from the date of acceptance.
2.
Designer reserves right to accept or reject any part of installation which does not
successfully meet requirements as set out in these specifications.
3.
Contractor shall and hereby does guarantee all work installed under this division shall be
free from defects in workmanship and materials. The above parties further agree that they
will repair and replace any defective material or workmanship which becomes defective
within the terms of this warranty-guarantee..
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
TMP No. A03212.01
282300 - 27
2014-06-19 Addendum #2
9
NUMBER OF SHEET WHERE LOCATED
14
DOOR TAG (REFER TO DOOR SCHEDULE)
15
WALL TYPE TAG
16
17
1
3" 3"
5"
2-1/4" HIGH
THE PARENT COMPANY, INC.
BRENTWOOD, TN
ARCHITECTS DESIGN GROUP, INC.
WINTER PARK, FL
REVISION TAG
1
DEMOLITION KEYNOTE TAG
BUILDING HEIGHT AND AREA
IBC Chapter 5
IC THOMASSON ASSOCIATES, INC.
NASHVILLE, TN
1-1/8" HIGH, TYP.
1-1/2" HIGH, TYP.
1" HIGH,TYP.
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER
STANLEY D. LINDSEY AND ASSOCIATES, LTD.
BRENTWOOD, TN
Notes:
1. Allowable height and area based on IBC Table 503
2. Maximum allowable/design height including modifications.
3. Sprinklered buildings may increase height in Table 503 by 1 story and 6096 mm (20 ft). (IBC 504.2)
1-1/8" HIGH, TYP.
1-1/2" HIGH, TYP.
1" HIGH,TYP.
CIVIL ENGINEER
BARGE CAUTHEN & ASSOCIATES
NASHVILLE, TN
Applicable Definitions (IBC 502)
• Building Height is the distance from the Grade Plane to the average height of the highest roof surface. (IBC 502.1)
1-1/8" HIGH, TYP.
1-1/2" HIGH, TYP.
1" HIGH,TYP.
LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT
HEIBERT + BALL, LAND DESIGN
CONSTRUCTION TYPE
IBC Chapter 6
PAINT WHITE, TYP.
IBC:
1' - 9"
ALIGN TEXT
ELEVATION TAG
Construction Type:
Structural Frame:
Exterior Bearing Walls:
Interior Bearing Walls:
Exterior Non-bearing Walls:
Floor Construction (Including supporting beams and joists):
Roof Construction (Including supporting beams and joists):
ABBREVIATIONS
NOTES:
1. SIGN BACKGROUND
TO BE PAINTED WHITE
2' - 2 1/2"
VICINITY MAP
Type II-B, sprinklered
FIRE RESISTANCE RATED CONSTRUCTION
GRADE
2. ALL TEXT TO BE AN
ARIAL FONT AND
PAINTED BLACK, U.N.O.
EXT
FD
FE
FEC
FFE
FHC
FLR
FRT
FV
GALV
HM
MAX
MFR
MIN
MO
ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE
AMERICAN'S W/ DISABILITIES ACT
ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR
AIR HANDLING UNIT
ALUMINUM
BUILDING
BOTTOM OF
CLEAR FLOOR SPACE
CONTROL JOINT
CEILING
CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT
COLUMN
CONCRETE
CONTINUOUS
DETAIL
DIAMETER
EXHAUST FAN (COORD. W/ MECHANICAL)
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM
EXPANSION JOINT
ELEVATION
EQUAL
ELECTRIC WATER COOLER (COORD. W/
PLUMBING)
EXTERIOR
FLOOR DRAIN (COORD. W/ PLUMBING)
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET
FINISHED FLOOR ELEVATION
FIRE HOSE CABINET (COORD. W/ PLUMBING)
FLOOR
FIRE RETARDANT TREATED
FIELD VERIFY
GALVANIZED
HOLLOW METAL
MAXIMUM
MANUFACTURER
MINIMUM
MASONRY OPENING
MTL
OC
OD
OF/OI
OH
OS
PTD
RD
RWL
SIM
TD
TME
TOS
TYP
UCRF
UNO
VIF
METAL
ON CENTER
OVERFLOW DRAIN (COORD. W/ PLUMBING)
OWNER FURNISHED/OWNER INSTALLED
OPPOSITE HAND
OVERFLOW SCUPPER
PAINTED
ROOF DRAIN
RAIN WATER LEADER (COORD. W/ PLUMBING)
SIMILAR
TRENCH DRAIN (COORD. W/ PLUMBING)
TO MATCH EXISTING
TOP OF STEEL (COORD. W/ STRUCTURAL)
TYPICAL
UNDER COUNTER REFRIGERATOR
UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE
VERIFY IN FIELD
ELEVATION
NOT TO SCALE
4" LONG SPLICE BAR AT PLYWOOD JOINTS.
3" METAL CLIP ANGLE AT 24" O.C. SCREWED
TO POST AND PLYWOOD (TYP.). POSITION
CLIPS AT CENTER OF PANELS AND PANEL
JOINTS
EOC SITE
6" X 6" P.T. WOOD POST. SPLICE WITH 4" X 12"
GALVANIZED STEEL PLATE, SCREW ATTACH ALL SIDES.
8"
8"
2'
4'
-4
-0
"
2'
"
-4
4'
1'
-0
"
PLAN VIEW
1'
-0
-
"
0"
3/4" EXT. GRADE PWD.
NOT TO SCALE
3' - 0"
FINISH WOOD
ROUGH WOOD
RIGID INSULATION
GYPSUM SHEATHING
3' - 0"
4' - 0"
MOCK-UP WALL - PLAN
PLYWOOD
0
1
2
6 FEET
4
SIM
2' - 4"
ACM PANEL PARAPET CAP
10
A350
PRECAST CONC WALL
PRECAST CONC WALL
ASSEMBLY, COORD W/
1/G151
ACM PANEL JOINT
SIM
PRECAST CONC
REVEAL, SEE DETAIL
11/A500
SIM
1
A500
S
8
A500
S
6' - 0"
6' - 0"
CONC WALL, COORD W/
STRUCTURAL; SEE
MECH YARD WALL
ALUM CURTAIN WALL
SYSTEM W/ INSULATED
GLASS; WALL SYSTEM TO
MEET FEMA P-361
REQUIREMENTS
V
SIM
SIM
15
A525
9
A500
CONC REVEAL,
SEE DETAIL
11/A500
EQ
EQ
V
ALUM CURTAIN WALL
SYSTEM W/ INSULATED
GLASS; WALL SYSTEM TO
MEET FEMA P-361
REQUIREMENTS
CONC WALL, COORD W/
STRUCTURAL; SEE
MECH YARD WALL
4
A500
SIM
ALUM COMPOSITE PANEL
EXTERIOR WALL ASSEMBLY,
COORD W/ 2/G151
EQ
EQ
MOCK-UP WALL - FRONT ELEVATION
MOCK-UP WALL - SIDE ELEVATION
0
0
1
2
4
6 FEET
CIVIL
C101
C201
C202
C301
C401
C501
C601
SITE PLAN
GRADING & DRAINAGE PLAN
EROSION PREVENTION & SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN
SITE UTILITIES PLAN
CIVIL DETAILS
AUTOTURN EXHIBIT
STORMWATER MANAGEMENT PLAN
INTERIORS
F110
F120
F210
F220
FIRST FLOOR FINISH PLAN
SECOND FLOOR FINISH PLAN
FIRST FLOOR FLOOR PATTERN PLAN
SECOND FLOOR FLOOR PATTERN PLAN
STRUCTURE
S001
S002
S101
S111
S112
S113
S201
S202
S205
S301
S302
S303
S304
S401
S501
STRUCTURAL NOTES
SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND WIND PRESSURES
FIRST FLOOR/ FOUNDATION PLAN
SECOND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN
ROOF FRAMING PLAN
MECHANICAL YARD, POWERHOUSE AND DETAILS
FOUNDATION SECTIONS AND DETAILS
FOUNDATION SECTIONS AND DETAILS
TYPICAL C.M.U. SECTIONS AND DETAILS
FRAMING SECTIONS AND DETAILS
COLUMN SCHEDULE
BRACED FRAME SECTION AND DETAILS
PRECAST CONC
PANEL JOINT
PRECAST CONC
REVEAL, SEE DETAIL
11/A500
3' - 0"
BATT INSULATION
3' - 2"
3' - 0"
CONCRETE MASONRY
UNIT (CMU)
STEEL
8"
MASONRY - BRICK
2' - 0"
3' - 0"
CONCRETE
GYPSUM BOARD
1
2
4
6 FEET
3' - 0"
LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING
CONCRETE
DRAWING INDEX/PLAN REVIEW DATA/GENERAL INFORMATION
PARTITION TYPES AND DETAILS
PARTITION TYPES AND DETAILS
ASSEMBLY DETAILS
PENETRATION DETAILS
PENETRATION DETAILS
ACCESSIBILITY DETAILS
LIFE SAFETY PLANS
ARCHITECTURAL
A110
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
A120
SECOND FLOOR PLAN
A130
ACCESS FLOORING PLANS & DETAILS
A210
FIRST FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
A220
SECOND FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
A250
CEILING DETAILS
A251
SEISMIC CEILING DETAILS
A300
OVERALL ROOF PLAN & DETAILS
A350
ROOF DETAILS
A400
EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS
A401
EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS
A475
WALL SECTIONS
A476
WALL SECTIONS
A477
WALL SECTIONS
A478
WALL SECTIONS
A500
EXTERIOR SECTION DETAILS
A501
EXTERIOR SECTION DETAILS
A525
PLAN DETAILS
A526
PLAN DETAILS
A575
DOOR TYPES, FRAME TYPES, AND DOOR SCHEDULE
A576
DOOR DETAILS
A600
ENLARGED PLANS
A610
ENLARGED PLANS & ELEVATIONS
A611
ENLARGED ELEVATIONS & DETAILS
A620
ENLARGED PLANS & DETAILS
A650
INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
A651
INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
A700
ENLARGED STAIR PLANS, SECTIONS, AND DETAILS
A701
ENLARGED STAIR PLANS, SECTIONS, AND DETAILS
A750
ENLARGED ELEVATOR PLANS, SECTIONS, AND DETAILS
A800
CASEWORK ELEVATIONS
A801
CASEWORK ELEVATIONS
A802
CASEWORK ELEVATIONS
A850
CASEWORK DETAILS
A851
CASEWORK SECTIONS AND DETAILS
MOCK-UP WALL
1
GENERAL
G100
G150
G151
G160
G170
G171
G175
G300
LANDSCAPE
L100
TREE PRESERVATION PLAN
L200
LANDSCAPE PLAN
3' - 0"
POROUS FILL/GRAVEL
IBC Table 601
IBC Table 601 & 602
IBC Table 601
IBC Table 602
IBC Table 601
IBC Table 601
"
METAL CLIP ANGLE
EARTH
Code Reference
DRAWING INDEX CONT.
COVER SHEET
2 X 4 HORIZONTAL BRACE AT TOP &
BOTTOM OF SIGN AND AT ALL JOINTS.
PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY BRACING FOR
THE JOB SIGN TO REMAIN ON SITE THE
ENTIRE DURATION OF CONSTRUCTION.
MATERIALS LEGEND
Required Rating
Type II-B
0
0
0
0
0
0
DRAWING INDEX
3. ALL PAINT TO HAVE
FLAT FINISH
ACT
ADA
AFF
AHU
ALUM
BLDG
BO
CFS
CJ
CLG
CMU
COL
CONC
CONT
DET
DIA
EF
EIFS
EJ
EL
EQ
EWC
PROPOSED DESIGN
Occupancy Group: B/S-2
2
32'-6"
2
25,454 sf - 1st Floor
28,904 sf - 2nd Floor
54,358 sf - Total
ALLOWABLE (IBC 503)
Occupancy Group: B/S-2
Construction Type
Height-Stories (Note 2)
3
Height-mm (Ft) (Note 2)
55'-0"
Area per Floor-mm2/sf
23,000sf
Height Modifications (Note 3)
4
Area per Floor w/ Modifications (IBC 506.1)
86,250 sf
1-1/8" HIGH, TYP.
1-1/2" HIGH, TYP.
1" HIGH,TYP.
MECHANICAL, PLUMBING & ELECTRICAL ENGINEER
Architecture
Interiors
Planning
Sustainable Design
2012 NFPA 101: Business & Storage
1-1/8" HIGH, TYP.
1-1/2" HIGH, TYP.
1" HIGH,TYP.
ASSOCIATE ARCHITECT
615.377.9773 Office
615.370.4147 Fax
www.TMPartners.com
2012 IBC: Business Group "B" & Low Hazard Storage Group "S2"
1-1/4" HIGH
2" HIGH
1" HIGH
CONSTRUCTION MANAGER
FRANKLIN, TN
1
5210 Maryland Way
Suite 200
Brentwood, TN 37027-5065
BUILDING OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION
1-1/4" HIGH
2" HIGH
1" HIGH
THOMAS,MILLER & PARTNERS,PLLC
VIEW WINDOW TAG
Thomas, Miller & Partners, PLLC
*See "City of Franklin Municipal Code" for local amendments to codes above
BRENTWOOD, TN
3" 2"
VW - 1
FRANKLIN, WILLIAMSON
COUNTY, TENNESSEE
2-1/4" HIGH
2-1/4" HIGH
ARCHITECT / INTERIOR DESIGN
WINDOW TAG
8"
1
TOILET ACCESSORY TAG
2-1/4" HIGH
MECHANICAL
M001
NOTES, LEGENDS & SCHEDULES
M002
SCHEDULES
M003
SCHEDULES
M004
SCHEDULES
M005
SCHEDULES
M006
SCHEDULES
M101
HVAC - FIRST FLOOR PLAN
M102
HVAC - SECOND FLOOR PLAN
M201
PIPING - FIRST FLOOR PLAN
M202
PIPING - SECOND FLOOR PLAN
M301
ENLARGED MECHANICAL PLANS
M302
ENLARGED MECHANCIAL PLANS
M303
ENLARGED MECHANICAL PLANS
M304
M305
M307
M400
M401
M402
M403
M500
M501
M502
M503
M600
M601
M602
M701
M702
M703
ENLARGED GENERATOR ENCLOSURE
ENLARGED SERVER ROOMS
ENLARGED MECHANICAL CHILLER YARD
DETAILS
DETAILS
DETAILS
FIRESTOP DETAILS
CONTROLS
CONTROLS
CONTROLS
CONTROLS
FLOW DIAGRAMS
FLOW DIAGRAMS
FLOW DIAGRAMS
KITCHEN HOOD DETAILS
PLUMBING
P100
P101
P102
P201
P202
P301
P302
P400
P401
P402
P500
P501
P510
P600
P601
P700
P701
P702
UNDERGROUND - FLOOR PLAN
PLUMBING - FIRST FLOOR PLAN
PLUMBING - SECOND FLOOR PLAN
SANITARY - FIRST FLOOR PLAN
SANITARY - SECOND FLOOR PLAN
FIRE PROTECTION - FIRST FLOOR PLAN
FIRE PROTECTION - SECOND FLOOR PLAN
OVERALL SANITARY RISER DIAGRAM
SANITARY RISERS
SANITARY RISER
OVERALL WATER RISER DIAGRAM
WATER RISERS
OVERALL GAS RISER DIAGRAM
PLUMBING - SCHEDULES & DETAILS
PLUMBING - DETAILS
FIRE PROTECTION - DETAILS & NOTES
FIRE PROTECTION - PENETRATION DETAILS
FIRE PROTECTION - SEISMIC DETAILS
ELECTRICAL
E001
E002
E003
E101
E102
E103
E104
E105
E201
E202
E203
E204
E205
E301
E302
E400
E401
E501
E502
E503
E504
E505
E506
E601
E602
E603
E604
ELECTRICAL - LEGEND AND SCHEDULES
ELECTRICAL - SITE PLAN
ELECTRICAL - SITE PHOTOMETRIC
LIGHTING - FIRST FLOOR PLAN
LIGHTING - SECOND FLOOR PLAN
LIGHTING - FIRST FLOOR PHOTOMETRIC
SECOND FLOOR PHOTOMETRIC
PHOTOMETRIC STATISTICS
POWER - FIRST FLOOR PLAN
POWER - SECOND FLOOR PLAN
POWER & LIGHTNING PROTECTION - ROOF PLAN
POWER-HVAC - FIRST FLOOR PLAN
POWER-HVAC - SECOND FLOOR PLAN
FIRE ALARM - FIRST FLOOR PLAN
FIRE ALARM - SECOND FLOOR PLAN
ELECTRICAL - ONE LINE DIAGRAM
ELECTRICAL - ONE LINE UPS
FIRE PENETRATION DETAIL
ELECTRICAL DETAILS
ELECTRICAL DETAILS
LIGHTNING DETAILS
LIGHTNING DETAILS
GROUNDING RISER
PANEL SCHEDULES
PANEL SCHEDULES
PANEL SCHEDULES
PANEL SCHEDULES
TELECOMMUNICATION
T000
TELE - COMMUNICATIONS - LEGEND
T001
TELE - COMMUNICATIONS - SITE PLAN
T101
TELE- COMMUNICATIONS - FIRST FLOOR PLAN
T102
TELE- COMMUNICATIONS - SECOND FLOOR PLAN
T201
COMMUNICATIONS - FIRST FLOOR PLAN
T202
COMMUNICATIONS - SECOND FLOOR PLAN
T301
SECURITY - FIRST FLOOR PLAN
T302
SECURITY - SECOND FLOOR PLAN
T601
PATHWAYS - FIRST FLOOR PLAN
T602
PATHWAYS - SECOND FLOOR PLAN
T701
TELE - COMMUNICATIONS - RISER DIAGRAMS
T801
TELE- COMMUNICATIONS - ELEVATIONS
T802
TELE- COMMUNICATIONS - ELEVATIONS
T901
TELE - COMMUNCATIONS - FACEPLATE CONFIGURATIONS
T902
TELE - COMMUNICATIONS - DETAILS
T903
SECURITY - DETAILS
T904
TELE - COMMUNICATION - DETAILS
T905
TELE -COMMUNICATIONS - PATHWAY DETAILS
T906
ACCESS CONTROL - DETAILS
AUDIO VISUAL
AV100
EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
AV200
DEVICE LOCATIONS
AV201
DEVICE LOCATIONS
AV202
DEVICE LOCATIONS
AV203
DEVICE LOCATIONS
REVISIONS
1
6/19/14
DR. BY
CK. BY
PROJ. NO.
DATE
COUNTY, TENNESSEE
1
PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY
911 & EMERGENCY
OPERATIONS CENTER
911 & EMERGENCY OPERATIONS CENTER
100A
A000
10
11
12
13
INTERIOR ELEVATION NUMBER
3" 2"
0
7"
3" 3" 3" 3" 3"
8
ELEVATION NUMBER
3" 2"
7
3" 2"
2012 International Building Code (IBC) including Appendices D and G
2012 International Mechanical Code
2012 International Plumbing Code
2012 International Fire Code including Appendices B, C and D
2012 International Fuel Gas Code
2009 International Energy Conservation Code
2009 ICC A 117.1 Accessible and Useable Buildings and Facilities
2012 NFPA 101 Life Safety Code (LSC) (for egress requirements only)
2012 International Property Maintenance Code
2011 National Electric Code
2010 NFPA 1221 Standard for the Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Emergency Communications Systems
2008 FEMA P-361 Design and Construction Guidance for Community Safe Rooms
RENDERING
CENTER TEXT
3" 2"
6
2' - 11"
SECTION NUMBER
11"
3
4
5
APPLICABLE CODES
The following list of primary codes are applicable to this building, but is not intended to be all-inclusive of codes and
standards that may apply.
11"
PLAN REVIEW DATA
4' - 0"
8"
0
A000
DETAIL NUMBER
DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS.
THE CONTRACTOR MUST FIELD MEASURE AND VERIFY BUILDING CONDITIONS TO ASSURE THE
DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS CAN BE OBTAINED BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION.
VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS BEFORE ORDERING MATERIALS AND PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK.
THE CONTRACTOR IS SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR DIMENSIONS ON THE SHOP DRAWINGS.
NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT OF ANY VARIATION IN THE DIMENSIONS NOTED FOR VERIFICATION FOR THE
INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT OR OTHERWISE BEFORE CONTINUING WITH THE WORK.
CLEARANCE DIMENSIONS SHALL BE MAINTAINED. ALIGN NEW CONSTRUCTION WITH EXISTING
CONSTRUCTION.
FLOOR PLAN DIMENSIONS ARE FROM FACE OF BOTH CONCRETE AND MASONRY CONSTRUCTION
AND ARE TO CENTERLINE OF STUD PARTITIONS UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
IN THE EVENT DISCREPANCIES ARE FOUND IN THE DRAWINGS, OR IF PROBLEMS ARE ENCOUNTERED
DURING CONSTRUCTION, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT BEFORE CONTINUING
WORK IN QUESTION.
ALL ABANDONED FLOOR OR WALL PENETRATIONS SHALL BE PATCHED AND REPAIRED TO MAINTAIN
FLOOR OR WALL INTEGRITY AND FIRE RATING.
CONCEAL ALL CONDUIT IN WALLS AND ABOVE CEILING. FURR OUT WALLS AS NECESSARY.
MAINTAIN INTEGRITY OF WALL RATINGS.
ALL RATED WALLS ARE CONTINUOUS ABOVE AND BELOW DOORS, WINDOWS AND ACCESS FLOORS.
ALL WOOD BLOCKING SHALL BE FIRE RETARDANT TREATED. ALL WOOD USED IN AREAS WHERE
EXPOSURE TO MOISTURE IS POSSIBLE AND AT EXTERIOR WALLS SHALL BE TREATED TO RESIST
ROT.
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PHASING CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCES WITH THE
OWNER IN ORDER TO FACILITATE THE OWNER'S CONTINUING USE OF THE ADJACENT BUILDING.
THIS SHALL INCLUDE PROVIDING FOR APPROVED TEMPORARY ENTRANCES AND EXITS AND
TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE MEASURES.
THE AREA OF WORK MUST BE SECURE AT THE END OF EACH WORKING DAY. THE CONTRACTOR
WILL TAKE THE NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS AND ERECT TEMPORARY BARRIERS AS NECESSARY.
REFER TO CIVIL, STRUCTURAL, MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS AND ALL OTHER
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND COORDINATION.
*NON-DISCRIMINATION STATEMENT* ALL DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE IN FULL
COMPLIANCE WITH THE AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT (ADA) AND THE JUSTICE DEPARTMENT'S
STANDARD FOR ACCESSIBLE DESIGN (JDSAD), INITIALLY SET FORTH IN 28CFR36, APP .A EFFECTIVE
AT THE DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION.
8"
0
A000
1
2
JOB SIGN
8"
0
A000
GENERAL NOTES
8' - 0"
GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
Addendum #2
RW
JE, LH
A03212
5/23/2014
DRAWING
INDEX/PLAN REVIEW
DATA/GENERAL
INFORMATION
G100
COPYRIGHT © 2014 THOMAS, MILLER & PARTNERS PLLC, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, SCANNING, PRINTING OR DISTRIBUTION IS PROHIBITED.
ELECTRICAL LEGEND
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
CONDUIT CONCEALED IN FLOOR, WALL OR CEILING
CONDUIT CONCEALED BELOW GRADE ON SITE PLAN
CONDUIT EXPOSED ON WALL OR CEILING
HOMERUN CONDUIT, 2 CIRCUIT
CONDUIT TURNING UP
CONDUIT TURNING DOWN
HOMERUN, INDICATES CIRCUIT TO CONNECT DEVICE
UNDERGROUND DUCTBANK, SEE DUCT BANK SYMBOL DETAIL, SHEET E-501
SURFACE MOUNTED WALL LIGHT FIXTURE
SURFACE MOUNTED WALL LIGHT FIXTURE (PROVIDE INTEGRAL 90-MINUTE
BATTERY BACK-UP)
FS
F
FS
L
L
FS
D
DSD
RECESSED CAN LIGHT FIXTURE
RECESSED CAN LIGHT FIXTURE (PROVIDE INTEGRAL 90-MINUTE BATTERY BACK-UP)
SURFACE/SUSPENDED MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE
SURFACE/SUSPENDED MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE (PROVIDE INTEGRAL 90-MINUTE
BATTERY BACK-UP)
FSD
RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURE ON NORMAL BRANCH CIRCUIT
RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURE ON LIFE SAFETY BRANCH CIRCUIT (PROVIDE INTEGRAL 90-MINUTE BATTERY BACK-UP)
GROUND BAR
SDE
SD
L
HD
SD
BD
AS NOTED
FL
S3
S4
SD
S3D
SL
ST
SK
SP
SWP
SWO
M
V
PP
SS
STS
S OC
WL
3
HH
MH
SV
PE
TC
T
WH
J
C
DC
TV
IG
WP
GFI
IG
WP/
GFI
MD
FSD
FACP
FAPC
46"
46"
TWO POLE SWITCH-(IVORY)
THREE-WAY SWITCH-(IVORY)
FOUR WAY SWITCH-(IVORY)
SINGLE POLE DIMMER SWITCH
THREE-WAY DIMMER SWITCH
LOW VOLTAGE SWTICH
THERMAL MOTOR SWITCH-(FBE)
KEY OPERATED SWITCH
SINGLE POLE SWITCH WITH PILOT LIGHT
SINGLE POLE SWITCH, WEATHERPROOF
SINGLE POLE COMBINATION WITH/ OCCUPANCY SENSOR, DUAL TECHNOLOGY TYPE
MOTION DETECTOR, DUAL TECHNOLOGY TYPE
VACANCY SENSOR
POWER PACK FOR MOTION DETECTOR, HUBBEL MODEL NO. UVPP OR APPROVED EQUAL.
DUAL LEVEL SWITCHING
LIGHTING AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH RELAY - LIGHTGUARD COMPANY TYPE 'LIGHTSTAR' OR APPROVED EQUAL.
DUAL LEVEL SWITCHING COMBINATION WITH/OCCUPANCY SENSOR
VISITOR PRESENCE WARNING LIGHT - RED STROBE, FEDERAL SIGNAL LP3M-120V OR APPROVED EQUAL
COMBINATION MOTOR STARTER DISCONNECT
DISCONNECT SWITCH, NON-FUSIBLE
DISCONNECT SWITCH, FUSIBLE
MOTOR CONNECTION WITH APPROXIMATE HORSE-POWER SHOWN
HANDHOLE, QUAZITE TYPE. SIZE AS REQUIRED FOR CONDUIT ENTRANCES.
MANHOLE
SOLENOID VALVE
PHOTO-ELECTRIC SWITCH
ON-OFF TIME CLOCK
TRANSFORMER
WATER HEATER
JUNCTION BOX
PANELBOARD
ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKER
ABOVE COUNTER, 120V DUPLEX RECEPTACLE
ABOVE COUNTER, 120V DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTING
SINGLE RECEPTACLE, AMPERAGE, VOLTAGE, NEMA CONFIGURATION AS REQUIRED BY EQUIP. SUPPLIER OR AS NOTED
120V SINGLE RECEPTACLE FOR CLOCK
DC RECEPTACLE
120V DUPLEX RECEPTACLE
120V DUPLEX RECEPTACLE FOR TV POWER
120V DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, ISOLATED GROUNDING
120V WEATHERPROOF DUPLEX RECEPTACLE
120V DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTING
120V QUADRAPLEX RECEPTACLE
120V QUADRAPLEX RECEPTACLE, ISOLATED GROUNDING
120V FLOOR BOX - REFERENCE DETAIL ON SHEET E500
120V DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTING IN WEATHERPROOF ENCLOSURE W/HINGED COVER.
46"
46"
46"
46"
46"
46"
46"
46"
46"
46"
CEILING
FAA
FR
FAPU
FACC
FAST
E.O.L.
C
M
F
SPEAKER/FLASHING LIGHT COMBINATION
SPEAKER/FLASHING LIGHT COMBINATION
MANUAL PULL STATION
FIRE SPEAKER
FLASHING LIGHT STATION
HORN/FLASHING LIGHT COMBINATION
FIRE SPEAKER
SMOKE DETECTOR
DUCT-SMOKE DETECTOR (DAMPER) OR (EXHAUST)
FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER
SMOKE DAMPER
DUCT-SMOKE DETECTOR INDICATOR LIGHT (WALL MOUNTED 10"BELOW CEILING)
AUTOMATIC HEAT DETECTOR (RATE OF RISE TYPE)
SYSTEM CONNECTED SMOKE DETECTOR
SYSTEM CONNECTED SMOKE DETECTOR FOR FIREMAN'S RECALL
SMOKE DETECTOR BEAM TYPE
SMOKE DOOR HOLDER
TAMPER SWITCH
FLOW SWITCH
CONTROL PANEL
PULL CABINET
REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR
FIRESTAT
CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT
COMMAND CENTER
TRANSPONDER
END OF LINE DEVICE
FIRE ALARM CONTROL MODULE, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE ALARM MONITOR MODULE, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE ALARM CLOSURE-AUDIO SYSTEM CONTROL
FIREMAN'S JACK
MOTOR OPERATED DAMPER-THERMAL MOTOR SWITCH (FBE)
FJ
MOD
46"
2.
2x4 DIRECT/INDIRECT
B2 2x4 ACRYLIC LENSE
C2 2x4 VOLUMETRIC DIRECT/INDIRECT
D1 DIMMABLE LED DOWN LIGHT
D2 COMP FL DOWN LIGHT
D3 LED RETROFIT GIMBAL
LED WET LISTED SHOWER
F
LED DOWN LIGHT
G
H2 2x4 DIRECT/INDIRECT
H3 2x4 DIRECT/INDIRECT
H3D 2x4 DIRECT/INDIRECT DIMMABLE
INDUSTRIAL STRIP
J1
INDUSTRIAL STRIP
J2
LED STRIP LIGHT
K1
LED HIGH BAY
L4
M1 LED CLEARFLEX STRIP
M2 LED CLEARFLEX STRIP
LED WALL LUMINAIRE
N
A
3.
NO BEND OF A CONDUCTOR SHALL FORM A FINAL INCLUDED
ANGLE OF LESS THAN 90 DEGREES NOR SHALL HAVE A RADIUS
OF BEND OF LESS THAN 8".
4.
CONDUCTORS SHALL INTERCONNECT ALL AIR TERMINALS AND
SHALL FORM A TWO WAY PATH FROM EACH AIR TERMINAL
HORIZONTALLY OR DOWNWARD TO CONNECTIONS WITH GROUND
TERMINALS.
5.
48" U.O.N.
48" U.O.N.
18"
84"
48"
18"
84"
18"
18"
18"
18"
18"
FLOOR BOX
18"
ALL LIGHTNING PROTECTION CONDUCTORS SHALL BE
FASTENED NOT MORE THAN 3'-0" MAXIMUM SPACING.
6.
CONNECTIONS TO GROUND ROD OR GROUND LOOP CONDUCTOR
SHALL BE MADE AT A POINT NOT LESS THAN 1'-0" BELOW
GRADE AND 2'-0" AWAY FROM FOUNDATION WALL.
7.
ACTUAL JOBSITE CONDITIONS MAY NECESSITATE SLIGHT
ALTERATIONS IN AIR TERMINAL AND GROUND ROD LOCATIONS.
8.
AIR TERMINALS SHALL BE PLACED AT ALL UNPROTECTED
OUTSIDE CORNERS AND LOCATED INTERMEDIATELY ON 20'-0"
MAXIMUM SPACING AROUND THE ROOF PERIMETER OR RIDGE
AND WITHIN 2'-0" OF OUTSIDE EDGE.
9.
TELEPHONE AND/OR ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE GROUNDS
SHALL BE INTERCONNECTED TO ONE LIGHTNING PROTECTION
GROUND OR WATER PIPE.
2
2
2#12, 1/2"C
200
32
2#3/0, 1#6G,1-1/ 2"C
20
2
2#12, 1#12G, 1/2"C
200
33
3#3/0, 1#6G, 2"C
20
3
3#12,1#12G, 1/2"C
200
34
4#3/0, 1#6G, 2"C
20
4
4#12, 1#12G, 1/2"C
230
35
2#4/0, 1#4G,1-1/ 2"C
30
5
2#10, 1#10G, 3/4"C
230
36
3#4/0, 1#4G, 2"C
5210 Maryland Way
Suite 200
30
6
3#10, 1#10G, 3/4"C
230
37
4#4/0, 1#4G,2-1/2"C
30
7
4#10, 1#10G, 3/4"C
255
38
3#250MCM,1#4G, 2"C
40
8
2#8, 1#10G, 3/4"C
255
39
4#250MCM, 1#4G,2-1/2"C
40
9
3#8, 1#10G, 3/4"C
285
40
3#300MCM, 1#4G,2-1/2"C
40
10
4#8, 1#10G, 3/4"C
285
41
4#300MCM,1#4G,3"C
55
11
2#6, 1#10G, 3/4"C
310
42
3#350MCM,1#3G, 2-1/2"C
55
12
3#6, 1#10G, 3/4"C
310
43
4#350MCM, 1#3G, 3"C
55
13
4#6, 1#10G, 1"C
380
44
3#500MCM, 1#3G, 3"C
70
14
2#4, 1#8G, 1"C
380
45
4#500MCM,1#3G,3-1/2"C
70
15
3#4, 1#8G, 1"C
460
46
2 SETS,EA:4#4/0,1#2G.,2-1/2"C
70
16
4#4, 1#8G, 1-1/4"C
510
47
2 SETS,EA:4#250MCM,1#1G,2-1/2"C
85
17
2#3, 1#8G, 1"C
620
48
2 SETS,EA: 4#350MCM,1#1/0G,3"C
85
18
3#3, 1#8G, 1"C
760
49
2 SETS,EA: 4#500MCM, 1#1/0G,3-1/2"C
85
19
4#3, 1#8G, 1-1/4"C
855
50
3 SETS, EA: 4#300MCM,1#2/0G,3"C
95
20
2#2, 1#8G, 1"C
930
51
3 SETS, EA: 4#350MCM,1#2/0G,3"C
95
21
3#2, 1#8G, 1-1/4"C
1005
52
3 SETS, EA: 4#400MCM,1#3/0G,3"C
95
22
4#2, 1#8G, 1-1/4"C
1140
53
3 SETS,EA:4#500MCM,1#3/0G,3-1/2"C
130
23
2#1, 1#6G, 1-1/4"C
1240
54
4 SETS,EA: 4#350MCM,1#4/0G,3"C
130
24
3#1, 1#6G, 1-1/4"C
1675
55
5 SETS,EA:4#400MCM,1#250MCMG,3"C
130
25
4#1, 1#6G, 1-1/2"C
1900
56
5 SETS,EA:4#500MCM,1#250MCMG,3-1/2"C
150
26
2#1/0, 1#6G, 1-1/4"C
2010
57
6 SETS,EA:4#400MCM,1#350MCMG,3-1/2"C
150
27
3#1/0, 1#6G,1-1/2"C
2280
58
6 SETS,EA:4#500MCM,1#350MCMG,3-1/2"C
150
28
4#1/0, 1#6G, 2"C
2660
59
7 SETS,EA:4#500MCM,1#400MCMG,3-1/2"C
175
29
2#2/0, 1#6G, 1-1/2"C
3040
60
8 SETS, EA:4#500MCM,1#500MCMG,3-1/2"C
175
30
3#2/0, 1#6G,1-1/ 2"C
4180
61
11 SETS,EA:4#500MCM,1#600MCMG,3-1/2"C
175
31
4#2/0, 1#6G, 2"C
CEILING
CEILING
CEILING
AS NOTED
6'-0"
CEILING
CEILING
1.
IN GENERAL, THE ACTUAL BREAKER AMPERAGE SHALL BE EQUAL TO OR NEXT STANDARD SIZE
SMALLER THAN THE MAXIMUM WIRE AMPS. EXCEPTIONS SHALL BE MOTOR AND SPECIAL EQUIPMENT
BREAKERS WHICH SHALL BE SIZED PER N.E.C. AND VENDOR REQUIREMENTS. OMIT GROUND CONDUCTORS
ON SERVICE ENTRANCE FEEDERS (TYPICAL). USE #12 WIRE U.O.N. PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN, CONTRACTOR
SHALL COORDINATE BREAKER AND WIRING WITH ACTUAL REQUIREMENTS OF EQUIPMENT BEING FURNISHED
FOR THIS SPECIFIC PROJECT.
2.
UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ALL 20A., 1P. BREAKERS TO UTILIZE #12 CONDUCTORS. EXCEPT WHERE
BRANCH CIRCUIT IS IN EXCESS OF 90 LINEAR FEET CONDUCTORS TO BE #10 AND OVER 175 FEET
x;LINEAR FEET CONDUCTORS TO BE #8. EQUIPMENT GROUND CONDUCTOR SHALL BE INCREASED TO
MATCH PHASE CONDUCTOR FOR 20A, 1P CIRCUITS UPSIZED FOR VOLTAGE DROP.
3.
COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY. NO ALUMINUM ACCEPTED.
15. BOND ALL METALLIC SERVICE ENTRANCE CONDUIT AND PIPE TO
THE LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM.
16. BOND NEW SYSTEM TO EXISTING SYSTEM WHERE APPLICABLE AND
INDICATED. CONNECT EXISTING MAIN CONDUCTOR TO NEW MAIN
CONDUCTORS WHERE INDICATED. WHEN RELOCATING EXISTING AIR
TERMINALS OR ADDING NEW WHERE INDICATED, BOND TO EXISTING
MAIN CONDUCTORS AS REQUIRED.
18. ADHESIVE ATTACHMENT OF LIGHTNING PROTECTION DEVICES SHALL
BE BY AN ADHESIVE WHICH FUSES WITH THE ROOF STRUCTURE.
ATTACHMENT MUST BE STRUCTURALLY SOUND TO THE POINT
WHERE REMOVAL WOULD CAUSE DESTRUCTION OF THE ROOF
COORDINATE ADHESIVE TYPE WITH FIRESTONE ROOF MATERIAL
TO ENSURE COMPATIBILITY.
CONTACT AMPERE
RATING
I.D.
LC1
30
NO. OF
POLES
6
19. EXISTING MAIN CONDUCTORS, AIR TERMINALS TO BE REUSED IN MOST
LOCATIONS. IF EXISTING EQUIPMENT IS DAMAGED BEYOND REPAIR,
REPLACE TO ENSURE SYSTEM CAN MAINTAIN UL MASTER LABEL
CERTIFICATION. SEE PLAN SHEETS FOR REWORKING OF SYSTEM.
ENCLOSURE
COIL
VOLTAGE
NEMA 1
277
REMARKS
PHOTOCELL ON/ TIME CLOCK OFF
LIGHTNING PROTECTION LEGEND
DISCRIPTION
N
PARAPET AIR TERMINAL
B
EQUIPMENT AIR TERMINAL
C
TOP MOUNT AIR TERMINAL
D
SEE BEND RADIUS DETAIL
E
SEE FLASHING BOND DETAIL
F
F
MAIN CONDUCTOR CABLE SPLICER
1
SECONDARY CABLE SPLICER
2
EXPOSED DOWN LEAD TO LOWER ROOF
G
/
J
THRU ROOF ( ) OR THRU WALL ( )
PENETRATION
CONCEALED DOWN LEAD GROUND ROD
K
CONCEALED DOWN LEAD TO LOWER ROOF
M
SEE EQUIPMENT HOUSING BOND DETAIL
P
SEE PIPE BONDING DETAILS
T
MID ROOF AIR TERMINAL
H
VA
162
56
84
112
56
32
52
11
25
32
56
56
56
28
56
59
241
1.5
1.5
47
ELECTRICAL LIGHTING DEVICE SCHEDULE
BASIS OF DESIGN
MANUFACTURER
MODEL OR SERIES
LITHIONIA LIGHTING
2AV-G-3-54T5HO 54W T5HO(46")-MDR-MVOLT
LITHIONIA LIGHTING
2SP5-G-2-28T5-A12-MVOLT-GEB10PS
LITHIONIA LIGHTING
LITHIONIA LIGHTING
LITHIONIA LIGHTING
2RT5-28T5-MVOLT-GEB10PS
GOTHAM
EVO-30-22-6PR-WD-MVOLT
LITHIONIA LIGHTING
LF6N-2-26DTT-F6B3W-MVOLT
LITHIONIA LIGHTING
5G1-MW-LED-L5LEDT24
LITHIONIA LIGHTING
DOM6LED-900L-35K-277-DL64
GOTHAM
EVO-30-22-6PR-WD-MVOLT
LITHIONIA LIGHTING
2AV-G-2-28T5-MDR-MVOLT-GEB10PS
LITHIONIA LIGHTING
2AV-G-3-28T5-MDR-MVOLT-GEB10PS
LITHIONIA LIGHTING
2AV-G-3-28T5-MDR-MVOLT-ADZT
LITHIONIA LIGHTING
Z-1-28T5-MVOLT-GEB10PS
LITHIONIA LIGHTING
MS5-2-28T5-SBL-MVOLT-GEB10PS
LITHIONIA LIGHTING
VAP-59LED-35-ASY-277-BSL722-WLF
LITHONIA LIGHTING
IBL-24L-WD-SD125-LP750DLC
AMERICAN LIGHTING
CFX2V2-60
AMERICAN LIGHTING
CFX4V2
LITHIONIA LIGHTING
DSXW1LED-20C-700-40K-T2M-MVOLT-DDBXD
2'X4' ACRYLIC LINEAR FLUORESCENT
2'X4' VOLUMETRIC LINEAR FLUORESCENT
6" COMPACT FLUORESCENT DOWNLIGHT
6" COMPACT FLUORESCENT DOWNLIGHT
6" LED GIMBAL LIGHT
6" LED DOWNLIGHT WET LOCATION LISTED
6" LED DOWNLIGHT WET LOCATION LISTED
2'X4' DIRECT/INDIRECT LINEAR FLUORESCENT
4' INDUSTRIAL STRIP
4' INDUSTRIAL STRIP
LED STRIP LIGHT VAPORPROOF
LED HIGHBAY
LED TAPE LIGHT WHITE
LED TAPE LIGHT COLOR
LED WALL PACK
64
LITHONIA LIGHTING
6NAT-G-2-32-152-MVOLT-GEB10IS
NARROW APERTURE TROFFER
35
120
32
108
75
LBL LIGHTING
LBL LIGHTING
MARK ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING
MARK ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING
COOPER LIGHTING
HS265-SC-1A35-MPT
HS206-12-05-FR-SC
DAT-RD-SS-6X4-1-EDE10-277-EMPK
DAT-RD-SS-6X4-2-EDE10-277-EMPK
E1-W-M-2-L40-1-D-UNV-C-48"-T1
ROCKET PENDANT
BATON CHANDELIER
RECESSED 6"X4' LIGHTS
RECESSED 6"X4' LIGHTS
LED SUSPENDED DIRECT/INDIRECT 1'X4'
56
ZUMTOBEL
CSI-2285-4-W-C-U-CD1
FLUORESCENT SUSPENDED DIRECT/INDIRECT 1'X4'
NOTES
S2
FLUORESCENT SUSPENDED DIRECT/INDIRECT 1'X4'
T
STEPLIGHT
1
LED
1
MEDMASTER
MSLR-H-L-IV-T-WLL-277
STEP LIGHT MOUNTED AT 1'-6" ABOVE STEP
UC
UNDERCABINET LED
1
LED
1
LITHONIA
RAZ24
UNDERCABINET LED
V1
WALL SCONCE
1
LED
1
G LIGHTING
GL-6540-12W
WALL SCONCE
V2
WALL SCONCE
1
LBL LIGHTING
PW-674-OY-CF2HE
WALL SCONCE
LITHONIA LIGHTING
SOLO-W-1(2)-RMR
LED EXIT SIGN
1
LED
4
CONSULTING ENGINEERS
2950 KRAFT DRIVE, SUITE 500
NASHVILLE, TN. 37204
PHONE (615) 346-3400
FAX (615) 346-3550
www.icthomasson.com
ICT Project No. 120348.01
LIGHTING CONTACTOR SCHEDULE
CONNECTION TO GROUND LOOP
39
I.C. Thomasson Associates, Inc.
NOTE!
MAIN CONDUCTOR (NEW)
39-T5HO
Architecture
Interiors
Planning
Sustainable Design
WIRE SIZE BASED ON NEC 110-14C WITH 60 C AMPACITY TABLES FOR 20A THRU 100 AMPS
COPPER DOWN LEAD CONDUCTOR TO GROUND
LAMP DATA
QTY TYPE
3 54-T5HO
2
28-T5
3
28-T5
4
28-T5
2
28-T5
1 LED
2
26DTT
1
LED
1
LED
1
LED
2
28-T5
3
28-T5
3
28-T5
1
28-T5
2
28-T5
1
LED
1
LED
1
LED
1
LED
1
LED
2
32-T8
1
MR-16
12
G4
1 32-T5
2 54-T5HO
1
LED
2
28-T5
615.377.9773 Office
615.370.4147 Fax
www.TMPartners.com
CONDUIT SIZE BASED ON THHN/THWN 40% FILL CALCULATION
MAIN CONDUCTOR (EXISTING)
S1
EXIT SIGN
LIGHTING DEVICE SCHEDULE NOTES:
1
DETAIL SYMBOL
ROCKET PENDANT
BATONS CHANDELIER
RECESSED STRIP LIGHTS
RECESSED STRIP LIGHTS
LED SUSPENDED DIRECT/INDIRECT 1'X4'
X
20
14. STRUCTURAL STEEL COLUMNS SHALL BE USED AS DOWN
CONDUCTORS.
10. BOND ALL METALLIC PIPES INCLUDING WATER, FIRE, GAS,
SEWER, STORM, ETC. WHICH ENTER THE STRUCTURE TO THE
NEAREST DOWNLEAD, GROUND ROD OR GROUND LOOP. BOND
AT BOTTOM AND TOP.
P1
R2
DESCRIPTION
17. ALL CATALOG NUMBERS INDICATED ARE THOSE OF ERITECH
LIGHTNING PROTECTION PRODUCTS BY ERICO.
NARROW APERTURE TROFFER
R1
#
13. EACH INDIVIDUAL ITEM OF THE LIGHTNING PROTECTION
SYSTEM LAYOUT HAS NOT BEEN DESIGNATED BY A DETAIL
TYPE. THE ITEMS LABELED TYPICAL ARE TYPICAL FOR SIMILAR
AREAS & CONDITIONS WHICH OCCUR THROUGHOUT THE SYSTEM
ALL MATERIALS ARE TO BE CLASS I.
P
P2
MAX AMPS
12. THE LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM SHALL BE INSTALLED IN
A NEAT AND INCONSPICUOUS MANNER SO THAT ALL COMPONENTS WILL BLEND IN WITH THE APPEARANCE OF THE BUILDING.
METAL BODIES OF INDUCTANCE LOCATED ABOUT THE ROOF
SUCH AS; METAL FLASHINGS, GRAVEL STOPS, ROOF DRAINS,
SOIL PIPE VENTS, INSULATION VENTS, LOUVERS AND DOOR
FRAMES SITUATED WITHIN 6'-0" OF A LIGHTNING CONDUCTOR
OR BONDED METAL BODY SHALL BE INTERCONNECTED TO THE
LIGHTNING CONDUCTOR SYSTEM.
ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR
ABOVE FINISHED GRADE
ABOVE COUNTER
ABOVE CEILING
CEILING
ELECTRICALLY OPERATED
FURNISHED & INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR
FURNISHED BY OTHERS, INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR
GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTING
GROUND
INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM
NORMALLY CLOSED
NORMALLY OPEN
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
WEATHER PROOF, NEMA 3R
TRANSFORMER
EMERGENCY POWER
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
11. BARE COPPER LIGHTNING PROTECTION MATERIALS SHALL NOT
BE INSTALLED ON ALUMINUM ROOF OR SIDING OR OTHER
ALUMINUM SURFACES AND VICE VERSA, ALUMINUM LIGHTNING
PROTECTION MATERIALS SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED ON COPPER
ROOFING OR COPPER SIDING OR OTHER COPPER SURFACES.
THE DESIGN LAYOUT AND INSTALLATION DETAILS SHOWN
HEREON SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF NFPA 780, LPI 175,
AND UNDERWRITERS' LABORATORIES STANDARD 96A FOR MASTER
LABELED LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS, THE ACTUAL MASTER
LABEL WILL BE DELIVERED UPON COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION.
WIRE/BKR
AND 75 C AMPACITY TABLES FOR VALUES > 100 AMPS.
120V CONNECTION TO MOTORIZED DAMPER
120V CONNECTION TO FIRE SMOKE DAMPER
KEY
#
GENERAL INSTALLATION NOTES
ABBREVIATIONS
AFF
AFG
ABV
ABC
CLG
E.O.
FBE
FBO
GFI
GND
IDS
N.C.
N.O.
UON
UPS
WP
XFMR
E
MAX AMPS
CEILING
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
1.
CEILING
80"
46"
WALL
80"
CEILING
WIRE/BKR
COUNTY, TENNESSEE
S2
DH
TS
EXIT LIGHT (PROVIDE INTEGRAL 90-MINUTE BATTERY BACK-UP)
LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE DESIGNATION-SEE LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE
SINGLE POLE SWITCH-(IVORY)
S
CLG
FS
WALL BRACKET FIXTURE CONNECTED TO LIFE SAFETY BRANCH CIRCUIT (PROVIDE INTEGRAL 90-MINUTE BATTERY
BACK-UP)
"5"
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
MOUNTING
HEIGHT
TO CENTERLINE
UON
DESIG.
MOUNTING
HEIGHT
TO CENTERLINE SYMBOL
UON
DESIG.
SYMBOL
CONDUIT AND WIRE DESIGNATION SCHEDULE
1. FIXTURE IN PLANS ON LIFE SAFETY PANEL CIRCUITS TO BE PROVIDED WITH 90-MINUTE INTEGRAL BATTERY. PROVIDE INVERTERS WHERE REQUIRED TO POWER LED FIXTURES WHICH DO NOT HAVE INTERNAL BATTERY CAPABILITY.
2. SEE PLANS FOR 3 LAMP FIXTURES REQUIRING INNER AND OUTER LAMPS SWITCHED SEPARATELY.
NOTE: SEE SHEET E002 FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION DETAILS.
SYMBOLS GENERAL NOTES:
A.
ALL MOUNTING HEIGHTS GIVEN IN THE LEGEND, SCHEDULES, PLANS, AND
DRAWING NOTES ARE TO THE CENTERLINE OF THE DEVICE, UNLESS
OTHERWISE NOTED.
B.
INSTALL ALL SWITCHES AT A CENTERLINE HEIGHT OF 46" A.F.F. UNLESS
OTHERWISE NOTED. WHERE SWITCHES OR RECEPTACLES ARE MOUNTED
ABOVE CASEWORK OR MILLWORK. LOCATE AT A HEIGHT OF 3'-8" MAX.
ABOVE FINISH FLOOR OR 3" ABOVE BACKSPLASH TO CENTERLINE.
C.
WHERE COVERPLATES CONFLICT WITH CASEWORK OR MILLWORK.
SLIGHTLY ADJUST THE MOUNTING HEIGHTS OF THE WIRING DEVICES TO
MAKE THE COVERPLATES CLEAR THE COUNTERTOP OR BACKSPLASH BY
1/2".
D.
ADDITIONAL SYMBOLS MAY BE SHOWN OR DENOTED ON OTHER SHEETS.
E.
ALL SYMBOLS, NOTES, AND ABBREVIATIONS SHOWN ON THE LEGEND ARE
NOT NECESSARILY USED IN THIS SET OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.
F.
NUMERICAL SUBSCRIPT ADJACENT TO DEVICE FIXTURE , EQUIPMENT OR
JUNCTION BOX SYMBOL ON THE DRAWINGS DENOTES THE PANELBOARD
CIRCUIT NUMBER TO WHICH DEVICE, FIXTURE, EQUIPMENT OR WIRING IN
JUNCTION BOX IS CONNECTED.
ELECTRICAL LEGEND AND SCHEDULES
REVISIONS
2
6/19/14
DR. BY
CK. BY
PROJ. NO.
DATE
Addendum #2
SKK
KAJ
120348.01
5/23/14
ELECTRICAL LEGEND AND
SCHEDULES
E001
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
5210 Maryland Way
Suite 200
A8.1
0.5
615.377.9773 Office
615.370.4147 Fax
www.TMPartners.com
A9.2
'F'
Architecture
Interiors
Planning
Sustainable Design
'F'
'F'
'F'
'G'
'D2'
'G'
FD
'J2'
BREAK
'S1'
OUT
110
FD
M
'J2'
'J2'
'B3'
'B3'
'D3'
MECH/
ELEC/
PLUMB
106
'J2'
'B3'
M
PDU-A - 26
6
'S1'
'S1'
'G'
PDU-A - 14
VIA DIMMER PROVIDED BY TYPE
'M1' AND 'M2' MANUFACTURER
'J2'
'J2'
M
LIGHTING ZONE 1
'D2'
'R1'
'R1'
'G'
'R1'
'G'
'R1'
2
'R1'
'R1'
'M1'
'M1'
2
'R1'
'S2'
'J2'
'D2'
'D2'
'R1'
'S2'
CLASSROOM
134
'S2'
'C2'
STAFF
ENTRY
149
'S2'
'S2'
'F'
WO
'C2'
'G'
'G'
'S2'
1
'D2'
'G'
'R1'
'S2'
'F'
'S2'
BULK
STOR.
131 'J2'
'J2'
'D2'
2
2
ELLS1 - 11
'D2'
'D3'
'R1'
7
WOMENS
M
127
'D3'
3
'M1'
'D2'
'R1'
3
'M1'
'S2'
'S2'
FD
'D2'
'G'
2
2
'S1'
2
'J2'
EOC
STOR
123
'J2'
'S1'
'S2'
'D2'
'G'
ELLS1 - 9
A9.2
M
'D2'
'UC'
'J2'
'UC'
'G'
ELLS1 - 10
'V2'
'J2'
MECH
132
'J2'
'C2'
M
'C2'
'G'
2
2
3
FD
M
'G'
PDU-A - 15
'R1'
'G'
2
'V2'
'J2'
2
M
'S1'
BREAK
OUT
'D3' 109
'B3'
EHC1 - 9
VIA DIMMER PROVIDED BY TYPE 'M1' AND 'M2' MANUFACTURER
'G'
'D3'
'J2'
JIC/CIT
INFO
LINE 'G'
122
'G'
VIA DIMMER PROVIDED BY TYPE
'M1' AND 'M2' MANUFACTURER
LIGHTING ZONE 3
'G'
'G'
A8.1
PDU-A - 29
6
'J2'
FD
'B3'
2
EHC1 - 11
'G'
'J2'
'B3'
2
'G'
'G'
'G'
'D3'
'J2'
'M1' 2
D3
'B3'
DD
'B3'
DD
'B3'
2
'D2'
VEND
ING
4
2
'V2'
WO
1
'M1'
SEC STOR
124
2
'M2'
WO
2
'M2'
'N'
'J2'
'G'
'S2'
'S2'
'S2'
'S2'
'C2'
CORR
150
M
PHONE (615) 346-3400
FAX (615) 346-3550
www.icthomasson.com
'G'
FD
TLT
104
ELLS1 - 14
'G'
'V2'
2
3
'R1'
EHLS1 - 6
'T'
'T'
'T'
'T'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
M
'R1'
EHC1 - 13
'C2'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R2'
EHC1 - 8
'G'
'G'
'UC'
'S1'
3D3D
'G'
'G'
'G'
WO
'G'
'G'
'S1'
GIS
113
'D3'
'G'
3D
'G'
'G'
'G'
'S1'
'V1'
'R2'
'V2'
5
'R2'
'G'
STAIR
2
CONF.
M
117
'S1'
'G'
'H3D'
'G'
'G'
'S1'
M
'R2'
'D3'
'H3'
'H3'
'G'
'R2'
'R2'
'R2'
'H3'
M
'H3D'
'UC'
'H3'
'H3'
FIN OFF
138
D
1
'H3'
1
'UC'
'H3'
OC
'H3D'
'C2' M
1
'C2'
'H3'
'H3'
7
'H3'
'G'
M
'P1'
ADMIN/
SEC
141
'H3'
'H3'
'H3'
'C2'
1
'H3'
'H3'
EMA DIR
144
'H3'
UP
'G'
'T'
'T'
'T'
'G'
'N'
'K1'
'T'
'G'
3.2
'F'
B12
B13
'G'
'G'
'G'
'F'
M
'G'
'G' ELC1 - 86
EHLS1 - 12
1
'H3'
PUBLIC
SAFETY
'H3'
DIR
142
'H3'
'H3'
OC
'H3'
'H3'
B4
'J2'
'N'
1
EMS DIR
145
'UC'
LOBBY/
RECEPTION
154
OC
1
'H3'
'F'
'S2'
'G'
'R2'
ELC1 - 65
EHC1 - 12
1
'C2'
OC
FIRE DIR
146
'G'
ELEV
EHC1 - 14
M
'G'
CORR.
148
'G'
'S2'
'P1'
'G'
OC
OFF 'H3'
147
'UC'
'G'
'C2'
1
'D3'
'G'
COPY/
SUPPLY
139
'R2'
'R2'
'G'
'S2'
'G'
'UC'
'P1'
WO
'C2'
OC
'UC'
EHLS1 - 7
'UC'
'S2'
'N'
VESTIBULE
153
'G'
'G'
'D3'
'G'
CLASSROOM
133
'G'
'R2'
'R2'
'R2'
? <unnamed>
'S2'
'N'
'C2'
EHC1 - 13
2
7
'UC'
'H3'
'R2'
'UC'
OC
'H3D'
'D3'
5
'R2'
'R2'
'R2' 'D3'
'H3'
PUBLIC
INFO
137
'H3D'
BREAK
136
CORR
155
'S2'
'J2'
'S2'
ELLS1 - 13
EHLS1 - 14
OC
M
'S2'
7
1
3D
'S2'
EHC1 - 10
'G'
'H3'
OFFICE
119
'B3'
STAIR
1
'V1'
'G'
'C2'
'S2'
'G'
'H3'
1
'R2'
'D3'
'C2'
'G'
'G'
'G'
'G'
'G'
MEDIA/BULK
STOR.
130
ELEV
MECH
135
'J2'
'G'
'F'
'J2'
M
3
COPY
125
'J2'
'J2'
'C2'
4
2.3
'UC'
CORR
151
WO
'S2'
'B3'
7
'C2'
3D
B2
'UC'
COPY
115
'G'
'S1'
3D 3D
7
'H3D'
M
'G'
IT
128
M
'S1'
'G'
'H3D'
5
ELLS1 - 12
'D2'
'C2'
'G'
BREAK
'S1'
1
'R2'
7
'H3D'
M
'G'
'H3D'
B3
'C2'
'H3'
OUT
116
'G'
'G'
'D3'
BREAK
OUT
118 'S1'
'G'
'R2'
'G'
JAN
129
'D2'
3
'G'
'G'
'S2'
'J2'
FD
'G'
'G'
VEST
'G'
'G'
'S1'
'G'
'V1'
'R2'
B1
'G'
'G'
POLICY 'S1'
'G'
'S1'
'R2'
'D3'
'G'
'S1'
'G'
'P2'
'H3'
M
'UC'
3D
'S1'
'H3'
'G'
AMTR
RADIO
114
WO
'G'
'R2'
'G'
'G'
'R1'
1
'G'
EHC1 - 8
'R2'
'R1'
'S2'
WO
'C2'
'V2'
'R1'
2
'G'
'R2'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
MENS
'D2' 126
'V2' 3
1
'R1'
'R1'
'S2'
'D2'
'R1'
M
'G'
BREAK
OUT
M
107
'R2'
'V2'
'R1'
'S2'
'D2'
M
120
1
'R2'
'R1'
'R1'
M
'R1'
'T'
'R2'
'G'
'G'
'R1'
'G'
'D3'
4
'R1'
'D2'
4
'G'
'G'
'G'
'B3'
'R1'
'R1'
'V2'
M
'R1'
'G'
'G'
'C2'
'G'
OC
EHC1 - 23
'R1'
'R1'
'V2'
7
103
'R1'
'R1'
'G'TLT
'H3'
'R1'
EOC/ ICC
112 'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'S1'
'S1'
FD
'R1'
'S1'
'G'
'D3'
M
'G' 7
'B3'
IT SYS
101
'R1'
3
'B3'
'R1'
WO
CORR
157
'B3'
'H3'
'B3'
'R1'
WO
BREAK
'S1'
OUT
108
'C2'
'V2'
M
'R1'
M
'V2'
IT SYS
102
'R1'
'D3'
'B3'
'B3'
'R1'
3
'B3'
'B3'
'G'
DD
COMM/
DATA/
UPS
100
DATA
CENTER
WORK
105
MEDIA
BRIEF
M
121
'G'
'G'
OC
'B3'
3
'B3'
'G'
OC
'B3'
'B3'
DD
'B3'
911 DIR
143
'H3'
'H3'
'H3'
'H3'
B5
'H3'
B6
B7
B8
B10
B11
LIGHTING - FIRST FLOOR PLAN
GENERAL NOTES:
ELECTRICAL NOTES:
A.
1.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2
COORDINATE EXACT LOCATIONS OF LIGHTING FIXTURES OF
MECHANICAL ROOMS WITH MECHANICAL DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT
PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. SEE ARCHITECTURE REFLECTED CEILING PLANS
FOR COORDINATION.
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, 277V 20A/1P BREAKERS SHALL UTILIZE #12
AWG CONDUCTORS. EXCEPTION: WHERE BRANCH CIRCUIT IS IN EXCESS
OF 225 LINEAR FEET, CONDUCTORS SHALL BE #10 AWG AND WHERE
BRANCH CIRCUIT IS IN EXCESS OF 350 LINEAR FEET, CONDUCTOR FOR
20A/1P BRANCH CIRCUITS.
MULTIWIRE BRANCH CIRCUITS SHALL BE INSTALLED PER ARTICLE 210.4
OF THE NEC. EACH MULTIWIRE BRANCH CIRCUIT SHALL BE PROVIDED
WITH A MEANS THAT WILL SIMULTANEOUSLY DISCONNECT ALL
UNGROUNDED CONDUCTORS AT THE POINT WHERE THE BRANCH
CIRCUIT ORIGINATES.
F.
ALL LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL BE SUPPORTED PER SEISMIC
SPECIFICATIONS SEISMIC CATEGORY C.
G.
CEILING MOUNTED MOTION SENSORS LOCATION IS DIAGRAMMATICAL
ONLY, POSITION IN SPACE FOR MAXIMUM COVERAGE PER
MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATION. PROVIDE ALL POWER PACKS
AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT FOR A COMPLETE AND OPERATIONAL
SYSTEM.
WALL LEGEND
8
16
24 FEET
NEW CONSTRUCTION
REFERENCE SHEET A651 FOR MOUNTING HEIGHT AND LENGTH FOR TYPE
'M1' AND 'M2' LED COVE LIGHTING OF VIDEO WALL. PROVIDE OUTLET(S)
DIMMING CONTROLS, AND ALL ACCESSORIES FOR A COMPLETE AND
OPERABLE SYSTEM.
REFER TO THE G150 SERIES SHEETS FOR PARTITION TYPES AND DETAILS
00
1
3.
SEE COVE LIGHT DETAIL PER ARCHITECTURAL SHEETS.
4.
PROVIDE LUTRON LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL OR EQUAL TO MEET
FOLLOWING CRITERIA:
a.
CAPABLEOF BEING OPERATED VIA COMPUTERS LOADED WITH
APPLICATION SOFTWARE OR CONTROL PANELS(5).
b.
PROVIDES CONTROL FOR ALL LIGHTING IN EOC/ICC AND DISPATCH
(2ND FLOOR).
c.
CAPABLE OF 5 PRESET SCENES, COORDINATE WITH OWNER.
d.
CAPABLE OF CONTROLLING INDIVIDUAL ZONES AS INDICATED.
DEVICES INDICATED ON THIS DRAWING ARE DIAGRAMMATICAL ONLY.
CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATIONS FOR
EXACT LOCATIONS OF OUTLETS, SWITCHES, ETC.
MAINTAIN A MINIMUM SEPARATION OF 24" BETWEEN CENTERLINE OF
ALL LIGHT SWITCHES SET INTO OPPOSITE SIDES OF ALL SOUND
ISOLATION WALLS. WHERE ABOVE NOTED CONDITION OCCURS AND
REQUIRES A CONDUIT CONNECTION BETWEEN BOXES, UTILIZE FLEXIBLE
TYPE CONDUIT.
N
PROVIDE SWITCHING CONTROLS FOR INNER AND OUTER LAMPS.
0
2.
5.
TYPE 'R1' AND 'R2' FIXTURES IN CORRIDOR SHALL NOT BE DIMMABLE.
6.
REFERENCE SHEET A651 FOR MOUNTING AND LENGTH FOR TYPE 'M2' LED
BACKLIGHTING OF VIDEO WALL. PROVIDE OUTLET(S) DIMMING CONTROLS
AND ALL ACCESSORIES FOR A COMPLETE AND OPERABLE SYSTEM.
7.
REFERENCE ARCHITECTURAL SHEET FOR MOUNTING HEIGHT AND LENGTH
FOR TYPE 'M1' LED COVE LIGHTING. PROVIDE OUTLET(S) AND ALL
ACCESSORIES FOR A COMPLETE AND OPERABLE SYSTEM.
COUNTY, TENNESSEE
A1
PARTITION TYPE
1A 1B 1C 1D
NON-RATED PARTITION
2A 2B 2C 2X
NON-RATED SOUND PARTITION
3A 3B
5A 5B 5X
6A 6B
11
NON-RATED SMOKE TIGHT PARTITION
1 HOUR FIRE BARRIER
1 HOUR FIRE BARRIER - MASONRY
1 HOUR RATED CHASE WALL
CMU WALL - REFER TO PLAN FOR RATING
AND PARTITION TYPE FOR DETAIL
CONCRETE WALL - REFER TO PLAN FOR RATING
6'-0" HIGH GALVANIZED CHAIN LINK FENCE
REVISIONS
1
6/13/14
2
6/19/14
DR. BY
CK. BY
PROJ. NO.
DATE
N
FIRST FLOOR
KEY PLAN
Addendum #1
Addendum #2
SKK
KAJ
120348.01
5/23/14
LIGHTING - FIRST
FLOOR PLAN
E101
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A8.1
0.5
A9.2
SC
6
'H3D'
'N'
5
5
5
'N'
'N'
'F'
'F'
'J2'
'J2'
'J2'
'J2'
'C2'
'J2'
'J2'
'B3'
FD
SPRINKLER
209'J2'
'J2'
FD
'B3'
FD
'J2'
'J2'
'B3'
TELE
DEMARK
206
'J2'
BUILDING
MAINT/SUPPORT
203
'C2'
'B2'
'B2'
'J2'
'G'
'V2'
'B2'
'B2'
TLT
204
ELC2 - 53
'J2'
WO
'C2'
'B2'
3
'V2'
'R1'
'R2'
'T'
DN
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R2'
'R2'
5
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
CORR
M
'G'
266
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
DISPATCH
213
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'T'
DN
'R1'
'B2'
'R1'
'R1'
'B2'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
RADIO
211
'B2'
'H3'
'H3'
TRAIN
'H3'214
'B2'
STAIR
2
'H3'
'UC'
'R1'
'H3'
'G'
OC
'R2'
'R2'
'V2'
'R2'
CORR
268
'R2'
'D3'
EHC1 - 16
'J2'
B3
OFFICE
274 'H3'
OFFICE
275 'H3'
1
1
'C2'
M
'G'
OC
'C2'
'H3'
OC
1
'H3'TRAIN
COORD'H3'
OC
EMER
1
PLAN
258
259
5
WORK
247
'UC'
SCHOOLS
ESC PLAN
250
'H3'
SHERIFF
ESC
251
'H3'
'H3'
'H3'
'H3'
M
'G'
'R2'
'C2'
DN
'C2'
'G'
B12
'G'
OPEN
TO
BELOW
OD
B13
RD
'G'
ELECTRICAL NOTES:
'G'
'A'
1.
PROVIDE SWITCHING CONTROLS FOR INNER AND OUTER LAMPS.
2.
PROVIDE LUTRON LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL OR EQUAL TO MEET
FOLLOWING CRITERIA:
a.
CAPABLEOF BEING OPERATED VIA COMPUTERS LOADED WITH
APPLICATION SOFTWARE OR CONTROL PANELS(5).
b.
PROVIDES CONTROL FOR ALL LIGHTING IN EOC/ICC AND DISPATCH
(2ND FLOOR).
c.
CAPABLE OF 5 PRESET SCENES, COORDINATE WITH OWNER.
d.
CAPABLE OF CONTROLLING INDIVIDUAL ZONES AS INDICATED.
3.
SEE COVE LIGHT DETAIL PER ARCHITECTURAL SHEETS.
4.
REFERENCE ARCHITECTURAL SHEET FOR MOUNTING HEIGHT AND
LENGTH
FOR TYPE 'M1' LED COVE LIGHTING. PROVIDE OUTLET(S) AND ALL
ACCESSORIES FOR A COMPLETE AND OPERABLE SYSTEM.
5.
MOUNT 6'-0" BELOW TOP OF PARAPET. COORDINATE EXACTMOUNTING
REQUIREMENTS WITH ARCHITECTURAL SHEETS.
6.
REFERENCE SHEET E205 FOR LIGHTING REQUIREMENTS.
'H3'
EHC1 - 21
1
OC
'C2'
OC
1
OC
EMS RESP
COORD
254
OC
1
FIRE-RESCUE
COORD
253
'H3'
'H3'
'H3'
1
'P2'
'G'
'G'
TRAIN/
EXER
SPEC
252
'C2'
1
EHC1 - 17
'C2'
DN
'H3'
OC
M
'H3'
'H3'
'H3'
B5
C1
'H3'
M
'C2'
STAIR
1
'H3'
EHLS1 - 4
'H3'
1
'H3'
B4
'V2'
'G'
'A'
M
1
OC
EMS RESP
COORD
255
CORR
264
'C2'
'A'
'R2'
'H3'
'H3'
OC
PRGM
1
PLAN
MGR
256
'C2'
'C2'
'G'
'G'
ELEV
'H3'
'C2'
1
'C2'
'C2'
'R2'
'D3'
SCHOOLS OC
PRGM
MGR
257
'R2'
'R2'
M
'UC'
'G'
'G'
4
'D3'
ADMIN/
COPY/
'G'
'UC'SEC
SUPPLY 'H3'
'P1' 249
248 WORK
246
WO
CORR
'C2'
262
'G'
'H3'
OFFICE
260
M
'R2'
'H3'
'G' 'P1'
CORR
261
'C2'
OC
'G'
'B3'
'C2'
'G'
'H3'
'G'
'R2'
PHONE (615) 346-3400
FAX (615) 346-3550
www.icthomasson.com
'H3'
'H3'
'B3'
STUDY
238
'G'
'C2'
'G'
'R2'
M
'D3'
236
3.2
ELC1 - 85
'R2'
'G'
'P1'
'G'
'C2'
'G'
'G'
CL
'R2'
OC
OC
'G'
'A'
'UC'
'B3'
'B3'
LAUNDRY
M
'V2'
M
'G'
'G'
OPEN TO
BELOW
'R2'
SIM
'G'
'B3'
'H3'
WO
'H3'
'R2'
'D3'
'V2'
CAFETERIA
244
OC
'C2'
'G'
'C2'
CORR
267
1
'R2'
1
1
'H3'
'H3'
'H3'
2.3
'B3'
OC
'G'
'H3'
SUPER
'H3' 218
'H3'
'H3'
'G'
IT
232
'H3'
'UC'
3
M
FIRST AID
'B3'
237
FD
3
'C2'
'G'
'G'
'B3'
'G'
'V2'
'C2'
'G'
'H3'
OFFICE'H3'
273
LIGHTING
ZONE 8
'G'
'H3'
FILES
220
'H3'
FD
JAN
233
M
M
'H3'
'H3'
STUDY
239
ELLS1 - 15 'G'
M
'H3'
CL
4
'C2'
'R2'
'D3'
'H3'
B2
'H3'
CONF
'H3'
217
'H3'
CORR
263
'B3'
'B3'
'G'
RECEPTION/
COPY
221
'H3'
'H3'
M
'R2'
B1
SHIFT
SUPERS
216
'F'
'F'
'R1'
'H3'
'H3'
'C2'
M
EHLS1 - 10
'H3'
M
'H3'
PANTRY
'B3'
242
'B3'
FD
M
'C2'
'R1'
STUDY
240
'G'
'H3'
'G'
'R2'
SLOPE
DN 1:1
2 MAX
'H3'
OC 1
'C2'
1
'R2'
OC
'F'
WOMENS
230
'G'
'G'
DISH
241
'G'
'B3'
M
1
'P2'
'B2'
'R2'
'R2'
OC 1
'C2'
'F'
'B3'
'R1'
'G'
OC
'B2'
'H3'
M
'N'
'R1'
2
4
'R2'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
FD
'C2'
'R1'
'R1'
2
'T'
'R2'
'R2'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
MENS
231
'G'
'G'
'G'
'B3'
'G'
'G'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'G'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
M
'G'
'C2' 'G'
'B3'
1
M
'V2'
S
LOPE D
'N'
N 1:12
MAX
5
'R1'
'B2'
'R2'
M
'R1'
'R1'
'C2'
'C2'
'G'
'R1'
OC
'G'
TLT
279
'G'
'J2'
'J2'
Architecture
Interiors
Planning
Sustainable Design
'B3'
KITCHEN
243
FD
'J2'
'C2'
EHLS1 - 11
'R1'
'R1'
'G'
'R2'
'R2'
'G'
'J2'
'B3'
'B2'
'G'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'C2'
5
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
CL
'G'
'B3'
'J2'
'B2'
M
FD
'B3'
MECH
234
M
'B2'
'G'
1
'N'
5
TLT
277
'R1'
'G'
'R1'
'R1'
'B2'
TRAIN
280
'B2'
'N'
'H2'
4
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
M
5
'R1'
'G'
3
'G'
DN
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'G'
4
'G'
'N'
LIGHTING
ZONE 5
FD 'B3'
'R1'
'R1'
'R1'
'B2'
'C2'
'G'
M
FD
'J2'
'G'
'G'
M
EXERCISE
229
'B2'
'G'
CONNECT TO ELLS1-10 CIRCUIT
A9.2
REF
'UC'
'UC'
LIGHTING
ZONE 6
'B2'
'C2'
'C2'
'J2'
'G'
'G'
'B2'
'B2'
UP
'C2'
'B2'
'B2'
3
4
'B2'
M
CORR
270
'G'
'G'
3
'B2' CL
'H2'
'UC'
'R1'
'R1'
4
FD
COMM
TECH
REPAIR
201
'R1'
EHLS1 - 8
'J2'
'J2'
'UC'
'B3'
STOR
206A
TLT
205
'G'
'B2'
3
'B2'
'J2'
'J2'
'UC'
WO
EHC1 - 21
'B3'
'R1'
CORR
269
WO
'C2'
DN
'B3'
M
'B3'
A8.1
3
'J2'
'G'
'G'
'G'
4
FD
'J2'
'C2'
'G'
'G'
'G'
'R1'
SERVER/CPU
212
'B3'
FD
'J2'
'B3'
'J2'
FD
2.1
EHLS1 - 9
'B3'
'G'
LIGHTING
ZONE 4
3
'J2'
'J2'
'J2'
'G'
'G'
'J2'
'G'
'B2'
'H2'
MECH/
ELEC
207
FD
'J2'
'J2'
'J2'
2
'G'
'G'
'G'
'J2'
'J2'
'G'
'B2'
BREAK
M
226
M
'C2'
LOADING/
MAINT
'J2'
202
'G'
EHC1 - 15
'J2'
M
'C2'
3.5
'B3'
EHC1 - 19
'J2'
FD
'B3'
'J2'
WO
'F'
'H2'
WO
1
D
LIGHTING
ZONE 7
615.377.9773 Office
615.370.4147 Fax
www.TMPartners.com
'H2'
1
B6
B7
B8
C2
'N'
B10
0.9
MH=18'-0"AFG
'N'
B11
C3
MH=18'-0"AFG
'N'
'N'
LIGHTING - SECOND FLOOR PLAN - PART B
'N'
TYP
1
'F'
0
8
16
N
24 FEET
'L4'
FD
'L4'
GENERAL NOTES:
FD
'J2'
'L4'
M
FD
FD
'J2'
APPARATUS
BAY
200
'L4'
COORDINATE EXACT LOCATIONS OF LIGHTING FIXTURES OF MECHANICAL
ROOMS WITH MECHANICAL DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO
ROUGH-IN.
B.
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, 277V 20A/1P BREAKERS SHALL UTILIZE #12
AWG CONDUCTORS. EXCEPTION: WHERE BRANCH CIRCUIT IS IN EXCESS
OF 225 LINEAR FEET, CONDUCTORS SHALL BE #10 AWG AND WHERE
BRANCH CIRCUIT IS IN EXCESS OF 350 LINEAR FEET, CONDUCTOR FOR
20A/1P BRANCH CIRCUITS.
EHLS1 - 15
LC-1
FD
M
2.1
A.
'N'
'L4'
1
'J2'
'N'
'N'
'N'
'L4'
2
GENERATORS
AND FUEL TANK,
COORD W/ ELEC
'J2'
'N'
2.3
FD
FD
'N'
FUTURE
GENERATOR
'N'
'N'
'N'
00
DEVICES INDICATED ON THIS DRAWING ARE DIAGRAMMATICAL ONLY.
CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATIONS FOR
EXACT LOCATIONS OF OUTLETS, SWITCHES, ETC.
MAINTAIN A MINIMUM SEPARATION OF 24" BETWEEN CENTERLINE OF ALL
LIGHT SWITCHES SET INTO OPPOSITE SIDES OF ALL SOUND ISOLATION
WALLS. WHERE ABOVE NOTED CONDITION OCCURS AND REQUIRES A
CONDUIT CONNECTION BETWEEN BOXES, UTILIZE FLEXIBLE TYPE
CONDUIT.
FD
E.
'L4' FD
'B2'
MH=18'-0"AFG
'B2'
EHLS1 - 13
'N'
'N'
2
1A 1B 1C 1D
NON-RATED PARTITION
2A 2B 2C 2X
3A 3B
6A 6B
11
'N'
'N'
'B2'
'N'
3
4
'N'
'N'
'N'
5
DN
1 HOUR FIRE BARRIER
'N'
LIGHTING - GENERATOR ENCLOSURE
MH=18'-0"AFG
0
8
16
24 FEET
N
MULTIWIRE BRANCH CIRCUITS SHALL BE INSTALLED PER ARTICLE 210.4
OF THE NEC. EACH MULTIWIRE BRANCH CIRCUIT SHALL BE PROVIDED
WITH A MEANS THAT WILL SIMULTANEOUSLY DISCONNECT ALL
UNGROUNDED CONDUCTORS AT THE POINT WHERE THE BRANCH
CIRCUIT ORIGINATES.
F.
ALL LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL BE SUPPORTED PER SEISMIC SPECIFICATIONS
SEISMIC CATEGORY C.
G.
CEILING MOUNTED MOTION SENSORS LOCATION IS DIAGRAMMATICAL
ONLY, POSITION IN SPACE FOR MAXIMUM COVERAGE PER
MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATION. PROVIDE ALL POWER PACKS AND
ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT FOR A COMPLETE AND OPERATIONAL SYSTEM.
'B2' CL
'N'
PARTITION TYPE
MH=1'-6" BELOW TOP OF WALL TO TOP
OF FIXTURE (TYPICAL OF ALL FIXTURES
THIS STRUCTURE)
M
MH=18'-0"AFG
'C2'
'L4'
3.5
NEW CONSTRUCTION
5A 5B 5X
D.
'L4'
M
WALL LEGEND
1
C.
GENERATOR
ENCLOSURE,
SEE 1/A602
A
B
CONNECT TO
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
CIRCUIT
N
LIGHTING - SECOND FLOOR PLAN - PART A
0
8
16
24 FEET
N
COUNTY, TENNESSEE
'N'
5
'H3D'
DECOMP
227
OC
5
'F'
WO
'N'
0.9
5210 Maryland Way
Suite 200
OC
MOUNT 1' ABOVE TOP OF MONITOR
'F'
DESTRESS
228
'F'
OC
1
SC
'F'
OC
C3
MECH
YARD
210
SECOND FLOOR
KEY PLAN
REVISIONS
1
6/13/14
2
6/19/14
DR. BY
CK. BY
PROJ. NO.
DATE
Addendum #1
Addendum #2
SKK
KAJ
120348.01
5/23/14
LIGHTING - SECOND
FLOOR PLAN
E102
5210 Maryland Way
Suite 200
615.377.9773 Office
615.370.4147 Fax
www.TMPartners.com
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
Architecture
Interiors
Planning
Sustainable Design
A13
A8.1
0.5
A9.2
TV
TV
ELC1 - 48
5
5
T-C5
ELC5
TV
ELC1 - 56,58,60
1
A8.1
PDU-A - 23
FD
ELC1
FD
TV
BREAK
ELC1 - 68
OUT
110
ELLS1 - 1
ELC1 - 62
ELC1 - 61
PDU-A - 3
TV
PDU-A - 9
PDU-A - 8
PDU-A - 7
ELC1 - 45
PDU-A - 12
TV
ELLS1 - 3
J
2
TV
L1 - 21
L1 - 28
ELC1 - 69
BREAK
OUT
ELC1 - 70
109
COMM/
DATA/
UPS
100
TV
BREAK
ELC1 - 71
OUT
108 ELC1 - 72
EWC/GFI
PDU-B - 10
PDU-B - 3
TGB
PDU-B - 8
PDU-A - 5
PDU-A - 11
PDU-B - 1
EOC/ ICC
112
PDU-B - 6
PDU-A - 10
STAFF
L1ENTRY
- 25
149
CORR
150
MEDIA
BRIEF
121
PDU-A - 13
GFI
PDU-B - 4
PDU-B
5
FD
IT SYS
102
ELLS1 - 2
GFI
UPS-B
2
BATT-A
BATT-B
PDU-A - 1
5
BREAK
OUT
107
GFI
FD
TLT
103
L1 - 2
ELC1 - 55
1
GFI
GFI
ELC1 - 15
ELC1 - 1
TV
TV
ELC1 - 9
GIS
113
ELC1 - 13
L1 - 26
TV
UC FRIDGE
3
ELC1 - 12
L1 - 1
L1 - 20
ELC1 - 10
ELC1 - 11
TV
POLICY
CONF.
117
BREAK
OUT
118
TV
TV
STAIR
2
ELC1 - 16
ELC1 - 17
ELC1 - 18
TV
TV
COPY
PRINTER
125
TV
ELC1 - 33
1
COPY
115
PDU-A - 31
PDU-B - 16
PDU-A - 24
GFI
L1 - 31
STAIR
1
UP
COPIER
ELC1 - 41
GFI/WP
L1 - 19
OFFICE
119 ELC1 - 34
3.2
TV
VESTIBULE
153
L1 - 24
ELC1 - 19
ELC1 - 42
ELC1S - 1
CORR
155
ELC1 - 35
B2
B12
LOBBY/
RECEPTION
154
GFI
ELC1S
L1 - 7
GFI/WP
TV
B1
GFI
GFI/WP
L1 - 32
TV
PDU-B - 9
ELC1 - 32
TGB
ELEV
60A/3P/FAR
MECH
EHM1 - 55,57,59
135
ELC1 - 40
ELC1 - 63
ELC1 - 14
CLASSROOM
133
UC FRIDGE
3
COPIER
GFI
BREAK
OUT
116
5-30R
PDU-A - 4 5-30R
CORR
151
ELC1 - 64
ELC1 - 36
TV
GROUNDING
BAR
AMTR
ELC1 - 37
RADIO
114
5
ELC1 - 73
3
GROUNDING BAR
UNDER RAISED FLOOR
PDU-B - 12
PDU-A - 22
ELC1 - 54
TV
BATT-B
PDU-B - 5
PDU-B - 7
IT
128
L1 - 36
ELM1 - 19
VEST
120
ELLS1 - 17
PDU-B - 14
ELC1 - 57
PDU-B - 2
L1 - 5
GFI
GROUNDING BAR
UNDER RAISED FLOOR
EWC/GFI
IT SYS
101
MEDIA/BULK
STOR.
L1
-6
130
L1 - 12
ELC1 - 8
GROUNDING BAR
BATT-A
L1 - 18
JAN
129
FD
GFI
2.3
L1 - 9
MENS
126
TV
TLT
104
CLASSROOM
134
L1 - 27
PDU-A - 2
PDU-A - 21
L1 - 11
L1 - 10
4
GROUNDING BAR
PHONE (615) 346-3400
FAX (615) 346-3550
www.icthomasson.com
GFI/WP
BULK
STOR.
131
VEND
ELC1 - 43 ELC1 - 38
PDU-A - 27
CORR
157
TV
ELC1 - 7
ELC1 - 66
ELM1 - 21
UPS-A
4
L1 - 13
TV
DATA
CENTER
WORK
ELC1 - 67
105
PDU-A
5
L1 - 14 VEND
WOMENS
127
ELC1 - 6
TV
ELLS1 - 16
L1 - 8
TV
ELLS1 - 4
ELLS1 - 5
L1 - 30
STACKED TRANSFORMER
FACP
VEND
TV
L1 - 29
3
TV
TV
FD
1
EOC
STOR
123
ELLS1
ELLS1 - 18 L1
T-2
T-LS1
GFI
L1 - 15
GFI
ELC1 - 44
PDU-A - 20
J
A9.2
FD
L1 - 16
TV
PDU-A - 6
GFI
MECH
132
GFI
ELC1 - 46
PDU-A - 25
MECH/
ELEC/
PLUMB
106
L1 - 23
2
FD
LINE
122
5
T-C1
UC FRIDGE
GFI
ELEV
B13
ELM1 - 20
PUBLIC
INFO
ELC1 - 31
137
B3
ELC1S - 2
3
TV
GFI
TV
FIN OFF
ELC1
138 - 30
GFI
L1 - 22
ELC1 - 3
L1 - 17
GFI
ELC1 - 29
BREAK
136
L1 - 3
ELC1 - 5 GFI
COPY/
COPIER
GFI SUPPLY
ELC1 - 4139
ELC1S - 3
REF
ELC1S - 4
1
GFI
5
ELC1S - 8
GFI
ELC1S - 5
ELC1S - 7
GFI
GFI
ELC1S - 10
ELC1 - 21
OFF- 20
ELC1
147
GFI
GFI
UC FRIDGE
ELC1 - 28
GFI/WP
ELC1 - 27
TV
ELC1 -FIRE
22
DIR
146
TV
ELC1S - 9
PUBLIC
SAFETY
DIR TV
142
ADMIN/
SEC
141
CORR.
ELC1 - 2
148
ELC1S - 6
TV
EMS DIR
145 ELC1 - 23
ELC1 - 24
ELC1 - 25
EMA DIR
144
B4
911 DIR
143
TV
TV
ELC1 - 26
B5
COUNTY, TENNESSEE
TMGB
TV
ELC1 - 39
ELC1
47
JIC/CIT
GROUNDING BAR
INFO
UNDER RAISED FLOOR
4
GROUNDING BAR
ELM1
T-M1
SEC STOR
124
VEND
ING
2
EHM1
EHC1
GFI/WP
L1 - 4
L1 - 34
GROUNDING BAR
UNDER RAISED FLOOR
1
TV
B6
B7
GENERAL NOTES:
ELECTRICAL NOTES:
A.
MULTIWIRE BRANCH CIRCUITS SHALL BE INSTALLED PER NEC 21.4 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
1.
B.
BRANCH CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS SIZED TO PREVENT VOLTAGE DROP MAY BE REDUCES IN SIZE
AS LOAD SUPPLIED BY REMAINING CIRCUIT DECREASES. VOLTAGE DROP SHALL NOT EXCEED
FIVE
PERCENT AT THE FARTHEST BRANCH CIRCUIT LOAD.
EACH RACK TO GET AN 'A' AND 'B' POWER STRIP AS SHOWN IN DETAIL ON SHEET
E502. CIRCUIT FEEDING EACH POWER STRIP TO ORIGINATE FROM PDU-A AND PDU-B
RESPECTIVELY.
2.
PROVIDE 100A/3P/NF/1 DISCONNECT SWITCH FOR CONNECTION TO POWER MODULE
TO FEED VIDEO DISPLAY WALL. ALL OTHER POWER COMPONENTS TO BE PROVIDED
BY VIDEO DISPLAY MANUFACTURER.
C.
D.
E.
F.
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, 20A/1P BREAKERS SHALL UTILIZE #12 AWG CONDUCTORS.
EXCEPTION: WHERE BRANCH CIRCUIT IS IN EXCESS OF 90 LINEAR FEET, CONDUCTORS SHALL
BE #10 AWG AND WHERE BRANCH CIRCUIT IS IN EXCESS OF 175 LINEAR FEET, CONDUCTORS
SHALL BE #8 AWG.
REFERENCE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR MECHANICAL CONTROLS
INTERFACE/REQUIREMENTS.
3.
4.
INTERLOCK ALL MOTORIZED DAMPERS WITH ASSOCIATED HVAC EQUIPMENT. COORDINATE WITH
MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT REQUIREMENTS.
DEVICES INDICATED ON THIS DRAWING ARE DIAGRAMMATICAL ONLY. CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER
TO ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATIONS FOR SPECIFIC LOCATIONS OF OUTLETS, SWITCHES, ETC. THIS
INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO, TELEVISIONS, PROJECTORS, AND MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
CONNECTIONS.
G.
MAINTAIN A MINIMUM SEPARATION 24" BETWEEN CENTERLINE OF ALL RECEPTACLES SET INTO
OPPOSITE SIDES OF ALL SOUND ISOLATION WALLS WHERE ABOVE NOTED CONDITION OCCURS
AND REQUIRES A CONDUIT CONNECTION BETWEEN BOXES, UTILIZE FLEXIBLE TYPE CONDUIT.
H.
VERIFY WITH OWNER FINAL LOCATIONS OF ALL A/V EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF TV'S,
PROJECTORS, ETC. POWER CONNECTIONS.
I.
SEE POWER HVAC SHEETS FOR CONNECTIONS TO MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING EQUIPMENT.
J.
ALL RECEPTACLES POWERED BY PDU-A, PDU-B AND PDU-C TO BE ORANGE IN COLOR.
5.
B8
B10
B11
WALL LEGEND
NEW CONSTRUCTION
PROJECTOR IN ROOM INDICATED, COORDINATE POWER REQUIREMENTS WITH OWNER
PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. POWER OUTLET TO BE MOUNTED FLUSH IN CEILING AND
CONNECT TO CONTRACTOR PROVIDED BREAKER IN SPACE IN CRITICAL PANEL.
FOR ALL LOCATIONS OF AUTOMATIC FAUCETS, AND FLUSH VALVES PAPER TOWEL
DISPENSERS. AND SOAP DISPENSERS, PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY CONNECTIONS FOR
ELECTRIC POWER INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, GFI DUPLEX OUTLET, HARDWIRED
CONNECTION, ETC. COORDINATE WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND FFE SUPPLIER FOR
TYPE OF POWER CONNECTION. COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECTURE SHEETS FOR ALL
LOCATIONS. EXTEND NEAREST ELECTRIC EYE CIRCUITS TO EACH DEVICE. TYPICAL ALL
LOCATIONS
BOND STRINGER TYPE ACCESS FLOORING TO GROUND BAR WITH #1/0 CU.
00
1
POWER - FIRST FLOOR PLAN
N
1A 1B 1C 1D
NON-RATED PARTITION
2A 2B 2C 2X
3A 3B
5A 5B 5X
6A 6B
0
8
16
PARTITION TYPE
1 HOUR FIRE BARRIER
24 FEET
11
REVISIONS
1
6/13/14
2
6/19/14
DR. BY
CK. BY
PROJ. NO.
DATE
N
FIRST FLOOR
KEY PLAN
Addendum #1
Addendum #2
SKK
KAJ
120348.01
5/23/14
POWER - FIRST
FLOOR PLAN
E201
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A8.1
0.5
A9.2
SC
MECH
YARD
210
C3
SC
DESTRESS
GFI
GFI 228
GFI
DECOMP
227
0.9
5210 Maryland Way
Suite 200
L2 - 49
L2 - 27
615.377.9773 Office
615.370.4147 Fax
www.TMPartners.com
STACK TRANSFORMER
L2 - 35
GFI/WP
EHEDP
GFI/WP
GFI
SPRINKLER
GFI 209
GFI
TGB
CENTRAL
VACUUM
L2AB - 24
MECH/
ELEC
207
EHMDP
FD
EHCDP
PDU-C
ELLS1 - 8
ELLS1 - 7
GFI
1
PDU-C - 1,7,9
J
J
PDU-C - 43,45,47
L2 - 17
WOMENS
230
ELM2 - 22
STUDY
240
ELM2 - 33
PANTRY
242
L6-30R
L2 - 39,41
L6-30R
L2 - 38,40
J
J
1
J
L2 - 16
ELC2 - 21
GFI
GFI
PDU-C JAN
- 2 GFI
PDU-C - 13,15,17
ELC2 - 50
L2 - 43,45
TRAIN
280
L6-30R
L2 - 19
PDU-C - 28,30,32
TV
1
TV
1
J
ELC2 - 20
1
J
1
J
J
PDU-C - 34,36,38
1
FD
1
ELC2 - 49
2.3
GFI
CAFETERIA
244
L2 - 7
DN
GFI/WP
GROUNDING BAR UNDER
RAISED ACCESS FLOORING
2
GFI/WP
ELC2 - 35
DN
DN
GROUNDING
BAR
L2AB - 30
GFI GFI
3
L2 - 37
L2 - 54
1
CORR
264
L2 - 14
L2 - 5
TV
RADIO
211 ELC2 - 27
TGB
L2 - 34
8
2
1
L2AB - 31
SLOPE
DN 1:1
2 MAX
TV
SHIFT
SUPERS
216
ELC2 - 44
GFI
ELC2 - 39
CORR
268
ELC2 - 28
L2 - 46,47,48
B1
STAIR
1
SUPER
218
CONF
217
FILES
220
ELC2 - 29
DN
DN
J
ELC2 - 42
TV
CL
TV
3.2
L2 - 24
ELC2 - 47
B12
OPEN TO
BELOW
L2 - 4
ELC2 - 30
OFFICE
273
B2
OFFICE
274
ELC2 - 3
B3
OFFICE
275
ELC2 - 13
ELC2 - 4
ELC2 - 14
TV
CORR
261
OFFICE
260
ELC2 - 2
TRAIN
COORD
259
ELC2 -EMER
31
PLANELC2 - 25
258
N
TV
TV
ELECTRICAL NOTES:
UC FRIDGE ELC2 - 10
WORK
L2 - 21
ELC2 - 15
TV
TV
PRGM
PLAN
MGR
256
SCHOOLS
ESC PLAN
250
ELC2 - 9
16
SHERIFF
TV
ESC
251
TV
EMS RESP
ELC2 - 5
COORD
255
EMS RESP
COORD
254
ELC2 - 33
24 FEET
TV
B4
TRAIN/
EXER
SPEC
ELC2 - 8
252
L2AB - 8
FIRE-RESCUE
COORD
ELC2 - 22
253
B6
2
MULTIWIRE BRANCH CIRCUITS SHALL BE INSTALLED PER NEC 21.4 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
B.
BRANCH CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS SIZED TO PREVENT VOLTAGE DROP MAY BE REDUCES IN SIZE
AS LOAD SUPPLIED BY REMAINING CIRCUIT DECREASES. VOLTAGE DROP SHALL NOT EXCEED FIVE
PERCENT AT THE FARTHEST BRANCH CIRCUIT LOAD.
PROJECTOR IN ROOM INDICATED, COORDINATE POWER REQUIREMENTS WITH OWNER
PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. POWER OUTLET TO BE MOUNTED FLUSH IN CEILING AND
CONNECT TO CONTRACTOR PROVIDED BREAKER IN SPACE IN CRITICAL PANEL.
4.
ALL DEVICES IN APPARATUS BAY TO BE MOUNTED A MINIMUM 46" AFF TO BOTTOM OF
DEVICE.
5.
PROVIDE DUPLEX AS SHOWN MOUNTED TO STRUCTURE FOR POWER CABLE REELS.
PROVIDE COXREELS PC10-3212-A OR EQUAL AND MOUNT NEAREST STRUCTURAL BEAM.
6.
MOUNT TRANSFORMER 10'-0" AFF TO BOTTOM. CONSULT STRUCTURAL ENGINEER FOR
WALL MOUNTED ASSEMBLY.
7.
COORDINATE POWER CONNECTION FOR LARGE COMMERCIAL ICE MAKER WITH OWNER
PRIOR. PROVIDE NECESSARY BREAKER IN PANEL L2AB AND CONNECT AS REQUIRED PER
NEC.
8.
PROVIDE HALO GROUNDING SYSTEM IN RADIO ROOM AROUND PERIMETER TO STRUCTURAL
STEEL.
9.
DRIVING SIMULATORS BY OWNER COORDINATE POWER CONNECTION PRIOR TO
INSTALLATION.
10.
FOR ALL LOCATIONS OF AUTOMATIC FAUCETS, AND FLUSH VALVES PAPER TOWEL
DISPENSERS. AND SOAP DISPENSERS, PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY CONNECTIONS FOR
ELECTRIC POWER INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, GFI DUPLEX OUTLET, HARDWIRED
CONNECTION, ETC. COORDINATE WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND FFE SUPPLIER
FOR TYPE OF POWER CONNECTION. COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECTURE SHEETS FOR
ALL LOCATIONS. EXTEND NEAREST ELECTRIC EYE CIRCUITS TO EACH DEVICE. TYPICAL
ALL LOCATIONS.
11.
BOND STRINGER TYPE ACCESS FLOORING TO GROUND BAR WITH #1/0 CU.
12.
CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE 2-4" CONDUITS FOR ANTENNA CONNECTIONS. PENETRATED
TROUGH ROOF OUTSIDE OF RADIO 211 AND TURNED ABOVE CEILING AND PENETRATED INTO
RADIO 211 ROOM.
13.
CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE 600A 3 POLE PORTABLE GENERATOR CONNECTION.
B10
B11
C3
C.
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, 20A/1P BREAKERS SHALL UTILIZE #12 AWG CONDUCTORS.
EXCEPTION: WHERE BRANCH CIRCUIT IS IN EXCESS OF 90 LINEAR FEET, CONDUCTORS SHALL
BE #10 AWG AND WHERE BRANCH CIRCUIT IS IN EXCESS OF 175 LINEAR FEET, CONDUCTORS
SHALL BE #8 AWG.
D.
REFERENCE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR MECHANICAL CONTROLS
INTERFACE/REQUIREMENTS.
GFI/WP
3.
B7
A.
GFI/WP
0.9
EACH RACK TO GET AN 'A' AND 'B' POWER STRIP AS SHOWN IN DETAIL ON SHEET
E502. CIRCUIT FEEDING EACH POWER STRIP TO ORIGINATE FROM PDU-C AND PDU-D
RESPECTIVELY.
TV
B8
C2
5-50R
GFI/WP
2.
ELC2 - 34
B5
GENERAL NOTES:
CONNECT BRAMIC CONSOLE MOUNTED POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT.
ELC2 - 6
ELC2 - 7
C1
1.
TV
TV
8
B13
RD
1
GFI
247
ADMIN/
COPY/L2 - 22
SEC
SUPPLY
249
248 WORK
COPIER
246
CORR
L2 - 3
262
SCHOOLS
PRGM
MGR
257
ELC2 - 1
OD
L2 - 2
GFI
L2 - 1
ELC2 - 23
5
POWER - SECOND FLOOR PLAN - PART B
OPEN
TO
BELOW
L2 - 20
SIM
TV
TV
ELEV
ELC2 - 41
TV
0
RECEPTION/
COPY
ELC2 - 40
COPIER 221
ELC2 - 37
ELC2 - 36 TV
L2 - 23
SLOPE
DN 1:1
2 MAX
ELC2 - 48
TV
STAIR
2
TRAIN
214
L2AB - 7
GFI/WP
TV
TV
ELC2 - 46
ELC2 - 45
ELC2 - 26
12
ELC2 - 43
PHONE (615) 346-3400
FAX (615) 346-3550
www.icthomasson.com
L2 - 55,57
11
3
4
L2 - 13
L15-30R
STUDY
238
GFI/WP
TV
LAUNDRY
236
L2 - 6
GFI
TGB
CORR
GROUNDING BAR UNDER
267
11 RAISED ACCESS FLOORING
TV
L2 - 10
L2 - 9
FD
GFI
J
ELC2 - 38
FIRST AID
237
GFI
5-30R
PDU-C - 4
TV
TV
GFI
IT 5-30R
PDU-C
232 - 8
PDU-C - 10,12,14
J
PDU-C - 22,24,26
STUDY
239
L2 - 36
ELC2 - 11
L2 - 42,44
L2AB - 29
PDU-C - 16,18,20
L2 - 12
TV
233
J
PDU-C - 49,51,53
L6-30R
FD
TLT
L2AB204
- 28
TV
ELC2 - 17
10
L2 - 15
L2 - 8
1
DISPATCH
213
PDU-C - 3,5,11
TV
CL
ELM2 - 15
ELC2 - 51
L2 - 56
CORR
263
CORR
266
PDU-C - 6
1
ELM2 - 32,34
J
FD
1
ELM2 - 14
TV
MENS
231
GROUNDING BAR UNDER
J
1
205
CORR
270
GFI
10
PDU-C - 37,39,41
UP
PDU-C - 31,33,35
1
ELC2 TLT
- 18
L2AB - 27
GFI
L2 - 26
J
EWC/GFI
TV
TLT
279GFI
ELC2 - 24
STOR
206A
FD
COMM
L2AB - 20
TECH
REPAIR
L2AB - 23
201
DISH
FD
L2 - 33
1
PDU-C - 19,21,23
CORR
269
TELE
DEMARK
206
BUILDING
MAINT/SUPPORT
203
TV
3.5
FD
ELM2 - 29,31
ELM2 - 241
21,23
2
GFI
L2AB - 22
ELM2 - 24
GFI
5-50R
TYP
1
L2AB - 9
L2AB - 13
E.
INTERLOCK ALL MOTORIZED DAMPERS WITH ASSOCIATED HVAC EQUIPMENT. COORDINATE WITH
MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT REQUIREMENTS.
FD
F.
DEVICES INDICATED ON THIS DRAWING ARE DIAGRAMMATICAL ONLY. CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER
TO ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATIONS FOR SPECIFIC LOCATIONS OF OUTLETS, SWITCHES, ETC. THIS
INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO, TELEVISIONS, PROJECTORS, AND MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
CONNECTIONS.
FD
5
L2AB - 12
FD
5
FD
L2AB - 6
FD
5
G.
5
2.1
APPARATUS
BAY
200
5-50R
L2AB - 5
L2AB - 10
GFI/WP
WALL LEGEND
MAINTAIN A MINIMUM SEPARATION 24" BETWEEN CENTERLINE OF ALL RECEPTACLES SET INTO
OPPOSITE SIDES OF ALL SOUND ISOLATION WALLS WHERE ABOVE NOTED CONDITION OCCURS
AND REQUIRES A CONDUIT CONNECTION BETWEEN BOXES, UTILIZE FLEXIBLE TYPE CONDUIT.
NEW CONSTRUCTION
CH-3
H.
4
L2AB - 11
L2AB - 15
6
2
VERIFY WITH OWNER FINAL LOCATIONS OF ALL A/V EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF TV'S,
PROJECTORS, ETC. POWER CONNECTIONS.
00
GFI/WP
5-50R
I.
SEE POWER HVAC SHEETS FOR CONNECTIONS TO MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING EQUIPMENT.
J.
ALL RECEPTACLES POWERED BY PDU-A, PDU-B AND PDU-C TO BE ORANGE IN COLOR.
MECH
YARD
210
GFI/WP
NON-RATED PARTITION
2A 2B 2C 2X
6A 6B
L2AB - 14
GFI/WP
L2AB
5
A1
A2
2.3
PARTITION TYPE
1A 1B 1C 1D
5A 5B 5X
5
FD
1
3A 3B
T2AB
FD
COUNTY, TENNESSEE
L2AB - 19
CL
PDU-C - 25,27,29
TV
DN
GFI
EHM2
ELM2 - 28
ELM2 - 25
ELM2 - 30
GFI
ELC2 - 12
KITCHEN ELM2 - 27
243
GFI
FD
L2 - 25
TLT
277
BATT C BATT C BATT C
TGB
L2
FD
FD
L2AB - 21
GROUNDING BAR UNDER
SERVER/CPU
212
UPS-C
ELC2 - 19
MECH
234
EWC/GFI
ELLS1 - 20
L2AB - 25
L2AB - 18
ELM2 - 26
T-1CL
229
Architecture
Interiors
Planning
Sustainable Design
ELC2 - 52
GFI
GFI
FD
GFI
FD
GFI
L2 - 51 EXERCISE
L2 - 18
ELC2
L2 - 53
2
GFI
FD
A9.2
ELM2
T-C2
EHLS1
J
ELLS1 - 6
2.1
GFI
REF
REF
GFI
HDP
L2AB - 17
TV
L2 - 29 L2 - 28 ELC2 - 16
ELC2 - 32
L2AB - 32
LOADING/
MAINT
202
2
GFI
L2 - 52
L2 - 31
L2AB - 26
FD
A8.1
TV
BREAK
226
L2 - 32
GFI
GFI
GFI
MSWBD
FD
L2 - 30
GROUNDING BAR UNDER
GFI
GFI
FD
7
T-M2
L2 - 50
L2AB - 16
1
11
1 HOUR FIRE BARRIER
CH-2
5
GFI/WP
5
FD
FOF-1
GFI/WP
FD
ELM2 - 1
ELC5 - 2
3.5
GENERATORS
AND FUEL TANK,
COORD W/ ELEC
GENERATOR
L2AB - 2
5-50R
GFI/WP
CL
5-50R
GFI/WP
GENERATOR
GENERATOR
ENCLOSURE,
SEE 1/A602
FUTURE
GENERATOR
GFI/WP
L2AB - 3
GFI/WP
GFI/WP
GFI/WP
FT-1
REVISIONS
1
6/13/14
2
6/19/14
Addendum #1
Addendum #2
CH-1
L2AB - 4
L2AB - 1
GFI/WP
3
4
13
DN
GFI/WP
ELC5 - 1
ADD ALTERNATE #1 TO
PROVIDE 600KVA GENERATOR
AND CONDUCTORS
GFI/WP
GFI/WP
EG1
A
GFI/WP
B
GFI/WP
N
POWER - SECOND FLOOR PLAN - PART A
0
8
16
24 FEET
N
POWER - GENERATOR ENCLOSURE
0
8
16
24 FEET
N
POWER - MECHANICAL YARD
0
8
16
24 FEET
N
SECOND FLOOR
KEY PLAN
DR. BY
CK. BY
PROJ. NO.
DATE
SKK
KAJ
120348.01
5/23/14
POWER - SECOND
FLOOR PLAN
E202
NOTE:
NOTE:
A. EQUIPMENT SHOWN IS FOR PRICING PURPOSES ONLY. THE FINAL DESIGN
SHALL INCLUDE ALL EQUIPMENT NECESSARY TO SUPPORT ALL BUILDING
REQUIREMENTS.
1. PROVIDE ELECTRICALLY OPERATED BREAKER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR
CONTROLS SEQUENCE WHEN UTILITY POWER IS LOST AND RESTORED.
2. BREAKER TO REMAIN OPEN, EXCEPT WHEN PORTABLE GENERATOR IS
CONNECTED AND ONLY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL MAY CLOSE.
3. LOADS INDICATED MUST BE IN INDIVIDUAL SECTIONS OF SWITCHBOARD
BASED ON 2011 NEC. DO NOT COMBINE INTO ONE SECTION.
4. ADD ALTERNATE #1 TO PROVIDE 600Kw/750KVA, 480/277V, 3PH,4W,60Hz, DIESEL
(TANK-120 HOUR CAPACITY) GENERATOR AND CONDUCTORS.
1
FUTURE
600kW/750KVA, 480/277V,
3PH, 4W, 60Hz, DIESEL
(TANK-120 HOUR CAPACITY)
600kW/750KVA, 480/277V,
CONNECT TO OVERHEAD LINES
UNDERGROUND
600kW/750KVA, 480/277V,
G
ENCLOSED BREAKER
NEMA 3R RATED
G
G
Architecture
Interiors
Planning
Sustainable Design
6 SETS (4#600MCM, 1#4/0 GND, 4"C)
PROVIDE 2 ADDITIONAL SPARE 4"C FOR FUTURE
51
CONDUIT
ONLY
2
615.377.9773 Office
615.370.4147 Fax
www.TMPartners.com
UNDERGROUND
4
48
5210 Maryland Way
Suite 200
1500kVA
12.47kV-120/208V,3PH
Z=5.75%
BY MTEMC
T-U
PORTABLE CONNECTION
600A
3P
51
51
MSWBD
600A
3P
900A
3P 1
M
M
900A
3P 1
M
V
NORMAL
LIFE SAFETY
CRITICAL
EQUIPMENT
900A
3P 1
2
SWITCHGEAR CONSTRUCTION (3000A BUS)
480/277V, 3PH, 4W, 60Hz, 65kAIC
2400AT
3000AF 1
K
3
3
3
3
M
M
1
2000A
3P
1
800A
3P
1
800A
3P
800A
3P
1
200A
3P
1
400A
3P
3P
SIZED PER
SPD MANUFACTURER
PHONE (615) 346-3400
FAX (615) 346-3550
www.icthomasson.com
34
34
SPD
200A MCB
PANEL
EHLS1
480/277V,
3PH,60Hz
50
21
21
50
75KVA
TRANSFORMER
480V: 208Y/120V
T-LS1
SPD
34
800A
3P
EHMDP
800A, 480/277V, 3PH, 4W, 60Hz, 42kAIC
400A
3P
3P
100A
3P
100A
3P
100A
3P
M
SPARE
34
34
PANEL
L2
120/208V,
3PH,60Hz
200A MCB
PANEL
L2AB
120/208V,
3PH,60Hz
200A MCB
CRITICAL
EQUIPMENT
EHCDP
800A, 480/277V, 3PH, 4W, 60Hz, 42kAIC
43
SPD
400A
PANEL
EHM1
480/277V,
3PH,60Hz
200A
PANEL
EG1
480/277V,
3PH,60Hz
SIZED PER SPD
MANUFACTURER
400A
PANEL
EHM2
480/277V,
3PH,60Hz
21
200A
3P
3P
100A
3P
34
T-M1
34
T-M2
34
PANEL
ELM1
120/208V,
3PH,60Hz
200A MCB
34
T-C1
75KVA
TRANSFORMER
480V: 208Y/120V
PANEL
ELC5
120/208V,
3PH,60Hz
200A MCB
PANEL
ELC2
120/208V,
3PH,60Hz
200A MCB
21
PANEL
ELC1
120/208V,
3PH,60Hz
200A MCB
PANEL
ELC1S
120/208V,
3PH,60Hz
50A MCB
SPD
SPD
M
FUTURE (NIC)
PDU-A
SIZED PER SPD
MANUFACTURER
3P
200A
3P
350A
3P
350A
3P
350A
3P
BASIS OF DESIGN
APC PART NUMBER
PMM-N-126-4-2-125
3P
20A
CHILLER 1
CHILLER 2
SPD
PDU-C
PDU-B
3P
20A
3P
20A
CHILLER 3
4-#12, 1-#12 GND.,
PER MANUFACTURED
WHIP. SEE FLOOR
PLANS TO DETERMINE
LENGTH.
BASIS OF DESIGN
APC PART NUMBER
AP 7593
PDR-A
RACK MOUNTED
POWER DISTRIBUTION
(RECEPTACLE STRIP)
OWNER
FURNISHED
OWNER
INSTALLED
4-#12, 1-#12 GND.,
PER MANUFACTURED
WHIP. SEE FLOOR
PLANS TO DETERMINE
LENGTH.
PDR-B
4-#12, 1-#12 GND.,
PER MANUFACTURED
WHIP. SEE FLOOR
PLANS TO DETERMINE
LENGTH.
BASIS OF DESIGN
APC PART NUMBER
AP 7593
PDR-A
RACK MOUNTED
POWER DISTRIBUTION
(RECEPTACLE STRIP)
~
~
22
22
125KVA
480V
125KVA
208/120V
208Y/120V
126 POLE
400A
3PH,60Hz
480V
60KVA
60KVA
208/120V
208/120V
208Y/120V
126 POLE
400A
3PH,60Hz
480V
208Y/120V
84 POLE
200A
3PH,60Hz
208Y/120V
84 POLE
200A
3PH,60Hz
FUTURE FOR
REDUNDANCY
PDU - SEE RACK CONNECTION PDU - SEE RACK CONNECTION
PDU - SEE RACK CONNECTION
DETAIL 'A' AND 'B'
DETAIL 'C' AND 'D'
DETAIL 'C' AND 'D'
PDU - SEE RACK CONNECTION
DETAIL 'A' AND 'B'
4-#12, 1-#12 GND.,
PER MANUFACTURED
WHIP. SEE FLOOR
PLANS TO DETERMINE
LENGTH.
PDR-B
REVISIONS
1
6/13/14
2
6/19/14
Addendum #1
Addendum #2
SERVER
OWNER FURNISHED
OWNER INSTALLED
POWER CORD
OWNER FURNISHED
OWNER INSTALLED
POWER CORD
RACK CONNECTION DETAIL 'A' AND 'B'
OWNER
FURNISHED
OWNER
INSTALLED
OWNER FURNISHED
OWNER INSTALLED
POWER CORD
INTERNAL
AST
INTERNAL
AST
ELECTRICAL ONE LINE DIAGRAM
SEE SHEET E-401
BASIS OF DESIGN:
APC MGE 5000 60KVA
CONTRACTOR
FURNISHED AND
INSTALLED
SERVER
OWNER FURNISHED
OWNER INSTALLED
POWER CORD
UPS-D
PDU-D
3P
20A
CONTRACTOR
FURNISHED AND
INSTALLED
SPD
BASIS OF DESIGN
APC PART NUMBER
PMM-N-084-4-2-75
480V
208/120V
55
EHEDP
800A, 480/277V, 3PH, 4W, 60Hz, 42kAIC
34
~
UPS-C
SEE SHEET E-401
BASIS OF DESIGN:
APC MGE 5000 60KVA
~
~
34
~
UPS-B
SEE SHEET E-401
BASIS OF DESIGN:
APC MGE 5000 130KVA
SEE SHEET E-401
BASIS OF DESIGN:
APC MGE 5000 130KVA
FUTURE (NIC)
75KVA
TELECOMM RM
TRANSFORMER
480V: 208Y/120V
34
800A
3P
75KVA
TRANSFORMER
480V: 208Y/120V
34
100A
3P
22
~
UPS-A
22
100A
3P
34
~
21
T-C2
200A
PANEL
EHC1
480/277V,
3PH,60Hz
PANEL
ELM2
120/208V,
3PH,60Hz
200A MCB
34
21
SPD
75KVA
TRANSFORMER
480V: 208Y/120V
200A
3P
200A
3P
90A
3P
90A
3P
SPARE
21
75KVA
TRANSFORMER
480V: 208Y/120V
75KVA
TRANSFORMER
480V: 208Y/120V
800A
3P
400A
3P
SPARE
43
75KVA
T-2AB
TRANSFORMER
480V: 208Y/120V
34
T-2
PANEL
L1
120/208V,
3PH,60Hz
200A MCB
21
COUNTY, TENNESSEE
SIZED PER SPD
MANUFACTURER
34
PANEL
ELLS1
120/208V,
3PH,60Hz
200A MCB
M
75KVA
TRANSFORMER
480V: 208Y/120V
T-1
SPD
21
50
400A MCB
PANEL
HDP
480/277V,
3PH,60Hz
RACK CONNECTION DETAIL 'C' AND 'D'
NO SCALE
NO SCALE
* PROVIDE PER EACH RACK IN ROOM 2080 (DATA CENTER)
3070 (SCI/CER SERVER ROOM)
* PROVIDE PER EACH RACK IN ROOM 2080 (DATA CENTER)
3070 (SCI/CER SERVER ROOM)
DR. BY
CK. BY
PROJ. NO.
DATE
SKK
KAJ
120348.01
5/23/14
ELECTRICAL - ONE
LINE DIAGRAM
E400
Branch Panel: EHM1
Location:
Supply From:
Mounting:
Enclosure:
Branch Panel: EHM2
Volts: 480/277 Wye
Phases: 3
Wires: 4
MECH/ ELEC/ PLUMB 106
EHMDP
Surface
Type 1
A.I.C. Rating: 18,000
Mains Type: MLO
Mains Rating: 400 A
Location:
Supply From:
Mounting:
Enclosure:
Notes:
CKT
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
59
61
63
65
67
69
71
73
75
77
79
81
83
Branch Panel: ELC1
Volts: 480/277 Wye
Phases: 3
Wires: 4
MECH 234
EHMDP
Surface
Type 1
A.I.C. Rating:
Mains Type:
Mains Rating:
MCB Rating:
Location:
Supply From:
Mounting:
Enclosure:
18,000
MLO
400 A
400 A
Notes:
Circuit Description
T-M1
--CRAC 1
--CRAC 3
--UFC-1-3
--FCU-1-10
--FCU-1-14
--AHU-1A
--FCU-1-20
--FCU-1-22
--ELEVATOR
--Other
--Spare
--Spare
--Space Only
Space Only
Space Only
Demand
Code TRIP P
Power;... 125 A 3
------Motor 25 A 3
------Motor 25 A 3
------Motor 20 A 3
------Motor 20 A 3
------Motor 20 A 3
------Motor 20 A 3
------Motor 20 A 3
------Motor 20 A 3
------Motor 20 A 3
------Other 35 A 3
-------30 A 3
-------30 A 3
---------------Total Load:
Total Amps:
A
B
C
P TRIP
2623 3823
1 20 A
2914 2000
1 20 A
2126 2000 1 20 A
5293 5293
3 25 A
5293 5293
--5293 5293 --5293
443
3 20 A
5293
443
--5293
443
--582
443
3 20 A
582
443
--582
443
--443
582
3 20 A
443
582
--443
582
--582
443
3 20 A
582
443
--582
443
--3047 3047
3 20 A
3047 3047
--3047 3047 --582
443
3 20 A
582
443
--582
443
--443
864
1 20 A
443 15000
3 60 A
443 15000 --4000 15000
--4000 7500
3 35 A
4000 7500 --7500 7500
--7500
0
3 30 A
7500
0
--0
0
--0
0
3 30 A
0
0
--0
0
--0
0
1 20 A
0
0
1 20 A
0
0
3 100 A
0
0
--0
0
--68269 VA
65874 VA
65086 VA
247 A
238 A
235 A
Demand
Code
Motor
Heating
Heating
Motor
--Motor
--Motor
--Motor
--Motor
--Motor
--Motor
--Motor
Equip...
--Other
--------------
Circuit Description
FCU-1-26
EH-4
EH-2
CRAC 2
--UFC-1-2
--FCU-1-8
--FCU-1-13
--FCU-1-15
--AHU-1B
--FCU-1-21
--FCU-1-1
WATER HEATER (3#4,1#8G.,1-1/4"C.)
--SCHP-1
--Spare
--Spare
--Spare
Spare
Spare
---
CKT
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
66
68
70
72
74
76
78
80
82
84
Legend:
Load Classification
Motor
Other
Power
Heating
Equipment
Receptacle
Connected Load
104335 VA
45000 VA
400 VA
4008 VA
45306 VA
180 VA
Demand Factor
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
90.00%
100.00%
Estimated Demand
104335 VA
45000 VA
400 VA
4008 VA
40775 VA
180 VA
Panel Totals
Total Conn. Load:
Total Est. Demand:
Total Conn. Current:
Total Est. Demand Current:
199229 VA
194698 VA
240 A
234 A
Notes:
CKT
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
59
61
63
65
67
69
71
73
75
77
79
81
83
85
87
89
91
93
95
97
99
101
103
105
107
109
111
113
115
117
119
121
123
125
Volts: 120/208 Wye
Phases: 3
Wires: 4
MECH/ ELEC/ PLUMB 106
T-C1
Surface
Type 1
A.I.C. Rating:
Mains Type:
Mains Rating:
MCB Rating:
14,000
MCB
200 A
200 A
Notes:
Circuit Description
T-M2
--VF-1B
--HWP-1
--BP-1
--ERV-1-W
--AHU-2A
--AHU-3A
--CRAC 4
--CRAC 6 (FUTURE)
--FCU-2-3
--FCU-2-8
--FCU-2-11
--FCU-2-13
--FCU-2-14A
--HOOD CONTROL PANEL
--FCU-2-21
--FCU-2-23
--FCU-2-26
EMERGENCY BOOSTER PUMP...
--Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Space Only
Space Only
Space Only
Space Only
Demand
Code TRIP P
Power;... 125 A 3
------Motor 20 A 3
------Motor 20 A 3
------Motor 20 A 3
------Motor 20 A 3
------Power 20 A 3
------Power 20 A 3
------Motor 20 A 3
------Motor 20 A 3
------Motor 20 A 3
------Motor 20 A 3
------Motor 20 A 3
------Motor 20 A 3
------Motor 20 A 3
------Motor 20 A 3
------Motor 20 A 3
------Motor 20 A 3
------Motor 20 A 1
Motor 25 A 3
-------0A
1
-0A
1
-0A
1
-0A
1
------------Total Load:
Total Amps:
A
B
C
2142... 582...
1567... 582...
1303... 582...
582... 1000...
582... 2000...
582... 3000...
3047... 3047...
3047... 3047...
3047... 3047...
831... 831...
831... 831...
831... 831...
2096... 1437...
2096... 1437...
2096... 1437...
3157... 3048...
3157... 3048...
3157... 3048...
1330... 1330...
1330... 1330...
1330... 1330...
2716... 2716...
2716... 2716...
2716... 2716...
2716... 1176...
2716... 443...
2716... 443...
831... 443...
831... 443...
831... 443...
582... 443...
582... 582...
582... 582...
443... 582...
443... 582...
443... 582...
582... 582...
582... 3910...
582... 3910...
582... 3910...
582... 582...
582... 582...
831... 582...
831... 1176...
831... 443...
443... 443...
443... 443...
443... 443...
443... 443...
443... 443...
443... 443...
1176... 443...
3878... 443...
3878... 2105...
3878... 2105...
0 VA 2105...
0 VA
0 VA
0 VA
0 VA
0 VA
0 VA
0 VA
0 VA
0 VA
0 VA
0 VA
72834 VA
265 A
0 VA
66912 VA
243 A
0 VA 0 VA
64096 VA
231 A
P TRIP
3 20 A
----1 20 A
1 20 A
1 20 A
3 20 A
----3 20 A
----3 20 A
----3 20 A
----3 20 A
----3 20 A
----1 20 A
3 20 A
----3 20 A
----3 20 A
----3 20 A
----3 20 A
----3 20 A
----1 20 A
3 20 A
----3 20 A
----3 20 A
----3 20 A
----3 20 A
------3 100 A
-----
Demand
Code
Motor
--Heating
Heating
Heating
Motor
--Motor
--Motor
--Power
--Power
--Motor
--Motor
Motor
--Motor
--Motor
--Motor
--Motor
--Motor
--Motor
Motor
--Motor
--Motor
--Motor
----------
Circuit Description
VF-1A
--EH-1
EH-4
EH-3
HWP-2
--BP-2
--ERV-2-W
--AHU-2B
--AHU-3B
--CRAC 5
--FCU-2-1
FCU-2-2
--FCU-2-6
--FCU-2-10
--FCU-2-12
--ERV-3E
--FCU-2-14B
--FCU-2-17
FCU-2-18
--FCU-2-22
--FCU-2-24
--AIR COMPRESSOR
--Spare
--Space Only
Spare
---
CKT
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
66
68
70
72
74
76
78
80
82
84
86
88
90
92
94
96
98
100
102
104
106
108
110
112
114
116
118
120
122
124
126
CKT
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
59
61
63
65
67
69
71
73
75
77
79
81
83
Circuit Description
RCPT RM. 117
RCPT RM. 139
RCPT RM. 146
RCPT RM. 108, CORRIDOR
RCPT RM. 113
RCPT RM. 113
RCPT RM. 113
RCPT RM. 117
RCPT RM. 118
RCPT RM. 118
RCPT RM. 146, 147
RCPT RM. 145
RCPT RM. 144
RCPT RM. 142, 143
RCPT RM. 138
RCPT RM. 137
RCPT RM. 114, 115
RCPT RM. 119
RCPT RM. 114
RCPT RM. 122
RCPT RM. 125
RCPT RM. 121
RCPT RM. 122
RCPT RM. 122
Spare
Spare
Spare
RCPT RM. 112
RCPT RM. 117
Spare
RCPT RM. 112
RCPT RM. 115
Lighting - Display Case
RCPT RM. 105
RCPT RM. 110, 109
RCPT RM. 108
RCPT RM. 107
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Demand
Code TRIP P
Equip... 20 A 1
Equip... 20 A 1
Recept... 20 A 1
Recept... 20 A 1
Recept... 20 A 1
Recept... 20 A 1
Recept... 20 A 1
Equip... 20 A 1
Equip... 20 A 1
Recept... 20 A 1
Recept... 20 A 1
Recept... 20 A 1
Recept... 20 A 1
Recept... 20 A 1
Recept... 20 A 1
Recept... 20 A 1
Recept... 20 A 1
Recept... 20 A 1
Recept... 20 A 1
Recept... 20 A 1
Equip... 20 A 1
Equip... 20 A 1
Equip... 20 A 1
Equip... 20 A 1
-20 A 1
-20 A 1
-20 A 1
Recept... 20 A 1
Recept... 20 A 1
-20 A 1
Recept... 20 A 1
Recept... 20 A 1
Lighting 20 A 1
Recept... 20 A 1
Equip... 20 A 1
Equip... 20 A 1
Equip... 20 A 1
-20 A 1
-20 A 1
-20 A 1
-20 A 1
-20 A 1
Total Load:
Total Amps:
A
1000
B
360
1200
900
1220
720
1040
720
360
1200
1200
540
500
1000
0
1380
0
5000
30
540
1000
1000
0
360
1220
1040
180
1200
1000
0
0
180
1080
180
1000
1000
1000
5000
1080
180
720
0
5000
540
1000
2520
0
0
720
900
1000
0
1000
1000
1080
720
1000
360
540
540
720
360
360
1220
720
1040
900
1040
720
1220
180
1000
1000
540
180
540
360
360
C
2760
0
0
26290 VA
221 A
0
23100 VA
195 A
0
0
21330 VA
178 A
Demand
P TRIP Code
Circuit Description
1 20 A Recept... RCPT RM. 141
1 20 A Recept... RCPT RM. 110,109
1 20 A Equip... RCPT RM. 117
1 20 A Recept... Receptacle
1 20 A Recept... RCPT RM. 144, 145
1 20 A Recept... RCPT RM. 137, 138
1 20 A
-Spare
1 20 A
-Spare
3 100 A Motor VIDEO/AUDIO RM. 112
----2
----1 20 A Recept... RCPT RM. 112
1 20 A Equip... RCPT RM. 108, 107
3 50 A Recept... ELC1S
--------1 20 A
-Spare
1 20 A
-Spare
1 20 A
-Spare
CKT
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
66
68
70
72
74
76
78
80
82
84
5210 Maryland Way
Suite 200
615.377.9773 Office
615.370.4147 Fax
www.TMPartners.com
Architecture
Interiors
Planning
Sustainable Design
PHONE (615) 346-3400
FAX (615) 346-3550
www.icthomasson.com
Legend:
Load Classification
Lighting
Motor
Equipment
Receptacle
Connected Load
280 VA
15000 VA
27900 VA
27540 VA
Demand Factor
100.00%
100.00%
90.00%
68.16%
Estimated Demand
280 VA
15000 VA
25110 VA
18770 VA
Panel Totals
Total Conn. Load:
Total Est. Demand:
70720 VA
59160 VA
196 A
164 A
Notes:
Legend:
Load Classification
Motor
Power
Heating
Kitchen
Equipment
Receptacle
Connected Load
133759 VA
26994 VA
13500 VA
7652 VA
20136 VA
1800 VA
Demand Factor
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
90.00%
100.00%
Estimated Demand
133759 VA
26994 VA
13500 VA
7652 VA
18122 VA
1800 VA
Panel Totals
Total Conn. Load:
Total Est. Demand:
203841 VA
201828 VA
245 A
243 A
Location:
Supply From:
Mounting:
Enclosure:
Branch Panel: EG1
Volts: 120/208 Wye
Phases: 3
Wires: 4
LIBRARY/ BREAK 136
ELC1
Surface
Type 1
A.I.C. Rating:
Mains Type:
Mains Rating:
MCB Rating:
Location:
Supply From:
Mounting:
Enclosure:
14,000
MCB
50 A
50 A
Notes:
CKT
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
Volts: 480/277 Wye
Phases: 3
Wires: 4
GENERATOR 272
EHMDP
Surface
Type 1
A.I.C. Rating:
Mains Type:
Mains Rating:
MCB Rating:
42,000
MCB
200 A
250 A
Notes:
Circuit Description
RCPT RM. 136
REF RM. 136
RCPT RM. 136
RCPT RM. 136
UC FRIDGE RM. 136
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
A
Demand
Code TRIP P
Recept... 20 A 1 1080 1080
Equip... 20 A 1
Recept... 20 A 1
Recept... 20 A 1
180
180
Equip... 20 A 1
-20 A 1
-20 A 1
0
0
-20 A 1
-20 A 1
-20 A 1
0
0
-20 A 1
-20 A 1
-20 A 1
0
0
-20 A 1
-20 A 1
-20 A 1
0
0
-20 A 1
-20 A 1
-20 A 1
0
0
-20 A 1
-20 A 1
2520 VA
Total Load:
24 A
Total Amps:
B
1200
C
180
180
1200
180
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
180
0
0
2760 VA
26 A
0
0
360 VA
3A
P
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TRIP
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
Demand
Code
Recept...
Recept...
Recept...
Recept...
Recept...
-----------------
Circuit Description
RCPT RM. 136
RCPT RM. 136
RCPT RM. 136
RCPT RM. 136
RCPT RM. 136
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
CKT
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
CKT
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
Circuit Description
Spare
--Spare
--Spare
---
Demand
Code
----------
A
TRIP
100 A
--100 A
--100 A
---
P
3
--3
--3
---
Connected Load
2400 VA
3240 VA
Demand Factor
90.00%
100.00%
Estimated Demand
2160 VA
3240 VA
C
P
TRIP
Demand
Code
Circuit Description
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Total Load:
Total Amps:
0
0
0 VA
0A
0 VA
0A
CKT
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
0 VA
0A
Legend:
Load Classification
Connected Load
Demand Factor
Estimated Demand
Panel Totals
Total Conn. Load:
Total Est. Demand:
Legend:
Load Classification
Equipment
Receptacle
B
COUNTY, TENNESSEE
Branch Panel: ELC1S
Notes:
0 VA
0 VA
0A
0A
Panel Totals
Total Conn. Load:
Total Est. Demand:
5640 VA
5400 VA
16 A
15 A
Notes:
BREAKER FOR GENERATOR EQUIPMENT TO BE SIZED PER MANUFACTURER.
REVISIONS
2
6/19/14
Notes:
SCHEDULE LEGEND
EHM1
EHM2
ELC1S
EG1
DR. BY
CK. BY
PROJ. NO.
DATE
Addendum #2
SKK
KAJ
120348.01
5/23/14
PANEL SCHEDULES
ELC1
E604
VOIP STRUCTURED CABLE LEGEND
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
W
WALL MOUNT VOIP OUTLET
N
VOIP OUTLET N= NUMBER OF CABLES
N
COUNTER HEIGHT VOIP OUTLET N= NUMBER OF CABLES
TV
CATV LOCATION ( 1 RG6 QUAD SHEILD COAXIAL)
N
VOIP FLOORBOX OUTLET N= NUMBER OF CABLES
N
WIRELESS ACCESS POINT N= NUMBER OF CABLES
NP
NP
N= NUMBER OF CABLES
P= CABLES BEING RUN TO A PC CABINET
N= NUMBER OF CABLES
PC FLOOR OUTLET
P= CABLES BEING RUN TO A PC CABINET
PC OUTLET
BACK BOX
MOUNTING HEIGHT
4 X 4 SQ. 2-1/8" DEEP
1-GANG RING
4 X 4 SQ. 2-1/8" DEEP
1-GANG RING
4 X 4 SQ. 2-1/8" DEEP
1-GANG RING
4 X 4 SQ. 2-1/8" DEEP
1-GANG RING
SEE ELECTRICAL
PLANS
SINGLE PORT
SURFACE MOUNT BOX
4 X 4 SQ. 2-1/8" DEEP
1-GANG RING
SEE ELECTRICAL
PLANS
48"
5210 Maryland Way
Suite 200
615.377.9773 Office
615.370.4147 Fax
www.TMPartners.com
18"
Architecture
Interiors
Planning
Sustainable Design
6" ABOVE COUNTER
90"
FLOOR
CEILING
18"
FLOOR
- CONTRACTOR SHALL LEAVE 25' SLACK CABLE IN CEILING FOR RELOCATION OF CABLE.
ACCESS CONTROL LEGEND / CCTV
SYMBOL
BACK BOX
MOUNTING HEIGHT
4 X 4 SQ. 2-1/8" DEEP
1-GANG RING
48"
DOOR CONTACT
N/A
TOP OF DOOR
PIR
PASSIVE INFRARED DEVICE
N/A
CEILING
DRB
DOOR RELEASE BUTTON
18"
J
OVERHEAD DOOR CONTACT
4 X 4 SQ. 2-1/8" DEEP
W/ COVER
4 X 4 SQ. 2-1/8" DEEP
W/ COVER
N/A
N/A
N/A
C
FIXED CCTV CAMERA
N/A
CEILING
C
360 DEGREE VIEW CCTV CAMERA
N/A
CEILING
C
180 DEGREE VIEW CCTV CAMERA
N/A
CEILING
SEE DETAIL
SEE DETAIL #6
SHEET T903
CR
CARD READER
DC
DC
N/A
2
DESCRIPTION
IF V
VIDEO INTERCOM
ID
VIDEO INTERCOM DESKTOP
MON
SECURITY MONITOR
4 X 4 SQ. 2-1/8" DEEP
W/ COVER
4 X 4 SQ. 2-1/8" DEEP
W/ COVER
PHONE (615) 346-3400
FAX (615) 346-3550
www.icthomasson.com
18"
18"
18"
REVISIONS
2
6/19/14
COUNTY, TENNESSEE
2
Addendum #2
2
DR. BY
CK. BY
PROJ. NO.
DATE
TELECOMMUNICATIONS - LEGEND
SMC
EPC
120348.01
5/23/14
TELE COMMUNICATIONS
- LEGEND
T000
5210 Maryland Way
Suite 200
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
615.377.9773 Office
615.370.4147 Fax
www.TMPartners.com
A13
Architecture
Interiors
Planning
Sustainable Design
A8.1
0.5
A9.2
2
2
IF
2
BREAK
OUT
110
PIR
149A
EOC
STOR
123
MECH/
ELEC/
PLUMB
106
WOMENS
127
FD
BREAK
OUT
109
STAFF
ENTRY
149
2
C
IT SYS
102
C
C101
CR
2
VEST
120
IT SYS
101
FD
TLT
103
112B
112A
PIR
DC
C105
C
COPY
115
STAIR
2
C110
STAIR
1
C
CR
BREAK
OUT
116
BREAK
OUT
118
POLICY
CONF.
117
DC
CR
OFFICE
119
117B
C
DC
CR
C109
1
CORR
155
B2
ELEV
2
153A
B3
2
1
BREAK
136
155A
2
ADMIN/
SEC
141
CORR.
148
C108
DC
3.2
B12
DC
PIR
DC
2
148A
COPY/
SUPPLY
139
5
CR
C
DC CR
FIN OFF
138
2
C107
ST1B
B13
2
PUBLIC
INFO
137
DC
UP
CR
VESTIBULE DC
PIR
153
DC
2
LOBBY/
RECEPTION
154
2
C
133B
2
C106
MON
2
IF
2
2
B1
ELEV
MECH
135
ID
PIR
DC
CLASSROOM
133
128A
2
GIS
113
MEDIA/BULK
STOR.
130
IT
128
DRB
4
DC
CORR
151
DC
COPY
125
117A
100A
PHONE (615) 346-3400
FAX (615) 346-3550
www.icthomasson.com
CORR
150
JAN
129
DC
PIR
AMTR
RADIO
114
DC
CR
CLASSROOM
134
2.3
FD
BREAK
OUT
107
MENS
126
TLT
104
2
3
C113
CR
FD
BULK
STOR.
131
REX
105A
DC
2
REX
DC
CORR
157
BREAK
OUT
108
EOC/ ICC
112
C112
C104
CR
CR
COMM/
DATA/
UPS
100
C111
DC
MEDIA
BRIEF
121
C
C
DATA
CENTER
WORK
105
105B
134B
FD
DC
CR
121A
A9.2
C
MECH
132
2
2
C103
FD
VEND
ING
FD
C102
2
C
JIC/CIT
INFO
LINE
122
A8.1
2
FD
C
CR
DC
SEC STOR
124
1
WP
DC
153B
PUBLIC
SAFETY
DIR
142
C
OFF
147
FIRE DIR
146
EMS DIR
145
EMA DIR
144
B4
911 DIR
143
B5
B6
NOTES:
COUNTY, TENNESSEE
A1
B7
1.
THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL TIGHTLY COORDINATE THE ALUMINUM
STOREFRONT CONTRACTOR AND SECURITY CONTRACTOR SUCH THAT THE
SECURITY CONTRACTOR’S CABLE MAY BE ROUTED THROUGH THE ALUMINUM
FRAMEWORK DURING THE INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBLY OF THE ALUMINUM
FRAMEWORK. THIS IS MINIMALLY REQUIRED FOR THE PUSH TO EXIT BUTTONS,
BUT MAY ALSO BE REQUIRED FOR THE MAGNETIC LOCKS AND PIR REQUEST-TOEXIT DEVICES AT THESE DOORS.
B8
B10
B11
WALL LEGEND
2
NEW CONSTRUCTION
SECURITY - FIRST FLOOR PLAN
N
00
1
0
8
16
PARTITION TYPE
1A 1B 1C 1D
NON-RATED PARTITION
2A 2B 2C 2X
24 FEET
3A 3B
5A 5B 5X
6A 6B
11
1 HOUR FIRE BARRIER
REVISIONS
2
6/19/14
Addendum #2
DR. BY
CK. BY
PROJ. NO.
DATE
N
FIRST FLOOR
KEY PLAN
SMC
EPC
120348.01
5/23/14
SECURITY - FIRST
FLOOR PLAN
T301
A1
A2
2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A8.1
C210
1
C
0.5
A9.2
C
SC
MECH
YARD
210
DC
DECOMP
227
C213
0.9
WP
C209
C
2
CR
228A
WP
CR
DC
C
CR
DC
1
2
5210 Maryland Way
Suite 200
C
228B
DC
C215
C
2
REF
MECH/
ELEC
207
FD
FD
DC
C212
213B
FD
FD
FD
CR
DC
TELE
DEMARK
206
PIR
DN
C
BUILDING
MAINT/SUPPORT
203
CL
3
4
CL
C224
STUDY
239
C225
2
C226
2
C
C
C227
DISPATCH
213
2
FD
JAN
233
CR
TRAIN
280
FD
FD
CAFETERIA
244
LAUNDRY
236
IT
232A 232
213A
CR
DN
RADIO
211
PHONE (615) 346-3400
FAX (615) 346-3550
www.icthomasson.com
C
RECEPTION/
COPY
221
C
DN
STAIR
1
DN
SHIFT
SUPERS
216
C220
SUPER
218
CONF
217
FILES
220
SLOPE
DN 1:1
2 MAX
2
CL
C
C223
2
C221
2
B12
OPEN TO
BELOW
C
OFFICE
273
B2
DC
SIM
OFFICE
274
OFFICE
275
B3
TRAIN
COORD
259
5
EMER
PLAN
258
261A
2
WORK
247
ADMIN/
COPY/
SEC
SUPPLY
249
248 WORK
246
CORR
262
SCHOOLS
PRGM
MGR
257
PRGM
PLAN
MGR
256
C
C219
2
ELEV
OPEN
TO
BELOW
CR
CORR
261
OFFICE
260
3.2
C217
CORR
268
B1
CORR
264
C218
DC
STAIR
2
TRAIN
214
CORR
267
DC
213C
DN
2
STUDY
238
CR
TLT
204
SLOPE
DN 1:1
2 MAX
2.3
C
FD
DN
C216
FIRST AID
237
2
DC
CORR
270
PANTRY
242
CORR
263
CORR
266
STOR
206A
TLT
205
C207
COMM
TECH
REPAIR
201
FD
2
C
2
UP
STUDY
240
268A
EMS RESP
COORD
255
SHERIFF
ESC
251
EMS RESP
COORD
254
B4
B13
RD
C222
C
SCHOOLS
ESC PLAN
250
OD
DC
TRAIN/
EXER
SPEC
252
DC
C
CORR
269
202A
DISH
241
WOMENS
230
FD
DC
230C
CR
2
DC
MENS
231
CR
2
2.1
TLT
279
C
PIR
DC
231C
CR
FD
TLT
277
SERVER/CPU
212
212A
DC
2
Architecture
Interiors
Planning
Sustainable Design
229A
DC
C
C208
CL
C
FD
2
615.377.9773 Office
615.370.4147 Fax
www.TMPartners.com
KITCHEN
243
FD
CR
2
LOADING/
DC MAINT
202
2
EXERCISE
229
CR
FD
MECH
234
A9.2
CR
202B
FD
BREAK
226
A8.1
C211
269A
SPRINKLER
209
DC
2
PIR
FD
FIRE-RESCUE
COORD
253
B5
B6
B7
B8
B10
C1
B11
C2
SECURITY - SECOND FLOOR PLAN - PART B
0.9
C3
C204
2
DC
DC
200G
C
200B
200H
CR
2
DC
DC
1
200J
TYP
IF
2
N
2
DC
200K
0
8
16
24 FEET
C205
2
C
FD
FD
2
FD
C203
FD
C
FD
C
C202
2.1
WALL LEGEND
DC
APPARATUS
BAY
200
NEW CONSTRUCTION
2
2
00
1
2
C206
NON-RATED PARTITION
2A 2B 2C 2X
C
2
5A 5B 5X
NOTES:
6A 6B
11
2.3
FD
1.
FD
DC
FD
200L
CR
FD
2
CR
3.5
2.
PARTITION TYPE
1A 1B 1C 1D
3A 3B
THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL TIGHTLY COORDINATE THE ALUMINUM
STOREFRONT CONTRACTOR AND SECURITY CONTRACTOR SUCH THAT THE SECURITY
CONTRACTOR’S CABLE MAY BE ROUTED THROUGH THE ALUMINUM FRAMEWORK
DURING THE INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBLY OF THE ALUMINUM FRAMEWORK. THIS IS
MINIMALLY REQUIRED FOR THE PUSH TO EXIT BUTTONS, BUT MAY ALSO BE REQUIRED
FOR THE MAGNETIC LOCKS AND PIR REQUEST-TO-EXIT DEVICES AT THESE DOORS.
1 HOUR FIRE BARRIER
CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL CAMERA AT THE END OF THE MECHANICAL YARD.
200F
DC
DC
201A
200E
DC
DC
C
GENERATOR
ENCLOSURE,
SEE 1/A602
CL
REVISIONS
2
6/19/14
Addendum #2
2
200D
2
DC
200A
200C
3
4
C201
2
DC
CR
3.5
DESTRESS
WP 228
2
COUNTY, TENNESSEE
C3
SC
C214
DN
WP
A
B
N
SECURITY - SECOND FLOOR PLAN - PART A
0
8
16
24 FEET
N
SECOND FLOOR
KEY PLAN
DR. BY
CK. BY
PROJ. NO.
DATE
SMC
EPC
120348.01
5/23/14
SECURITY - SECOND
FLOOR PLAN
T302
GATE LEAF
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X
X X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
XX
XX
XX
X X
X X
X X
X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X
X
X
X X
X X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X
5210 Maryland Way
Suite 200
SAFETY CHAIN/WIRE
(PROVIDED BY OTHERS)
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
LINE POST
615.377.9773 Office
615.370.4147 Fax
www.TMPartners.com
Architecture
Interiors
Planning
Sustainable Design
SPRING CLIPS
CEILING TILE (EXISTING)
CAMERA
CLEAR OR SMOKED DOME
GRADE LINE
SECURITY DETAIL DOUBLE SWING VEHICLE GATES
TYPICAL CEILING MOUNTED CCTV CAMERA
DETAIL
1
2
No Scale
14.09"
4.26"
AXDVF
GOOSENECK
MOUNTING PLATE
FOOTPRINT
14.75"
MODEL PCH196
FROM
THE HOUSING
COMPANY
INTERIOR
WALL
1/2"
CONDUIT
INTERFACE
BOX
WALL
CONDUIT
MODEL PD114B
FROM
THE HOUSING
COMPANY
EXTERIOR
WALL
DOME
PHONE (615) 346-3400
FAX (615) 346-3550
www.icthomasson.com
PROVIDE LOCK AND
DELIVER 2 KEYS TO
OWNER WITH CLOSE
OUT DOCUMENTS
CARD READER
MOUNT TO RIGHT
SIDE TO ALLOW FOR
ELECTRONICS
CLEARANCE
COVER OPEN
JUNCTION
BOX
DOME
72"
GENERAL NOTES:
A. CONDUITS TO BE STUBBED UP CLOSE
TOGETHER AND TOUCHING TO INSURE
PLACEMENT OF PEDESTAL
2"
SQUARE
POST
B. COORDINATE LOCATION OF GOOSENECK
AND CARD READER WITH SITE CONTRACTOR
AND DESIGNER
TYPICAL EXTERIOR FIXED MOUNT CCTV CAMERA
DETAIL
2
3
1/ "
2
CONDUIT TO
GATE OPERATOR
1" CONDUIT TO
SERVER ROOM
SIDE VIEW
FRONT VIEW CLOSED
VEHICLE ENTRY VIDEO INTERCOM
DETAIL
SECURE WITH
APPROPRIATE ANCHORS
AND FASTENERS X4
FRONT VIEW OPEN
TYPICAL INTERIOR WALL MOUNT CCTV CAMERA
DETAIL
4
No Scale
No Scale
2
5
REVISIONS
2
6/19/14
DR. BY
CK. BY
PROJ. NO.
DATE
COUNTY, TENNESSEE
42"
MASONRY
BOX
Addendum #2
SMC
EPC
120348.01
5/23/14
SECURITY - DETAILS
2
SECURITY - DETAILS
T903
WIRING TO
HEAD END
4" X 4" SQUARE BOX
ACCESSIBLE CEILING
SECURED SIDE
WIRING TO
HEAD END
WIRING TO
HEAD END
NEMA BOX (8"x8")
ACCESSIBLE CEILING
SECURED SIDE
NEMA BOX (8"x8")
ACCESSIBLE CEILING
SECURED SIDE
1/2"C (TYP)
5210 Maryland Way
Suite 200
MAGNETIC LOCK
CEILING
CEILING
1/2"C (TYP)
615.377.9773 Office
615.370.4147 Fax
www.TMPartners.com
1078 DOOR CONTACT
DOOR CONTACT
ELECTRIC RIM EXIT
WITH REX
1/2"C (TYP)
DOOR
CONTACT/DPS
POWER TRANSFER HINGE
DUAL GANG J-BOX WITH
SINGLE GANG MUD RING
(VERTICAL) UNSECURED
SIDE (CARD READER).
DUAL GANG J-BOX WITH
SINGLE GANG MUD RING
(VERTICAL) UNSECURED SIDE
(CARD READER).
SINGLE GANG BOX FOR
POWER TRANSFER
HINGE
Architecture
Interiors
Planning
Sustainable Design
RIM ELECTRIC STRIKE
48"
SS
E
R
EG
FLOOR
F
HO
T
PA
S
ES
R
EG
FLOOR
F
O
TH
A
P
NOTE:
ALL DEVICES 1/2" FLEX/EMT
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
NOTE:
SINGLE DOOR, DPS. CONDUIT AND ROUGH-IN DETAIL
No Scale
1
E IDE)
D
I
E S ER S
R
U
D
EC REA
S
UN ARD
(C
T
PA
IDE
S
E
UR
C
SE
NOTE:
SINGLE DOOR, ELECTRIFIED CYLINDRICAL LOCK, FAIL SECURE,
LOCAL P/S, CONDUIT AND ROUGH-IN DETAIL.
2
No Scale
S
ES
R
EG
F
HO
48"
IDE
S
E
UR
C
SE
IDEE)
S
RE SID
U
EC DER
S
UN REA
RD
A
(C
DOUBLE DOOR WITH CARD READER AND MAGNETIC LOCK
CONDUIT AND ROUGH-IN DETAIL
PHONE (615) 346-3400
FAX (615) 346-3550
www.icthomasson.com
3
No Scale
2
12" x 12" x 4"
JUNCTION BOX w /
COVER
OH DOOR
MOTOR
3/4" C
ROUTE 3/4" EMT
ABOVE CEILING TO
DOOR CONTROLLER
PROVIDE "REQUEST TO OPEN" FROM
OVERHEAD DOOR OPERATOR
AUXILIARY CONTACTS.
3/4" CONDUIT
BMS
3/4" CONDUIT
FLOOR
OVERHEAD ROLL-UP DOOR
(FROM CONTROL SIDE)
4
No Scale
GENERAL NOTES:
2
A.
THE "SECURE SIDE" OF A DOOR (PORTAL) SHALL BE DEFINED AS THE NON-CARD READER SIDE OF DOOR. FOR DOORS WITH A
READER ON EACH SIDE, THE SIDE CLOSEST TO NEAREST COMMUNICATIONS CLOSET SHALL BE DEFINED AS THE "SECURE SIDE".
ALL WALL MOUNTED DEVICES REQUIRE ¾” CONDUIT TO ABOVE THE NEAREST ACCESSIBLE CEILING, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
CONDUIT FOR ACCESS CONTROL DEVICES SHALL BE ROUTED TO ABOVE THE NEAREST CEILING ON THE SECURE SIDE OF THE
DOOR.
B.
WHEN USED WITH MAGNETIC LOCKS, "PUSH-TO-EXIT" BUTTONS SHALL BE WIRED TO PHYSICALLY AND DIRECTLY INTERRUPT LOCK
POWER. THESE BUTTONS SHALL KEEP THE LOCK POWER INTERRUPTED FOR 30 SECONDS AFTER THE LAST BUTTON ACTUATION.
C.
THE ACCESS CONTROL PANELS AND POWER SUPPLIES FOR DEVICES SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH SUFFICIENT BATTERY BACKUP TO
FUNCTION FOR 6 HOURS WITHOUT POWER AT THE TYPICAL USAGE RATE DURING THE BUSINESS DAY. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT
CALCULATIONS WITH SUBMITTALS.
D.
PROVIDE A SPDT DOOR POSITION SWITCH FOR EVERY LEAF OF EVERY DOOR WITH ACCESS CONTROL. AT EACH DOOR CONTACT
PROVIDE END OF LINE RESISTORS CONFIGURED WITH THE SYSTEM FOR 4-STATE SUPERVISION.
E.
THE ACCESS CONTROL SYMBOLS ARE DIAGRAMATIC IN NATURE. BEST PRACTICES SHOULD BE USED WHEN LOCATING DEVICES AT
EACH DOOR.
F.
INTERCOM DOOR / GATE STATIONS SHALL SIMULTANEOUSLY CALL ALL CONNECTED INTERCOM MASTERS. THE MASTER USED TO
ANSWER THE CALL SHALL BE ABLE TO MOMENTARILY RELEASE (UNLOCK) THE DOOR FROM THAT MASTER.
G.
FOR EVERY PORTAL WITH EITHER A CARD READER A DOOR POSITION SWITCH, OR AN INTERCOM, PROVIDE A 6"X 6" X 4" COVERED
STEEL JUNCTION BOX ABOVE THE NEAREST ACCESSIBLE CEILING ON THE SECURE SIDE OF THE PORTAL FOR USE BY THE SECURITY
CONTRACTOR.
H.
MAGNETIC LOCKS SHALL BE INTEGRATED WITH THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SUCH THAT A FIRE OR SMOKE ALARM SHALL INTERRUPT
LOCK POWER TO THESE LOCKS. ALSO, MAGNETIC LOCKS ASSOCIATED WITH CONTROL HARDWARE SHALL UNLOCK IF BATTERY
BACKUP POWER FAILS TO THAT CONTROLLING HARDWARE.
I.
FOR DOORS WITH MAGNETIC LOCKS, A REQUEST TO EXIT BUTTON SHALL BE PROVIDED ON THE SECURE SIDE OF THE DOOR. LOCK
POWER SHALL BE WIRED THROUGH THE NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACTS OF THE REQUEST TO EXIT BUTTON SUCH THAT PRESSING
THE BUTTON BREAKS LOCK POWER DIRECTLY. DO NOT WIRE THE BUTTON TO PROVIDE A REQUEST TO EXIT CLOSURE/SIGNAL TO
THE ACCESS CONTROL DOOR CONTROLLER.
J.
FOR DOORS WITH MAGNETIC LOCKS, CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE A PASSIVE INFRARED (PIR) MOTION SENSITIVE REQUEST TO EXIT
DEVICE ABOVE THE SECURE SIDE OF THE DOOR. THE PIR SHALL HAVE DOUBLE POLE, DOUBLE THROW OUTPUTS. THE NORMALLY
OPEN CONTACTS OF ONE OUTPUTS SHALL BE WIRED TO PROVIDE A REQUEST TO EXIT CLOSURE SIGNAL TO THE ACCESS
CONTROL DOOR CONTROLLER WHEN MOTION IS DETECTED BY THE PIR. WIRE LOCK POWER THROUGH THE NORMALLY CLOSED
OUTPUTS OF THE OTHER OUTPUT SUCH THAT LOCK POWER IS INTERRUPTED WHEN MOTION IS DETECTED BY THE PIR. ADJUST THE
MOTION DETECTION FIELD OF VIEW (AS SMALL AS PRACTICAL), AND SENSITIVITY (AS LOW AS PRACTICAL) SUCH THAT THE DOOR
FUNCTIONS APPROPRIATELY.
REVISIONS
2
6/19/14
DR. BY
CK. BY
PROJ. NO.
DATE
COUNTY, TENNESSEE
4" x 4" x 2" JUNCTION
BOX w / COVER
Addendum #2
Author
Checker
120348.01
5/23/14
ACCESS CONTROL DETAILS
ACCESS CONTROL - DETAILS
T906
241 Wilson Pike Circle
∙
P.O. Box 5036
∙
Pre-Bid Meeting Minutes
June 12, 2014 – 10:00 AM
Attendees:
See Attached Sign In Sheet
1.
Introductions
a. Williamson County Government – Owner – Al Ritter, Keith Feinstein, Bill Jorgensen,
Mac Purdy, Leslie Mitchell
b. Thomas Miller & Partners (TMP) – Architect - Jeff Earwood
c. The Parent Company (TPC) – Construction Manager – Joel Carden – PM; Butch
Dunnivant– Superintendent
2. Bid Documents
a. Bid Documents include the Invitation to bid, Instructions to bidders, proposal forms,
plans and specifications. Bid documents have been sent to each bidder of record.
b. Trade contractors should pay close attention to the Instructions to Bidders as there are
scope specific items in each trade package.
3. Bid Date/ Requirements
a. Bids are due on Tuesday, June 24, 2014 at 2:00 PM CST and are to be turned in to
Williamson County Government as indicated in the bid package. Bids must be turned
in on the provided proposal forms in triplicate. No exclusions can be submitted with
your bid. No bids can be received via email and/or fax. Bids will be opened and read.
b. Bid Bonds in the amount of 5% are required. Bidders may provide a cashiers check
payable to Williamson County Government in lieu of a bid bond.
c. Payment and Performance Bonds are required and the cost should be included in the
bid amount.
d. Any questions in writing need to be submitted to TPC no later than 4:00 PM Tuesday,
June 17. . If there are questions submitted beyond this date, we will attempt to answer
them, but there are no guarantees. Bidders should rely solely on Bid Document
Revisions/ Supplemental Instructions to Bidders/ Addenda for revisions to the bid
documents.
4. Administrative
a. All contracts will be held by Williamson County Government directly with each Trade
Contractor.
b. Submittals – Electronic submission is required on this project. TPC utilizes a current
project information software called Newforma. This software will be used to track
submittals, RFI’s, etc. throughout the project.
c. BIM/ Coordination drawings – Trade Contractors that are required to provide and
submit coordination drawings, specifically HVAC, Plumbing, Electrical, Fire
Protection, Structural, Arch Precast, Drywall, will be required to submit 3D models
compatible with Autodesk BIM 360 Glue for use in clash detection/ resolution.
615-221-7000
www.theparentco.com
∙
Fax: 615-221-7013
∙ Email: [email protected]
Pre-Bid Meeting Minutes
June 12, 2014
Page 2
5. Schedule
a. Grading work will begin upon receipt of a Grading Permit from the City of Franklin.
b. Building Permit is anticipated to be issued mid July.
c. Project Completion – September 2015.
d. TPC will issue project schedule with Bid Document Revision #1 that should be issued
tomorrow.
6. Scope of work
a. All Trade Contractors are encouraged to review scope specific items to be included in your
bid.
b. Unit Prices/ Allowances – Currently, there are only Unit Prices identified in the Carpentry and
Concrete Packages on the Proposal Forms. This includes a 500 hour unit price for carpenter
and a 500 hour unit price for a laborer in both the Concrete Package and Carpentry Package.
The Proposal Form for the Concrete and Carpentry is a combination proposal form. Bidder
may bid just the Concrete Package OR just the Carpentry Package OR a combination of both.
Make sure you indicate NO BID in the appropriate space if you are only bidding one package.
c. Alternates
i. Alternate #1 – Provide a third generator
ii. Alternate #2 – Provide a third chiller
7. Questions/ Clarifications
a. All light pole bases, concrete pads, etc. are included in the Carpentry Package.
b. TPC will clarify concrete for trenches, conduit encasement, ductbanks, kickers, etc.
c. The Roofing Package will be revised to include the Hot Applied Asphalt Waterproofing via a
Bid Document Revision. The roof paver system is included in this Specification Section.
d. TPC will send a list of all scope specific items and items included in each bid package to all
Trade Contractors, so that scope is clear for all packages.
With no other comments, the meeting adjourned at 10:30 AM
The above represents our understanding of the items discussed and conclusions reached. If there are errors,
omissions, or misunderstandings, please notify the writer within five (5) days of distribution; otherwise these
minutes shall be considered accurate.
Submitted by:
__________________________
Joel Carden, Sr. Project Manager
cc: All Attendees
All Bidders of Record
Act
ID
Description
Orig Rem
Dur Dur
Early
Start
Early
Finish
MAR
APR
MAY
JUN
JUL
2014
AUG
SEP
OCT
NOV
DEC
JAN
FEB
MAR
APR
MAY
2015
JUN
JUL
AUG
SEP
OCT
NOV
Preconstruction
1005
1007
1010
1020
1030
1040
1065
1068
1070
1075
1085
1090
Construction
Site
Grading package submission/ permitting
Issue Grading permit
Issue Grading package documents for bid
Bid Grading Package
Grading package pricing review/ approval
Award grading package
Complete Construciton Documents(CD)
CD submission/ Review/ Permitting
Issue Building Permit
Bid Trade Contracts
Pricing Review/ Approval
Award Trade Contracts
25d
3d
10d
12d
5d
2d
28d
35d
10d
18d
8d
10d
25d
3d
10d
12d
5d
2d
28d
35d
10d
18d
8d
10d
14APR14
19MAY14
14APR14
28APR14
14MAY14
21MAY14
14APR14
13MAY14
01JUL14
30MAY14 *
25JUN14
08JUL14
16MAY14
21MAY14
25APR14
13MAY14
20MAY14
22MAY14
21MAY14
30JUN14
15JUL14
24JUN14
07JUL14
21JUL14
2000
2010
2020
2030
2035
2038
2060
2065
2070
Mobilize
Silt Fence
Tree Protection Fencing
Begin excavation
Building pad
Proofroll/Testing
Complete excavation
Storm line
Site Fire Line
3d
3d
5d
8d
8d
3d
6d
10d
12d
3d
3d
5d
8d
8d
3d
6d
10d
12d
22MAY14
27MAY14
27MAY14
03JUN14
10JUN14
20JUN14
20JUN14
30JUN14
30JUN14
26MAY14
29MAY14
02JUN14
12JUN14
19JUN14
24JUN14
27JUN14
14JUL14
16JUL14
2080
Domestic Water line
7d 30JUN14
09JUL14
2095
2100
2102
2104
2106
2108
2110
2118
2120
2130
2140
2150
2160
2170
2175
Structure
Area A
3000
3010
3012
3020
3030
3040
Start date
Finish date
Data date
Run date
Page number
Begin Bioretention ponds
Site Sewer line
Site retaining wall @ mech yard
Cure Site retaining wall
Backfill at site retaining wall
Mechanical yard foundations, conc walls, SOG
Generator yard foundations, conc walls, SOG
Sidewalks/ Pavers
Fine grading
Curbs
Base stone
Asphalt paving
Topsoil / Fine Grading
Landscaping
Complete Bioretention ponds
Area A Foundations
Area A Foundation/ Retaining walls
Elevator conc shear walls
Cure Area A Foundation walls
Underground RI plumbing
Underground RI electrical
01APR14
19OCT15
14APR14
11JUN14
1A
© Primavera Systems, Inc.
7d
10d
8d
8d
10d
4d
18d
1d
36d
10d
10d
10d
6d
12d
15d
13d
10d
8d
8d
10d
4d
18d
15d
36d
10d
10d
10d
6d
12d
15d
13d
15JUL14
10JUL14
08OCT14
20OCT14
03NOV14
07NOV14
20OCT14
01APR15 *
21MAY15
04JUN15
18JUN15
02JUL15
10JUL15
28JUL15
28JUL15
28JUL14
21JUL14
17OCT14
31OCT14
06NOV14
02DEC14
07NOV14
20MAY15
03JUN15
17JUN15
01JUL15
09JUL15
27JUL15
17AUG15
13AUG15
20d
15d
9d
28d
12d
18d
20d
15d
9d
28d
12d
18d
22JUL14
13AUG14
13AUG14
29AUG14
08OCT14
08OCT14
18AUG14
02SEP14
25AUG14
07OCT14
23OCT14
31OCT14
Grading package submission/ permitting
Issue Grading permit
Issue Grading package documents for bid
Bid Grading Package
Grading package pricing review/ approval
Award grading package
Complete Construciton Documents(CD)
CD submission/ Review/ Permitting
Issue Building Permit
Bid Trade Contracts
Pricing Review/ Approval
Award Trade Contracts
Mobilize
Silt Fence
Tree Protection Fencing
Begin excavation
Building pad
Proofroll/Testing
Complete excavation
Storm line
Site Fire Line
Domestic Water line
Begin Bioretention ponds
Site Sewer line
Site retaining wall @ mech yard
Cure Site retaining wall
Backfill at site retaining wall
Mechanical yard foundations, conc walls, SOG
Generator yard foundations, conc walls, SOG
Sidewalks/ Pavers
Fine grading
Curbs
Base stone
Asphalt paving
Topsoil / Fine Grading
Landscaping
Complete Bioretention ponds
Area A Foundations
Area A Foundation/ Retaining walls
Elevator conc shear walls
Cure Area A Foundation walls
Underground RI plumbing
Underground RI electrical
Early bar
Progress bar
WCPS - Bid Schedule
Preliminary Bid Schedule
6.12.14
Critical bar
Summary bar
Start milestone point
Finish milestone point
Act
ID
3050
3070
3072
3080
3120
3130
3132
Area B
Description
Orig Rem
Dur Dur
Early
Start
Early
Finish
Backfill building foundation walls
Area A structural steel frame/ deck
Misc steel framing
SOG - Area A
2nd floor slab electrical RI
Reinforce/ Place 2nd floor slab
Reinforce/ Place Roof slab
7d
25d
20d
12d
12d
10d
10d
7d
25d
20d
12d
12d
10d
10d
08OCT14
03SEP14
08OCT14
25NOV14
08OCT14
28OCT14
11NOV14
16OCT14
07OCT14
04NOV14
10DEC14
23OCT14
10NOV14
24NOV14
3060
Area B Foundations
3090
Area B structural steel frame / deck
3100
Underground RI Electrical
3110
SOG - Area B
Building Envelope
18d
14d
9d
8d
18d
14d
9d
8d
03SEP14
08OCT14
28OCT14
08DEC14
26SEP14
27OCT14
07NOV14
17DEC14
4000
Precast - South
4010
Precast - West
4020
Precast - North
4030
Precast - East
4040
Begin roofing
4050
Complete roofing
4060
Exterior wall framing - South
4070
Exterior wall framing - North
4080
Exterior wall framing - East
4200
Windows - South
4210
Windows - north
4220
Windows - East
Interior Rough In/ Finishes
Area B
10d
8d
15d
8d
15d
12d
12d
14d
12d
12d
8d
15d
10d
8d
15d
8d
15d
12d
12d
14d
12d
12d
8d
15d
16DEC14
31DEC14
13JAN15
03FEB15
13FEB15
06MAR15
31DEC14
03FEB15
23FEB15
19JAN15
23FEB15
11MAR15
30DEC14
12JAN15
02FEB15
12FEB15
05MAR15
23MAR15
16JAN15
20FEB15
10MAR15
03FEB15
04MAR15
31MAR15
Electrical RI - 2nd floor
HVAC/ Piping RI - 2nd floor
Fire Protection RI - 2nd floor
Plumbing RI - 2nd Floor
Interior drywall framing - 2nd floor
Drywall - 2nd floor
Prime Paint - 2nd Floor
Acoustical Grid - 2nd Floor
HVAC Grilles - 2nd Floor
Light Fixtures - 2nd floor
Acoustical Tile - 2nd Floor
30d
30d
20d
15d
28d
22d
8d
10d
6d
6d
8d
30d
30d
20d
15d
28d
22d
8d
10d
6d
6d
8d
11DEC14
11DEC14
11DEC14
11DEC14
11DEC14
01APR15
27APR15
07MAY15
21MAY15
21MAY15
21MAY15
23JAN15
23JAN15
09JAN15
02JAN15
21JAN15
30APR15
06MAY15
20MAY15
28MAY15
28MAY15
01JUN15
Ceramic Tile - 2nd Floor
Interior Glass
Millwork/ Casework - 2nd Floor
Plumbing Fixtures - 2nd Floor
Toilet Acc/ Part.- 2nd floor
Flooring - 2nd floor
Finish Paint- 2nd Floor
8d
12d
8d
5d
4d
12d
6d
8d
12d
8d
5d
4d
12d
6d
27APR15
07MAY15
07MAY15
07MAY15
14MAY15
02JUN15
18JUN15
06MAY15
22MAY15
18MAY15
13MAY15
19MAY15
17JUN15
25JUN15
30d
30d
20d
15d
30d
30d
20d
15d
26JAN15
26JAN15
12JAN15
05JAN15
06MAR15
06MAR15
06FEB15
23JAN15
4500
4520
4530
4535
4540
4550
4560
4580
4590
4600
4610
4620
4622
4630
4640
4650
4660
4670
1st Floor
4710
4720
4730
4740
Start date
Finish date
Data date
Run date
Page number
Electrical RI - 1st floor
HVAC/ Piping RI - 1st floor
Fire Protection RI - 1st floor
Plumbing RI - 1st Floor
01APR14
19OCT15
14APR14
11JUN14
2A
MAR
APR
MAY
JUN
JUL
2014
AUG
SEP
OCT
NOV
DEC
JAN
FEB
MAR
APR
MAY
2015
JUN
JUL
AUG
SEP
OCT
NOV
Backfill building foundation walls
Area A structural steel frame/ deck
Misc steel framing
SOG - Area A
2nd floor slab electrical RI
Reinforce/ Place 2nd floor slab
Reinforce/ Place Roof slab
Area B Foundations
Area B structural steel frame / deck
Underground RI Electrical
SOG - Area B
Precast - South
Precast - West
Precast - North
Precast - East
Begin roofing
Complete roofing
Exterior wall framing - South
Exterior wall framing - North
Exterior wall framing - East
Windows - South
Windows - north
Windows - East
Electrical RI - 2nd floor
HVAC/ Piping RI - 2nd floor
Fire Protection RI - 2nd floor
Plumbing RI - 2nd Floor
Interior drywall framing - 2nd floor
Drywall - 2nd floor
Prime Paint - 2nd Floor
Acoustical Grid - 2nd Floor
HVAC Grilles - 2nd Floor
Light Fixtures - 2nd floor
Acoustical Tile - 2nd Floor
Ceramic Tile - 2nd Floor
Interior Glass
Millwork/ Casework - 2nd Floor
Plumbing Fixtures - 2nd Floor
Toilet Acc/ Part.- 2nd floor
Flooring - 2nd floor
Finish Paint- 2nd Floor
Electrical RI - 1st floor
HVAC/ Piping RI - 1st floor
Fire Protection RI - 1st floor
Plumbing RI - 1st Floor
Early bar
Progress bar
WCPS - Bid Schedule
6.12.14
Critical bar
Summary bar
Act
ID
Description
Orig Rem
Dur Dur
Early
Start
Early
Finish
4750
4760
4770
4780
4790
4800
4810
4820
4825
4830
4840
4850
4860
4870
4880
4890
4900
4910
4920
4930
4940
4950
Interior drywall framing - 1st floor
Drywall - 1st floor
Prime Paint - 1st Floor
Acoustical Grid - 1st Floor
HVAC Grilles - 1st Floor
Light Fixtures - 1st floor
Acoustical Tile - 1st Floor
Ceramic Tile - 1st Floor
Interior Glass
Millwork/ Casework - 1st Floor
Plumbing Fixtures - 1st Floor
Toilet Acc/ Part.- 1st floor
Flooring - 1st floor
Finish Paint- 1st Floor
Elevator Install
Set Mechancial Equipment
Mechanical Equipment Connections
Test Systems
Start Up Mech Equipment
Set Electrical Equipment
Electrical Connections
Energize
28d
22d
8d
12d
6d
6d
8d
8d
10d
10d
5d
4d
12d
10d
30d
30d
30d
15d
20d
30d
30d
8d
28d
22d
8d
12d
6d
6d
8d
8d
10d
10d
5d
4d
12d
10d
30d
30d
30d
15d
20d
30d
30d
8d
22JAN15
01MAY15
02JUN15
12JUN15
30JUN15
30JUN15
30JUN15
27MAY15
12JUN15
12JUN15
08JUN15
15JUN15
10JUL15
28JUL15
03APR15
11DEC14
26JAN15
09MAR15
03APR15
11DEC14
26JAN15
24MAR15
02MAR15
01JUN15
11JUN15
29JUN15
07JUL15
07JUL15
09JUL15
05JUN15
25JUN15
25JUN15
12JUN15
18JUN15
27JUL15
10AUG15
14MAY15
23JAN15
06MAR15
27MAR15
30APR15
23JAN15
06MAR15
02APR15
3205
3215
Punch List
Owner FFE
25d
25d
25d 11AUG15
25d 15SEP15
14SEP15
19OCT15
Start date
Finish date
Data date
Run date
Page number
01APR14
19OCT15
14APR14
11JUN14
3A
MAR
APR
MAY
JUN
JUL
2014
AUG
SEP
OCT
NOV
DEC
JAN
FEB
MAR
APR
MAY
2015
JUN
JUL
AUG
SEP
OCT
NOV
Interior drywall framing - 1st floor
Drywall - 1st floor
Prime Paint - 1st Floor
Acoustical Grid - 1st Floor
HVAC Grilles - 1st Floor
Light Fixtures - 1st floor
Acoustical Tile - 1st Floor
Ceramic Tile - 1st Floor
Interior Glass
Millwork/ Casework - 1st Floor
Plumbing Fixtures - 1st Floor
Toilet Acc/ Part.- 1st floor
Flooring - 1st floor
Finish Paint- 1st Floor
Elevator Install
Set Mechancial Equipment
Mechanical Equipment Connections
Test Systems
Start Up Mech Equipment
Set Electrical Equipment
Electrical Connections
Energize
Punch List
Owner FFE
Early bar
Progress bar
WCPS - Bid Schedule
6.12.14
Critical bar
Summary bar

2013 - Rock City Construction Co., Inc.

Transcription

Similar documents

Pay Application #4 - the Public Building Commission of Chicago

AAA Kempinski Hotel, Vilnius

R-3324 Long Beach Road Extension

Mark Rycraft

yaggy colby - Olmsted County

Uncle Bob

How to Open an Account with Great Lakes Credit Union (GLCU)

Qualification Form - Integrity Construction Service

Viktoria